CHEMICAL ENGINEERING OBJECTIVE

TYPE QUESTIONS: A COMPILATION
DR. LEONARDO C. MEDINA, JR.
DEAN, COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
LYCEUM OF THE PHILIPPINES UNIVERSITY


CHEMICAL REACTION ENGINEERING AND
REACTOR DESIGN

1. Rate of chemical reaction is independent of the concentration of reactants for
(a) zero order reaction
(b) third order reaction
(c) consecutive reaction
(d) none of these
2. Which of the following is not a unit of reaction rate?
(a) moles formed/(surface of catalyst) (time)
(b) moles formed/(volume of reactor) (time)
(c) mole formed/(volume of catalyst) (time)
(d) none of these
3. If ³n´ is the order of reaction then unit of rate constant is
(a) 1
(time) (concentration)
n-1

(b) (time)
-1
(concentration)
n-1

(c) (time)
n-1
(concentration)
(d) none of these
4. Which of the following is a controlling factor in very fast heterogeneous
reaction?
(a) heat and mass transfer effects
(b) pressure
(c) temperature
(d) composition of reactant
5. Variables affecting the rate of homogeneous reactions are
(a) pressure and temperature only
(b) temperature and composition only
(c) pressure and composition only
(d) pressure, temperature and composition
6. Rate determining step in a reaction consisting of a number of step in
series is the
(a) fastest step
(b) slowed step
(c) intermediate step
(d) data insufficient; can't be predict


7. Chemical kinetics can predict the
(a) rate of reaction
(b) feasibility of reaction
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) none of these
8. Velocity of a chemical reaction
(a) decreases with increase in temperature
(b) increases with increase of pressure of reactant for all reactions
(c) decreases with increase of reactant concentration
(d) none of these
9. Sum of the powers of the concentration terms in the rate equation is called the
(a) order of the reaction
(b) overall order of the reaction
(c) molecularity of the reaction
(d) none of these
10.Molecularity of a reaction
(a) is always equal to the overall order of reaction
(b) may not be equal to the order of reaction
(c) can¶t have a fractional value
(d) both (b) and (c)
11.Inversion of cane sugar is an example of
(a) unimolecular reaction with first order
(b) bimolecular reaction with second order
(c) bimolecular reaction with first order
(d) unimolecular reaction with second order
12.Concentration of the limiting reactant (with initial concentration of a moles/liter)
after time t is (a-x).Then t for a first order reaction is given by
(a) kt = ln a
a-x
(b) kt = x
a(a-x)
(c) kt = ln a-x
a
(d) k.t = a (a-x)
x
13.Half life period of a chemical reaction is
(a) the time required to reduce the concentration of the reacting substance
to half its initial value
(b) half of the space time of a reaction
(c) half of the residence time of a reaction
(d) none of these





14.Fill up the blanks:
Half-life period for a first order reaction is....................... the initial concentration
of the reactant
(a) directly proportional to
(b) inversely proportional to
(c) independent of
(d) none of these
15. Fill up the blanks from among the alternatives given below: In a first order reaction
the time required to reduce the concentration of reactant from 1 mole/liter to 0.5
mole/liter will be ............. that required to reduce it from 10 moles/liter to 5 moles/liter in
the same volume
(a) more than
(b) less than
(c) same as
(d) data insufficient; can't be predicted
16. Specific rate constant for a second order reaction
(a) is independent of temperature
(b) varies with temperature
(c) depends on the nature of the reactants
(d) both (b) and (c)
17. The reaction in which rate equation corresponds to a stoichiometric equation is called
(a) elementary reaction
(b) non-elementary reaction
(c) parallel reaction
(d) autokinetic reaction
18. Equilibrium of a chemical reaction as viewed by kinetics is a
(a) dynamic steady state
(b) static steady state
(c) dynamic unsteady state
(d) none of these
19. For a zero order reaction, concentration of product increases with
(a) increase of reaction time
(b) increase in initial concentration
(c) total pressure
(d) decrease in total pressure
20. Fill up the blanks
Arrhenius equation shows the variation of __________with temperature
(a) Reaction rate
(b) Rate constant
(c) Energy of activation
(d) Frequency factor





21. The energy of activation of a chemical reaction
(a) is same as heat of reaction at constant pressure
(b) is the minimum energy which the molecules must have before the reaction
can take place
(c) varies as fifth power of the temperature
(d) both (b) and (c)
22. Rate constant 'k' and the absolute temperature T are related by collision theory (for
bimolecular) as
(a) k w T
1.5

(b) k w e
±E/RT

(c) k w T
(d) k w T
23. Transition state theory relates the above quantities as
(a) k w e
±E/RT

(b) k w Te
±E/RT

(c) k w T
(d) k w T
1.5

24.Reactions with high activation energy are
(a) very temperature sensitive
(b) temperature insensitive
(c) always irreversible
(d) always reversible
25. In autocalytic reactions
(a) one of the reactants acts as a catalyst
(b) one of the products acts as a catalyst
(c) catalyst has very high selectivity
(d) no catalyst is used
26. With increase in temperature, the equilibrium conversion of a reversible exothermic
reaction
(a) decreases
(d) increases
(c) remain unaffected
(d) decreases linearly with temperature
27. With decrease in temperature, the equilibrium conversion of a reversible endothermic
reaction
(a) decreases
(b) increases
(c) remains unaffected
(d) increases linearly with temperature
28. The equilibrium constant of a chemical reaction
(a) increases in the presence of catalyst
(b) decreases in the presence of catalyst
(c) remains unaffected in the presence of a catalyst
(d) can either increase or decrease; depends on the type of catalyst


29. Conversion increases with increase in temperature of
(a) Autocatalytic reaction
(b) Irreversible reaction
(c) Reversible endothermic reaction
(d) Reversible exothermic reaction
30. The heat of reaction
(a) depends on the pressure only
(b) depends on the mechanism of reaction only
(c) depends on both pressure and mechanism of reaction
(d) is independent of the mechanism of reaction
31. Integral method for analyzing the kinetic data is used
(a) when the data are scattered
(b) for testing specific mechanisms with simple rate expression
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) none of these
32. Differential method for analyzing the kinetic data is used
(a) for testing complicated mechanisms
(b) when the data are scattered
(c) when rate expressions are very simple
(d) none of these
33.Exposure of a photographic plate to produce a latent image is an example of
(a) Very slow reaction
(b) Very fast reaction
(c) Photochemical reaction
(d) Both (b) and (c)
34. A trickle bed reactor is one which
(a) has altogether three streams either entering or leaving
(b) processes three reactants at different flow rates
(c) processes three reactant with same flow rate
(d) employs all the three phases (i.e. solid liquid and gas)
35.According to Arrhenius equation of temperature dependency of rate constant for an
elementary reaction
(a) k w ˜T
(b) k w e-
E/RT

(c) k w Te-
E/RT

(d) none of these
36. With increases in temperature, the rate constant obeying Arrhenius equation
(a) increases
(b) decreases
(c) decreases exponentially with temperature
(d) can either increase or decrease, depends on the frequency factor





37. A batch reactor is characterized by
(a) constant residence time
(b) the variation in extent of reaction and properties of the reaction mixture
with time
(c) variation in reactor volume
(d) very low conversion
38. A plug-flow reactor is characterized by
(a) high capacity
(b) presence of axial mixing
(c) presence of lateral mixing
(d) constant composition and temperature of reaction mixture
39. In a semi-batch reactor
(a) velocity of reaction can be controlled
(b) maximum conversion can be controlled
(c) both the as reactants flow counter-currently
(d) residence time is constant
40. A back mix reactor
(a) is same as plug-flow reactor
(b) is same as ideal stirred tank reactor
(c) employs mixing in axial direction only
(d) is most suitable for gas phase reaction
41. In a continuous flow stirred tank reactor the composition of the exit stream
(a) is same as that in the reactor
(b) is different than that in the reactor
(c) depends upon the flow rate of inlet stream
(d) none of these
42. In an ideal tubular-flow reactor
(a) there is no mixing in longitudinal direction
(b) mixing takes place in radial direction
(c) there is a uniform velocity across the radius
(d) all (a), (b) and (c)
43. Space velocity
(a) describes the extensive operating characteristics of a tubular flow reactor
(b) is the maximum feed rate per unit volume of reactor for is given conversion
(c) is a measure of the case of the reaction job
(d) all (a), (b) and (c)
44. A high space velocity means that a given
(a) reaction can be accomplished with small reactor
(b) conversion can be obtained with a high feed rate
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) none of these




45. Space time in flow reactor is
(a) usually equal to the residence time
(b) the reciprocal of the space velocity
(c) a measure of its capacity
(d) both (a) and (c)
46. A space-time of 3 hours for a flow reactor means that
(a) the time required to process one reactor volume of feed (measured at
specified conditions) is 3 hour
(b) three reactor volumes of feed can be processed every hour
(c) it takes three hours to dump the entire volume of the reaction with feed
(d) conversion is cent per cent after three hour
47. Space time equals the mean residence time
(a) when the density of the reaction mixture is constant
(b) for large diameter tubular reactor
(c) for narrow diameter tubular reactor
(d) for CSTR
48. Fluidized bed reactor is characterized by
(a) uniformity of temperature
(b) comparatively smaller equipment
(c) very small pressure drop
(d) absence of continuous catalyst regeneration facility
49. A batch reactor is
(a) suitable for gas-phase reaction on commercial scale
(b) suitable for liquid ±phase reaction involving small production rate
(c) least expensive to operate for a given rate
(d) most suitable for very large production rate
50. Which of the following is the most suitable for very high-pressure gas-phase
reaction?
(a) batch reactor
(b) tubular flow reactor
(c) stirred tank reactor
(d) fluidized bed reactor
51. For nearly isothermal operation involving large reaction time in a liquid ±phase
reaction, the most suitable reactor is
(a) stirred tank reactor
(b) tubular flow reactor
(c) batch reactor
(d) fixed bed reactor
52. A stirred tank reactor compared to tubular-flow reactor provides
(a) more uniform operation condition
(b) permits operation at the optimum temperature for a long reaction time
(c) higher overall selectivity for a first order consecutive reaction
(d) all (a), (b) and (c)



53. For the same residence time, which will give the maximum conversion?
(a) single stirred tank (v=5liters)
(b) two stirred tank (each of 2.5liters) in series
(c) stirred tank followed by tubular flow reactor (each 2.5liters)
(d) single tubular flow reactor (v=5liters)
54. Oil hydrogenated using nickel catalyst in a
(a) batch reactor
(b) slurry reactor
(c) fluidized bed reactor
(d) fixed bed reactor
55. A second order reaction of the form A+B C is called a pseudo-first order reaction
when
(a) C
AO
= C
BO

(b) C
AO
> C
BO

(c) C
AO {
C
BO

(d) C
BO
> C
AO

56. A first order irreversible reaction A B is carried separately in a constant volume as
well as a in a variable volume reactor for a particular period. It signifies that
(a) both conversion as well as concentration are same in the two reactors
(b) conversion in both will be the same but concentrations will be different in
the two reactors
(c) both the conversion as well as concentrations will be different in the two
reactors
(d) none of these
57.A space velocity of 5 hour means that
(a) five reactor volumes of feed (at specified conditions) are being fed into the
reactor per hour
(b) after five hours, reactor is being filled with the feed
(c) cent percent conversion can be achieved in at least 5 hours
(d) a fixed conversion of a given batch of feed takes 5 hours
58. Which of the following fixes the volume of a batch reactor for a particular conversion
and production rate?
(a) operating conditions (e.g. pressure and temperature)
(b) rate constant
(c) density of mixture
(d) none of these
59. In a CSTR
(a) reaction rate varies with time
(b) concentration varies with time
(c) both (a) and (b) occur
(d) neither (a) nor (b) occurs
60. The use of space-time is preferred over the mean residence time in the design of
(a) batch reactor
(b) ideal tubular-flow reactor
(c) slurry reactor
(d) CSTR
61. For all positive reaction orders for a particular duty
(a) mixed reactor is always larger than the plug-flow reactor
(b) the ratio of the volume of the mixed reactor to that of the plug-flow
reactor decreases with order
(c) reactor size is independent of the type of flow
(d) density variation during reaction affects design
62. With the same reaction time, initial concentration and feed rate, the reaction 2A B
is carried out separately in CSTR and P.F. reactor of equal volumes. The conversion will
be
(a) higher in P.F. reactor
(b) higher in CSTR
(c) same in both the reactors
(d) data insufficient; can¶t be predicted
63. For an autocatalytic reactor, the suitable reactor set up is
(a) P.F. reactors in series
(b) CSTR in series
(c) CSTR followed by P.F. reactor
(d) P.F. reactor followed by CSTR
64. For multiple reactions, the reaction within the vessel affects the
(a) Size requirement
(b) Distribution of reaction product
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Neither (a) nor (b)
65. A first order reaction requires two unequal sized CSTR. Which of the following gives
a higher yield?
(a) Large reactor followed by smaller one
(b) Smaller reactor followed by larger one
(c) Either of the arrangement (a) or (b) will give the same yield
(d) Data insufficient; can¶t be predicted
66. A first order reaction requires two equal sized CSTR. The conversion is
(a) Less when they are connected in series
(b) More when they are connected in series
(c) More when they are connected in parallel
(d) Same whether they are connected in series or parallel
67. The concentration of A in a first order reaction A pB decreases
(a) Linearly with time
(b) Exponentially with time
(c) Very abruptly toward the end of the reaction
(d) Logarithmically with time
68. Which of the following is most suitable for isothermal reaction ?
(a) Batch reactor
(b) Back-mix reactor
(c) Plug-flow reactor
(d) Fixed bad reactor


69. Which of the following is the optimum operating condition for an exothermic
reversible reaction-taking place in a plug-flow reactor
(a)Temperature should be high in the beginning and decreased
towards the end of the reaction
(b) Very low temperature should be used throughout the reaction
(c) Very high temperature should be used throughout the reaction
(d) None of these
70. With increase in the space-time of an irreversible isothermal reaction being carried
out in a P.F. reactor, the conversion will
(a) Increase
(b) Decrease
(c) Remain same
(d) Data sufficient; can¶t be predicted
71. The optimum performance for reactors operating in parallel is obtained when the feed
stream is distributed in such a way that the
(a) Space time for each parallel line is same
(b) Space time for parallel lines is different
(c) Larger reactors have more space time compared to smaller ones
(d) None of these
72. Back mixing is most predominant in
(a) A well stirred reactor
(b) Plug-flow reactor
(c) A single CSTR
(d) CSTR connected in series
73. The ratio of moles of a reactant converted into the desired product to that converted
into unwanted product is called
(a) Operational yield
(b) Relative yield
(c) Selectivity
(d) None of these
74. The performance of a cascade of CSTR¶s can be improved by adding
(a) a P.F. reactor in series
(b) a P.F. reactor in parallel
(c) More CSTR¶s in series
(d) More CSTR¶s in parallel
75. An auto thermal reactor is
(a) Most suitable for a second order reaction
(b) Most suitable for a reversible reaction
(c) Completely self supporting in its thermal energy requirements
(d) Isothermal in nature
76. For series reaction,the
(a) Relative yield is always greater for plug-flow reactor tha) for the single
CSTR of the same volume
(b) Statement in a is wrong
(c) Relative yield decreases with increasing conversion
(d) Both (a) and (c) hold good
77. When a high liquid hold up is required in a reactor for a gas-liquid reaction,
use
(a) Packed column
(b) Spray column
(c) Tray column
(d) Bubble column
78. For reactions in parallel viz. AĺP (desired product) and AĺQ (unwanted product),
if the order of the desired reaction is higher than that of the undesired reaction, a
(a) Batch rector is preferred over a single CSTR for high yield
(b) Tubular rector is preferred over a single CSTR for high yield
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) A single CSTR is the most suitable
79. In question 78, high yield would be favored ( for gas phase reactions)
(a) At high pressure
(b) At low pressure
(c) By the presence of the inner gases in the reactabt stream
(d) Both (b) and (c)
80. When all the limiting reactant is consumed in the reaction, the operation yield
(a) Is greater than relative yield
(b) Is smaller than relative yield
(c) Equals the relative yield
(d) Can be greater or smaller than relative yield, depends on the type of
reaction
81. Design of heterogeneous catalytic reactor involves consideration of
(a) Only chemical steps
(b) Only physical steps
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Neither (a) and (b)
82. Pick out the wrong statement
(a) A catalyst does not alter the final position of equilibrium in a reversible
reaction.
(b) A catalyst initiate a reaction
(c) A catalyst is specific in action
(d) A catalyst remain unchanged in chemical composition at the end of the
reaction
83. Catalyst is a substance which
(a) Increases the speed of chemical reaction
(b) Decreases the speed of chemical reaction
(c) Can either increase or decrease the speed of chemical reaction
(d) Alters the value of equilibrium constant in a reversible reaction
84. Catalyst carriers
(a) Have very high selectivity
(b) Increase the activity of a catalyst
(c) Provide large surface area with small amount of active material
(d) Inhibit catalyst poisoning

85. A catalyst promoter
(a) Improves the activity of a catalyst
(b) Acts as a catalyst support
(c) Itself has very high activity
(d) All (a) (b) and (c)
86. A catalyst inhibitor
(a) Lessens its selectivity
(b) May be useful for suppressing undesirable side reaction
(c) Is added in small quantity during the catalyst manufacture itself
(d) All (a) (b) and (c)
87. Carbon catalyst accumulated on the catalyst used in the gas oil cracking lies in the
category of :
(a) Deposited poison
(b) Chemisorbed poison
(c) Selectivity poison
(d) Stability poison
88. Slurry reactors are characterised by
(a) Lack of intra-particle diffusion resistance
(b) Presence of two mobile phase
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Neither (a) nor (b)
89. A reaction . Aĺ 3 B is conducted in a constant pressure vessel. Starting with pure A,
the volume of the reaction mixture increase 3 times in 6 minutes. The final conversion is
(a) 0.33
(b) 0.50
(c) 1
(d) Data insufficient, can¶t be predicted
90. The most suitable reactor for carrying out an auto-thermal reaction is
(a) Batch reactor
(b) CSTR
(c) Semi-batch reactor
(d) Plug-flow reactor
91 Which of the following factors control the design of a fluid solid reactor?
(a) The reaction kinetics for single particle
(b) The size distribution of solids being treated
(c) Flow patterns of solids and fluids in the reactor
(d) All (a) (b) and (c)
92. Kinetics of solid catalyst reaction can be studied in a
(a) Batch reactor
(b) Plug-flow reactor
(c) Mixed reactor
(d) None of these




93. For high conversion in highly exothermic solid catalyzed reaction, use a
(a) Fixed bed reactor
(b) Fluidized bed reactor followed by a fixed bed reactor
(c) Fixed bed reactor followed by a fluidized bed reactor
(d) Fluidized bed reactor
94. In case of staged packed bed reactors carrying out exothermic reaction, use
(a) High recycle for pure glass
(b) Plug flow for dilute liquid require no large preheating of feed
(c) Cold shot operations for a dilute solution requiring large preheating to
bring the steam up to the reaction temperature
(d) All (a) (b) and (c)
95. Which of the following will give the maximum gas conversion ?
(a) Fixed bed reactor
(b) fluidized reactor
(c) Semi-fluidized reactor
(d) Plug flow catalytic reactor
96. Which of the following factors control the deactivation of a porous catalyst pellet?
(a) Decay reactions
(b) Pore diffusion
(c) Form of surface attack of poison
(d) All (a) (b) and (c)
97. BET apparatus is used to determine the
(a) Specific surface of porous catalyst
(b) Pore size distribution
(c) Pore diameter
(d) Porosity of the catalyst bed
98. If pore diffusion is the controlling step in a solid catalyzed reaction the catalyst
(a) Porosity is very important
(b) Porosity is less importance
(c) Internal surface is utilized efficiently
(d) None of these
99. BET apparatus
(a) Measure the catalyst surface area directly
(b) Operates at very high pressure
(c) Is made entirely by stainless steel
(d) None of these
100. Helium-mercury method can be used to determine the
(a) Pore volume
(b) Solid density
(c) Porosity of catalyst particle
(d) All (a) (b) and (c)





CHEMICAL ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS

1. Which of the following is an extensive property of a system?
a. heat capacity b. molal heat capactiy
c. pressure d. concentration

2. Which of the following is a thermodynamic property of a system?
a. concentration b. mass
c. temperature d. entropy

3. First law of thermodynamics is mathematically stated as
a. dQ = dU + dW b. dQ = dU ± dW
c. dU = dQ + dW d. dW = dQ ± dU

4. First law of thermodynamics deals with
a. direction of energy transfer b. reversible process only
c. irreversible processes only d. none of these

5. An irreversible process
a. is the analog of linear frictionless motion in machines
b. is an idealized visualization of behavior of a system
c. yields the maximum amount of work
d. yields the amount of work less than that of a reversible process.

6. In a adiabatic process
a. heat transfer is zero b. temperature change is zero
c. work done is a path function d. enthalpy remains constant

7. Enthalpy µH¶ is defined as
a. H = U ± PV b. H = U ± TS
c. H ± U = PV d. none of these

8. Efficiency of heat engine working on Carnot cycle between two temperature levels
depends upon
a. the two temperatures only b. the pressure of working fluid
c. the mass of the working fluid d. both mass and pressure of the
working fluid

9. What is the degree of freedom for a system comprising liquid water equilibrium with
its vapor?
a. 0 b. 1
c. 2 d. 3

10. Efficiency of a Carnot engine working between temperatures T
1
and T
2
(T
1
< T
2
) is
a. (T
2
± T
1
) / T
2
b. (T
2
± T
1
) / T
1

c (T
1
± T
2
) / T
2
d. (T
1
±T
2
) / T
1

11. For a constant pressure reversible process, the enthalpy ( ¨H) change of the system is
a. C vdT b. Cp dT
c. œ Cp dT d. œCv dT

12. Internal energy of an ideal gas
a. increases with increase in pressure
b. decreases with increase in temperature
c. is independent of temperature
d. none of these

13. Equation which relates pressure, volume, and temperature of a gas is called
a. Equation of state b. Gibbs Duhem equation
c. ideal gas equation d. none of these

14. Isobaric process means a constant
a. temperature process b. pressure process
c. volume process d. entropy process

15. Isentropic process means a constant
a. enthalpy process b. pressure process
c. volume process d. none of these

16. Throttling process is a constant
a. enthalpy process b. entropy process
c. pressure process d. none of these

17. The point at which all three phases co-exist is known as
a. freezing point b. triple point
c. boiling point d. none of these

18. C, for an ideal gas
a. does not depend upon temperature
b. is independent of pressure only
c. is independent of volume only
d. is independent of both pressure and volume

19. For an isothermal process the internal energy of a gas
a. increases b. decreases
c. remains unchanged d. data insufficient can¶t be predicted

20. PV
K
= Constant (where, K = C
p
/ C
v
) is valid for
a. Isothermal process b. Isentropic process
c. Isobaric process d. adiabatic process



21. For an isothermal reversible compression of an ideal gas
a. only ¨U= 0 b. only ¨H = 0
c. ¨U = ¨H = 0 d. dQ ± dU

22. As the time is passing, entropy of the universe
a. is increasing b. is decreasing
c. remains constant d. data insufficient, can¶t be predicted

23. Boyle¶s law for gases states that
a. P w 1/V when temperature is constant
b. P w1/V when temperature and mass of the gas remains constant
c. P w V at a constant temperature and mass of the gas
d. P/V = constant, for any gas

24. The equation, PV = nRT is best obeyed by gases at
a. low pressure and high temperature
b. high pressure and low temperature
c. low pressure and low temperature
d. none of these

25. Compressibility factor of a gas is
a. not a function of pressure b. not a function of its nature
c. not a function of its temperature d. unity, if it follows PV = nRT

26. Critical compressibility factor for all substances
a. are more less constant(vary from 0.2 to 0.3)
b. vary as square of the absolute temperature
c. vary as square of the absolute pressure
d. none of these

27. Reduced pressure of a gas is the ratio of its
a. pressure to critical pressure b. critical pressure to pressure
c. pressure to pseudocritical pressure d. pseudocritical pressure to pressure

28. Compressibility factor-reduced pressure plot on reduced coordinates facilities
a. use only one graph for all gases
b. covering of wider range
c. easier plotting
d. more accurate plotting

29. Number of components (C) phase (P) and degrees of freedom (F) are related by Gibbs
phase rule as
a. P + F ± C = 2 b. C =P ± F +2
c. F = C ±P ± 2 d. P = F ± C ±2


30. Degrees of freedom at triple point will be
a. 0 b. 1
c. 2 d. 3

31. Cp ± Cv = R is valid for
a. ideal gases b. all gases
c. gases at very high pressure d. gases at a very low temperature

32. An isolated system can exchange
a. matter with its surroundings
b. energy with its surroundings
c. neither matter nor energy with its surroundings
d. both matter and energy with its surroundings.

33. Heat of formation of an element in its standard state is
a. 0 b. <0
c. >0 d. a function of pressure

34. Heat of reaction is
a. dependent on pressure only
b. dependent on temperature only
c. dependent on both pressure and temperature
d. independent of temperature changes

35. Second law of thermodynamics is concerned with
a. amount of energy transferred
b. direction of energy transfer
c. irreversible process only
d. non-cyclic process only

36. The absolute entropy for all crystalline substances at absolute zero temperature
a. is zero b. is negative
c. is more than zero d. can¶t be determined

37. Joule ± Thomson coefficient is defined as
a. Q = ( ˜P/˜T)
H
b. Q = ( ˜T/ ˜P)
H

c. Q = ( ˜U/ ˜T)
H
d. Q ± ( ˜U/ ˜P)
H


38. Mollier diagram is a plot of
a. temperature vs. enthalpy
b. temperature vs. entropy
c. entropy vs. enthalpy
d. temperature vs. internal energy



39. Fill up the blank from among the following:
Near their critical temperature all gases, occupy volumes««« that of the ideal gas
a. less than b. same as
c. more than d. half

40. Charles law for gases states that
a. V/T = constant b. V w 1/T
c. V w1/P d. PV/T = constant

41. Absolute zero temperature signifies
a. minimum temperature attainable
b. the temperature of the heat reservoir to which a Carnot engine rejects all the heat
that is taken in
c. the temperature of the heat reservoir to which a Carnot engine rejects no
heat
d. none of these

42. Entropy is measure of
a. disorder of a system
b. orderly behavior of a system
c. only temperature changes of the system
d. none of these

43. For spontaneous changes in an isolated system( S = entropy )
a. dS = 0 b. dS < 0
c. dS> 0 d. dS = constant

44. For equilibrium process in an isolated system
a. dS = 0 b. dS < 0
c. dS>0 d. dS = constant

45. The four properties of a system via P,V,T,S are related by
a. Gibbs-Duhem equation b. Gibbs-Helmholtz equation
c. Maxwell¶s equation d. none of these

46. For a constant volume process
a. dU = C pdT b. dU = Cv dT
c. dQ = dU + pdV d. dW = pdV

47. In a reversible process
a. TdS = dU + dW b. dU ± dW = TdS
c. dW ± dU = TdS d. TdS ± dW ± dU > 0

48. In an irreversible process
a. TdS = UdW = 0 b. dU ± dW ± TdS = 0
c. TdS ± dU ± dW <0 d. TdS ± dT + dW < 0

49. Cv is given by
a. ( ˜U/ ˜T)v b. ( ˜U/˜V)
T

c. ( ˜U/˜P)v d. (˜V/ ˜T)
P


50. Third law of thermodynamics is concerned with
a. the value of absolute entropy
b. energy transfer
c. direction of energy transfer
d. none of these

51. Which of the following equation is obtained on combining 1
sT
and 2
nd
law of
thermodynamics, for a system of constant mass?
a. dU = TdS ± PdV b. dQ = Cv dT + PdV
c. dQ = Cp dT + Vdp d. TdS = dU ± PdV

52. The equation TdS = dU ± PdV applies to
a. single phase fluid of varying composition
b. single phase fluid of constant composition
c. open as well as closed systems
d. both b and c

53. For an exothermic reaction
a. only enthalpy change (¨H)is negative
b. only internal energy change (¨U) is negative
c. both ¨H and ¨U are negative
d. enthalpy change is zero

54. If different processes are used to bring about the same chemical reaction, the enthalpy
change is same for all of them.
a. Hess¶s law b. Kirchhoff¶s law
c. Lavoisier and Laplace law d. none of these

55. Change of heat content when one mole of the compound is burnt in oxygen at
constant pressure is called
a. calorific value b. heat of reaction
c. heat of combustion d. heat of formation

56. Melting of wax is accompanied with
a. increase in entropy b. decrease in entropy
c. constant entropy d. none of these

57. Helmholtz free energy is defined as
a. A = H ± TS b. A = U ± TS
c. A = H + TS d. none of these

58. Gibbs free energy (G) is defined as
a. G = U± TS b. G = H - TS
c. G = H + TS d. G = U+ TS

59. Gibbs-Helmholtz equation is
a. ¨G = ¨H + T[ ˜( ¨G)/ ˜T]
P

b. ¨G = ¨H ± T¨T
c. d(U ±TS)T ,V <0
d. dP/dT = ¨H
VAP
/ T¨V
VAP


60. For a reversible process involving only pressure volume work
a. (dG)
T
, p<0 b. (dG)
T
, p>0
c. (dG)
T
, p=0 d. (dA)
T
, v > 0

61. For an irreversible process involving only pressure volume work
a. (dG)
T
, p<0 b. (dG)
T
, p>0
c. (dG)
T
, p=0 d. (dA)
T
, v > 0

62. Pick out the correct equation relating G and A
a. G = A + PV b. G = U + A
c. G = A ± TS d. G = A + TS

63. A chemical reaction will occur spontaneously at constant pressure and temperature, if
free energy is
a. zero b. positive
c. negative d. none of these

64. Clapeyron equation deals with the
a. rate of change of vapor pressure with temperature
b. effect of an inert gas on vapor pressure
c. calculation of G for spontaneous phase change
d. temperature dependence of least of phase transition

65. In any spontaneous process
a. only G decreases b. only A decreases
c. both G and A decreases d. both G and A increases

66. Pick out the Claussius-Clayperon equation from the following:
a. dP/dT = ¨ H/T ¨V b. ln P = - ¨H/ RT + constant
c. ¨G = ¨H + T[ ˜ ( ¨G)/˜T]
P
d. none of these

67. Free energy charges for two reaction mechanism X and Y are respectively ± 15 and 5
units. It implies that X is
a. slower than Y b. faster than Y
c. three times slower than Y d. three times faster than Y

68. Chemical potential is
a. an extensive property
b. an intensive property
c. a force which derives the chemical system to equilibrium
d. both b and c

69. Chemical potential of its component of a system is given by
a. Q
i
= ( xG/xn
i
)
T,P,ni
b. Q
i
= ( xA/xn
i
)
T,P,ni

c. Q
i
= ( xG/xn
i
)
T,P
d. Q
i
= ( xA/xn
i
)
T,P


70. Fill up the blanks from among the following alternatives;
The chemical potential for a pure substance «.. its partial molal free energy
a. more than b. less than
c. equal to d. not related to

71. Partial molal quantities are important in the study of
a. ideal gases b. ideal solutions
c. non-ideal mixtures d. a pure component

72. Fugacity and pressure are numerically equal when the gas is
a. in standard state b. at high temperature
c. at low temperature d. in ideal state

73. The relation connecting the fugacities of various components in a solution with one
another and to composition at constant temperature and pressure is called
a. Gibbs-Duhem equation b. Van Laar equation
c. Gibbs-Helmholtz equation d. Margules equation

74. The necessary condition for phase equilibrium in a multiphase system of N
components is the
a. chemical potential of all components should be equal in all phases
b. chemical potentials of all components should be same in a particular phase
c. sum of the chemical potentials of any given component in all the phases should be
the same
d. none of these

75. Which of the following is not affected by temperature changes
a. fugacity b. activity co-efficient
c. free energy d. none of these

76. The activity of an ideal gas is numerically
a. more than it pressure b. less than its pressure
c. equal to its pressure d. data insufficient can¶t be predicted


77. Maximum work that could be secured by expanding the gas over a given pressure
range is the
a. isothermal work b. adiabatic work
c. isentropic work d. none of these

78. The point at which both liquid and gas phases are identical is called
a. critical point b. triple point
c. freezing point d. boiling point

79. Equilibrium constant of a reaction varies with
a. initial concentration of the reactant b. pressure
c. temperature d. none of these

80. For an ideal solution, the value of activity coefficient is
a. 0 b. 1
c. <1 d. >1

81. Fugacity coefficient of a substance is the ratio of its fugacity to
a. mole fraction b. activity
c. pressure d. activity coefficient

82. Van Laar equation deals with activity coefficients in
a. binary solution b. ternary solution
c. azeotropic mixture only d. none of these

83. In Joule-Thomson porous plug experiment
a. enthalpy does not remain constant
b. the entire apparatus is exposed to surroundings
c. temperature remains constant
d. none of these

84. Equilibrium constant
a. decreases as the temperature increases for an exothermic reaction
b. decreases as the temperature decreases for an exothermic reaction
c. will decrease with increasing temperature for a exothermic reaction
d. none of these

85. As the entropy of the universe is increasing day by day the work producing capacity
of a heat engine is
a. not changed b. decreasing
c. increasing d. data insufficient can¶t be predicted

86. Refrigeration cycle
a. violates second law of thermodynamics
b. involves transfer of heat from low temperature to high temperature
c. both a and b d. none of these

87. Ideal refrigeration cycle is
a. same as Carnot
b. same as reverse Carnot cycle
c. dependent on refrigerant properties
b. the least efficient of all refrigeration processes

88. Fundamental principle of refrigeration is based on
a. zeroth law of thermodynamics
b. first law of thermodynamics
c. second law of thermodynamics
d. third law of thermodynamics

89. Coefficient of Performance (COP) of a refrigerator is the ratio of
a. work required to refrigeration obtained
b. refrigeration obtained to the work required
c. lower to higher temperature
d. higher to lower temperature

90. In a working refrigerator value of COP is always
a. 0 b. <0
c. <1 d. >1

91. One ton of refrigeration capacity is equivalent to
a. 50 k cal/hr b. 200 BTU/hr
c. 200 BTU/minute d. 200 BTU/day

92. Which of the following have minimum value of COP for a given refrigeration effect?
a. reverse Carnot cycle
b. ordinary vapor compression cycle
c. vapor compression process with a reversible expansion engine
d. air refrigeration cycle

93. An ideal refrigerant should
a. not have a subatmosphere vapor pressure at the temperature in the refrigerator
coils
b. not have unduly high vapor pressure at the condenser temp.
c. both a and b
d. none of these

94. Heat pump
a. accomplishes only space heating in winter
b. accomplishes only space cooling in summer
c. accomplishes both a and b
d. work on Carnot cycle

95. Which of the following is not a common refrigerant
a. freon 12 b. ethylene
c. ammonia d. carbon dioxide

96. Domestic refrigerator usually works on
a. Carnot refrigeration cycle
b. A refrigeration cycle
c. Absorption refrigeration cycle
d. Vapor ejection refrigeration

97. Refrigerants commonly used for domestic refrigerations are
a. ethyl chloride b. freon 12
c. propane d. CO2

98. Air refrigeration cycle
a. is most efficient of all refrigeration
b. has very low efficiency
c. requires relatively quantities of air to achieve a significant amount of refrigeration
d. both b and c

99. Coefficient to performance for a reversed Carnot cycle working between temperatures
T
1
and T
2
(T
1
> T
2
) is
a. T
2
/(T
1
- T
2
) b. T
1
/(T
1
± T
2
)
c. (T
2
± T
1
) / T
1
d. (T
1
± T
2
) /T
2


100. Dry ice is
a. moisture free ice b. solid helium
c. solid carbon dioxide d. none of these


CHEMICAL ENGINEERING CALCULATIONS


1. In flue gas analysis by Orsat¶s apparatus, carbon monoxide is absorbed by
(a) cuprous chloride (b) potassium hydroxide
(c) alkaline pyrogallol solution (d) none of these
2. Calorific value as determined by bomb calorimeter is
(a) higher calorific value at constant volume
(b) gross calorific value at constant pressure
(c) lower calorific value at constant pressure
(d) net calorific value at constant volume
3. Incomplete combustion of a fuel is characterized by
(a) smoke formation
(b) high gas temperature
(c) high percentage of oxygen in flue gas
(d) high carbon monoxide content in flue gas
4. For maximum discharge through a chimney, its height should be
(a) 200 meters
(b) infinitely long
(c) more than 105.7 meters
(d) equal to the height of the hot gas column producing draught
5. Oxygen percentage (by weight) in atmospheric air is
(a) 19 (b) 21
(c) 23 (d) 29
6. Stack (chimney) height in a big thermal power plant is dictated by
(a) pollution control aspect
(b) draught to be created
(c) limitation of constructional facilities
(d) none of these
7. A particular coal is said to be free burning when it
(a) burns completely (b) gives smokeless burning
(c) shows little or no fusing action (d) none of these
8. As time passes, the calorific value of stored coal
(a) decreases
(b) increases
(c) remains unaltered
(d) may increase or decrease (depends on the method of storage)
9. Emission of dense white smoke out of chimney of a thermal power plant is an
indication of the use of
(a) less air for combustion (b) correct amount of air for combustion
(c) too much air for combustion (d) pulverized coal in boilers
10. Use of pulverized coal in boiler furnace provides
(a) high calorific value (b) better combustion
(c) smokeless burning (d) pulverized coal
11. Which of the following fuels is best for burning on chain grate smoker?
(a) non caking coal (b) caking coal
(c) coking coal (d) pulverized coal
12. Which of the following accounts for maximum energy loss in a boiler
(a) flue gases (b) ash content in the fuel
(c) incomplete combustion (d) unburnt carbon in flue gases
13. ³Over-fire burning´ in a furnace is a phenomenon characterized by
(a) supply of excess fuel
(b) supply of excess air
(c) burning carbon monoxide and other incombustible in upper zone of furnace by
supplying more air
(d) none of these
14. When steam is passed over coal resulting in the endothermic reaction (C + H2O -----
CO + H2), it is called
(a) carbonization of coal (b) oxidation of coal
(c) coalification (d) gasification of coal


15. Fischer-Tropsch method aims at
(a) gasification of coal
(b) synthesis of gasoline (from water gas)
(c) hydrogenation of coal to produce gasoline
(d) none of these
16. Commercial production of petrol from coal (as practiced in a factory at Sasol in South
Africa) is done by
(a) hydrogenation of coal (b) gasification of coal
(c) carbonization of coal (d) none of these
17. In case pulverized coal from steam boiler, the secondary air serves the main purpose
of
(a) transportation of coal (b) drying of coal
(c) combustion of coal by supplying in around the burner
(d) pre-heating the primary air
18. The main function of primary air in pulverized coal fired burner is to
(a) burn CO to CO2 (b) dry transport of the coal
(c) have proper combustion by supplying it around the burner
(d) pre-heat the tertiary air used for complete combustion of CO to CO2
19. The advantage of firing pulverized coal in the furnace lies in the fact that if
(a) permits the use of high ash content of coal
(b) permits the use of low fusion point ash coal
(c) accelerates the burning rate and economizes on fuel combustion
(d) all of the above
20. Orsat apparatus is meant for
(a) gravimetric analysis of flue gas
(b) finding out combustion efficiency
(c) direct determination of nitrogen in flue gas by absorbing it in ammoniacal cuprous
chloride
(d) none of these
21. Pick out the wrong statement
(a) Theoretical flame temperature is temperature attained by the products of
combustion when the fuel is burned without loss or gain of heat
(b) Burning the fuel with theoretically required amount of pure oxygen results in
attainment of maximum adiabatic flame temperature
(c) Burning the fuel with excess pure oxygen results in maximum theoretical
flame temperature
(d) Adiabatic flame temperatures of actual combustions are always less than
maximum values
22. The maximum adiabatic flame temperature in air compared to that in pure oxygen is
(a) much lower
(b) much higher
(c) same
(d) either lower or higher, depends on the type of fuel
23. Adiabatic flame temperature of a fuel is dependant on the initial temperature of
(a) the fuel (b) the air
(c) both fuel and the air (d) neither fuel nor the air

24. Preheating of
(a) the gaseous fuel before combustion decreases the flame temperature
(b) Combustion air decreases the flame temperature
(c) either the fuel or the air or both increases the flame temperature
(d) either the fuel or the air does not affect the flame temperature
25. The fuel ratio of a coal is
(a) the ratio of its percentage of fixed carbon to that of volatile matter
(b) helpful in estimation of its rank
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) neither (a) nor (b)
26. A fuel containing carbon and carbon monoxide (but containing the hydrogen or its
compounds) is burnt in pure oxygen at constant pressure. Its gross calorific value as
compared to the net calorific value will be
(a) more (b) less
(c) same (d) data insufficient; can¶t be predicted
27. Removal of hydrogen from coke oven gas
(a) increases its calorific value (b) decreases its calorific value
(c) does not alter its calorific value (d) is not possible on commercial scale
28. With increase in calorific value of fuels, their adiabatic flame temperatures
(a) increase
(b) decrease
(c) remain unchanged
(d) may increase or decrease; depends on the quantity of products of combustion
29. Grindability index of a coal is 100. It implies that the
(a) coal can be pulverized with great difficulty
(b) coal can¶t be pulverized
(c) coal can easily be pulverized
(d) power consumption in grinding the coal will be very high
30. If the specific heat of gaseous products of combustion of a fuel is high, the adiabatic
flame temperature will be
(a) low
(b) high
(c) very high if fuel is of low calorific value
(d) none of these
31. Calorific value (kcal/kg) of dry wood may be around
(a) 5 (b) 50
(c) 500 (d) 5000
32. A coal containing high amount of volatile matter will have
(a) low ignition temperature (b) very little content
(c) high fusion point of its ash (d) low adiabatic flame temperature




33. Steam is intermittently admitted in to the fuel bed during the production of producer
gas to
(a) convert CO to CO2
(b) increase in combustion rate
(c) increase the gas production rate
(d) minimize the chances of clinker formation
34.Which of the following is called ³blue gas´?
(a) coke oven gas
(b) water gas
(c) natural gas
(d) producer gas (produced using Kopper Totzek gasifier).
35. During combustion of gaseous fuel deficiency of air
(a) lengthens the flame (b) tends to shorten the flame
(c) does not affect the flame length (d) increases the flame temperature
36. Use of excess of combustion air in the combustion of fuels results in
(a) heat losses
(b) long flame
(c) condensation of water vapor from the flue gas
(d) none of these
37. A gaseous fuel in order to develop luminosity on burning, must contain
(a) carbon monoxide (b) hydrocarbons
(c) hydrogen (d) oxygen
38. Preheating of gaseous fuel results in increased
(a) flame length (b) flame temperature
(c) quantum of flue gas (d) ignition temperature
39. Quantity of coke oven gas produced by high temperature carbonization of one ton of
dry coal may be around
(a) 30 Nm
3

(b) 300 Nm
3

(c) 3000 Nm
3
(d) 30,000 Nm
3

40. Coke oven gas is a better fuel than blast furnace gas because of its higher
(a) calorific value, cleanliness and relatively low distribution cost (due to its low
specific gravity)
(b) adiabatic flame temperature
(c) heat release rate (thus requiring smaller combustion chamber)
(d) all of the above


41. Which of the following constituents of fuel does not contribute to its calorific value
on combustion
(a) hydrogen (b) sulfur
(c) carbon (d) none of these
42. Combustion of pulverized coal as compared to that of lump coal
(a) develops a non-luminous flame (b) develops a low temperature flame
(c) can be done with less excess air (d) provides a lower rate of heat release
43. Which of the following is the most important deterrents to an extended use of
pulverized coal in boiler firing?
(a) ash disposal problem
(b) excessive fly-ash discharge from the stack
(c) high power consumption in its transportation
(d) erosion of induced draft fan blades
44. Pulverized coal used in boiler firing need have
(a) less moisture content (b) high fusion point of its ash
(c) high bulk density (d) lower ash constant
45. Dry air required to burn one lb of carbon completely may be around
(a) 11.5 lb (b) 2.67 lb
(c) 16 lb (d) none of these
46. Dry air requirement for burning 1 ft
3
of CO to CO2 may be around
(a) 2.4 ft
3
(b) 1.75 ft
3

(c) 0.87 ft
3
(d) 11.4 ft
3

47. Washing of coal
(a) reduces its sulfur and ash content
(b) controls its ash fusibility and increases its calorific value
(c) improves its coking properties
(d) all (a), (b), and (c)
48. Which of the following has the highest gross calorific value?
(a) blast furnace gas (b) coke oven gas
(c) carburetted water gas (d) oil refinery gas
49. Most of coking coals are
(a) anthracite coal (b) bituminous coal
(c) lignite (d) none of these
50. High excess air in combustion of fuels results in
(a) increased fuel consumption (b) incomplete combustion
(c) smoky flame (d) none of these
51. Atomizing steam to fuel oil ratio in a burner should be around
(a) 0.5 (b) 2
(c) 3 (d) 5
52. For every 10% increase in the excess air; the fuel consumption increases by
(a) 0.1% (b) 2%
(c) 5% (d) 10%
53. Ash content in the coke produced from a coking coal having 20% ash may be around
(a) 5% (b) 2%
(c)17% (d) 25%
54. Out of the following fuels, the difference between the net and gross calorific value is
maximum in case of
(a) pitch (b) fuel oil
(c) blast furnace gas (d) bituminous gas
55. Spontaneous combustion of coal on storage results due to
(a) inadequate ventilation
(b) low temperature oxidation
(c) storage in large heaps with small surface to volume ratio
(d) all (a), (b) and (c)
56. Low temperature oxidation of coal resulting from bad storage conditions does not
decrease its
(a) caking power (b) calorific value
(c) hydrogen content (d) oxygen content
57. Efficient burning of anthracite coal requires
(a) low preheat of air (b) fine grinding
(c) high excess air (d) all (a), (b) and (c)
58. Rate of temperature oxidation of coal due to bad storage conditions
(a) decrease with increase in surface area
(b) does not vary with increase in surface area
(c) is more for low volatile coal compared to high volatile coal
(d) is accelerated by storage in large heaps with small surface to volume ratio
59. Fusion of point coal ash increases in its
(a) iron sulfate content (b) iron silicate content
(c) lime and magnesia content (d) all (a), (b) and (c)



60. Which of the following accentuates clinkering trouble on furnace grate burning coal
(a) low density of carbonized residue containing high proportions of iron and sulfur
(b) low forced draught and fuel bed temperature
(c) thick fire and preheated primary air
(d) all (a), (b) and (c)
61. A coal having high ratio of volatile matter to fixed carbon as compared to a coal
having low ratio of volatile matter to fixed carbon
(a) is less liable to spontaneous combustion on storage
(b) is more difficult to ignite and produces a shorter flame
(c) requires smaller combustion space and less secondary air
(d) none of these
62. Which of the following can be made into briquettes without the use of a binder
(a) lignite (b) bituminous coal
(c) anthracite coal (d) none of these
63. Presence of free moisture in coal is most disadvantageous during
(a) its pulverization (as it requires more power)
(b) combustion of fine slacks on the grates
(c) handling (e.g. when emptying wagons)
(d) none of these
64. Which of the following is not a binder for coal briquetting?
(a) coal tar (b) bitumen
(c) molasses (d) none of these
65. Highly caking coals
(a) produce weak coke
(b) produce strong coke
(c) may damage the coke oven walls during carbonization
(d) both (b) and (c)
66. Presence of free moisture in coal during its high temperature carbonization
(a) reduces the coking time
(b) protects the volatile products from pyrolysis (cracking) in the presence of hot
coke and hot oven walls
(c) increases the loss of fine coal dust from the ovens when charging
(d) none of these
67. Higher percentage of ash in coal meant for the production of metallurgical grade coke
(a) increases the hardness of coke
(b) increases the abrasion resistance of coke
(c) causes brittleness in steel
(d) none of these



68. Increases in ash content of blast furnace coke
(a) reduces its consumption in the furnace
(b) increases its consumption in the furnace
(c) does not affect its consumption in the furnace
(d) decreases its hardness and abrasion resistance
69. High sulfur content in a fuel
(a) increases the dew point of the flue gases
(b) decreases the dew point of the flue gases
(c) reduces combustion efficiency by limiting the permissible temperature reduction
of the flue gases
(d) both (a) and (c)
70. With the increase in carbonization temperature
(a) gas yield increases (b) tar yield increases
(c) hydrogen percentage in the coke oven gas decreases
(d) methane percentage in the coke oven gas increases
71. Fill up the blank
With increase in time of carbonization at a particular temperature (say 1000ºC ), the
«««. percentage in coke oven gas increases
(a) hydrogen (b) methane
(c) unsaturates (d) all (a), (b) and (c)
72. Producer gas containing least amount of tar is produced by
(a) partial combustion of coal
(b) partial combustion of large size (<50mm)
(c) high pressure gasification of coal (e.g. in Lurgi gasifier)
(d) atmospheric pressure gasification of coal (e.g., in Kopper-Totzek gasifier)
73. High temperature in gasification of coal favors
(a) high production of CO2
(b) low production of CO2
(c) high production of CO
(d) both (b) and (c)
74. Lurgi gasifier (high pressure gasifier) as compared to Kopper-Totzek gasifier
(atmospheric pressure gasifier) produces
(a) higher amount of methane
(b) lower amount of hydrogen
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) higher amount of both methane and hydrogen
75. Which of the following constituents of coal is most important in the production of
coke
(a) moisture (b) ash
(c) volatiles (d) carbon
76. Which of the following is most reactive (as regards the formation of CO + H2 from C
+ H2O)?
(a) blast furnace coke (b) low temperature coke
(c) anthracite coal (d) sub-bituminous coal
77. A coal that softens and fuses on heating in
(a) classified (b) carbonized
(c) caking (d) non-caking
78. Purity of coke means that it is high in carbon and low in
(a) volatiles (b) ash
(c) iron (d) moisture
79. Calorific value (kcal/Nm
3
) of coke oven furnace gas is around
(a) 900 (b) 4500
(c) 7500 (d) 2000
80. Calorific value (kcal/Nm
3
) of blast furnace gas is around
(a) 900 (b) 1800
(c) 4500 (d) 6500
81. Blast furnace gas is a very poisonous gas because of its predominantly high
(a) H2S content (b) CO2 content
(c) CO content (d) CH4 content
82. Percentage of carbon monoxide in blast furnace gas may be around
(a) 0.5 (b) 5
(c) 20 (d) 55
83. Percentage of hydrogen in coke oven gas may be around
(a) 1 (b) 5
(c) 20 (d) 50
84. Percentage of methane in coke oven gas may be around
(a) 1 (b) 10
(c) 25 (d) 55
85. Coke oven gas compared to blast furnace gas is
(a) more explosive and inflammable (b) less poisonous
(c) lighter (d) all (a), (b) and (c)

86. Which of the following gases will require maximum amount of air for combustion of
1 Nm
3
gas?
(a) blast furnace gas (b) natural gas
(c) producer gas (d) water gas
87. Which of the following will generate maximum volume of product of complete
combustion (Nm
3
/Nm
3
of fuel)?
(a) carburetted water gas (b) blast furnace gas
(c) natural gas (d) producers gas
88. Which is the heaviest fuel gas out of the following?
(a) blast furnace gas (b) coke oven gas
(c) water gas (d) carburetted water gas
89. µFuel can be defined as a substance which produces heat by
(a) combustion (b) nuclear fission
(c) nuclear fusion (d) all (a), (b) and (c)
90. Catalyst used in Fisher-Tropsch process is
(a) Nickel (b) Zinc oxide
(c) Alumina (d) Thorium oxide
91. In the flue gas analysis by Orsat¶s apparatus, oxygen is absorbed by
(a) potassium hydroxide (b) cuprous chloride
(c) alkaline pyrogallol solution (d) none of these
92. In flue gas analysis by Orsat¶s apparatus, carbon dioxide is absorbed by
(a) potassium hydroxide (b) dilute potassium carbonate
(c) cuprous chloride (d) alkaline pyrogallol solution
93. The sequence of absorption in flue gas analysis by Orsat¶s apparatus is respectively
(a) CO2, O2, CO (b) CO, O2, CO2
(c) CO2, CO, O2 (d) O2, CO2, CO
94. Which of the following has the highest calorific value?
(a) lignite (b) sub-bituminous coal
(c) anthracite (d) peat
95. The main product of high temperature carbonization is
(a) coke (b) ammonia
(c) tar (d) coke oven gas

96. High temperature carbonization produces
(a) inferior coke compared to low temperature carbonization
(b) less of gases compared to liquid products
(c) large quantity of tar compared to low temperature carbonization
(d) none of these
97. High temperature carbonization takes place at
(a) 2000ºC (b) 600 ºC
(c) 1100 ºC (d) 1600 ºC
98. Low temperature carbonization takes place at
(a) 300 ºC (b) 1100 ºC
(c) 500-650 ºC (d) 150 ºC
99. Proximate analysis of determines
(a) moisture, ash, sulfur, volatile matter
(b) moisture, volatile matter, ash, fixed carbon
(c) moisture, sulfur, nitrogen, fixed carbon
(d) none of these
100. Ultimate analysis of coal determines
(a) carbon, hydrogen, nitrogen, sulfur
(b) carbon, ash, sulfur, nitrogen
(c) carbon, sulfur, volatile matter, ash
(d) carbon, volatile matter, ash, moisture


CHEMICAL PROCESS INDUSTRIES

1. Catalysts used in the manufacture of sulfuric acid by chamber and contact
processes are
respectively
(a) V
2
O
5
and Cr
2
O
3

(b) Oxides of nitrogen and Cr
2
O
3

(c) V
2
O
5
on a porous carrier and oxides of nitrogen
(d) oxides of nitrogen and V
2
O
5
on a porous carrier
2. In contact process, SO
3
is absorbed in 97% H
2
SO
4
and not in water because
(a) SO
3
gas is sparingly soluble in water
(b) water forms an acid mist which is difficult to absorb
(c) the purity of acid is affected
(d) scale formation in absorber is to be avoided




3. Contact process
(a) yields acid of higher concentration than chamber process
(b) yields acids of lower concentration than chamber process
(c) is obsolete
(d) eliminates absorber

4. 20% Oleum means that in 100 lb., there are 20 lb. of
(a) SO
3
and 80 lb of H
2
SO
4

(b) H
2
SO
4
and 80 lb SO
3

(c) SO
3
for each 100 lb of H
2
SO
4

(d) H2SO4 and 80 lb SO3
5. Producer gas consists mainly of
(a) CO, CO
2
, N
2
, H
2

(b) CO, H
2

(c) H
2
, CH
4

(d) C
2
H
2
, CO
2
, H
2

6. Oxygen is produced by fraction of air using
(a) Linde's process
(b) Claude's process
(c) both Linde's and Claude's process
(d) Bayer's process
7. Raw materials for 'Solvay Process' for manufacture of the soda ash are
(a) salt, limestone ,ammonia and coke oven gas
(b) ammonia, salt and limestone
(c) ammonia, limestone and coke
(d) ammonia and coke oven gas
8. Economics of 'Solvay Process" depends upon the efficiency of
(a) carbonating tower
(b) ammonia recovery
(c) ammonia recovery and size of plant
(d) ammoniation of salt solution
9. Mercury cells for caustic soda manufacture compared to diaphragm cells
(a) require lower initial investment
(b) require more power
(c) produce lower concentration of NaOH
(d) none of these
10. Cement mainly contains
(a)CaO, SiO
2
, Al
2
O
3

(b) MgO, SiO
2
, K
2
O
(c) Al
2
O
3
, MgO, Fe
2
O
3

(d) CaO, MgO, K
2
O



11. Gypsum is
(a) calcium chloride
(b) potassium sulfate
(c) sodium sulfate
(d) calcium sulfate
12. Glauber's salt is
(a) calcium sulfate
(b) potassium sulfate
(c) potassium chlorate
(d) sodium sulfate decahydrate
13. Permanent hardness of water is due to the presence of calcium and
magnesium
(a) bi-carbonates
(b) sulfates and chlorides
(c) carbonate
(d) chlorides
14. Widely used method for conditioning of boiler feed water is
(a) cold lime process
(b) coagulation
(c) hot-lime soda process
(d) sequestration
15. Hydrazine is largely used
(a) as a starting material for 'hypo'
(b) in photographic industry
(c) as rocket fuel
(d) in printing industry
16. Trinitro-toluene is
(a) used in glycerin manufacture
(b) an explosive
(c) used in dye manufacture
(d) used in paint manufacture
17. Oil is
(a) a mixture of glycerides
(b) a mixture of glycerides of fatty acids
(c) solid at normal temperature
(d) ester of alcohols other than glycerin
18. Wax is
(a) a mixture of glycerides
(b) a mixture of esters of polyhydric alcohols except glycerin
(c) liquid at room temperature
(d) a mixture of glycerides of fatty acids



19. Unsaturated oils compared to saturated oils have
(a) lower melting point and higher reactivity to oxygen
(b) higher melting point and higher reactivity to oxygen
(c) lower melting point and lower reactivity to oxygen
(d) higher melting point and lower reactivity to oxygen
20. Rancidity of oil can be reduced by
(a) decoloration
(b) hydrogenation
(c) oxidation
(d) purification
21. Solvent used for extraction of oil is
(a) hexane
(b) methyl ethyl ketone
(c) furfural
(d) benzene
22. Solvent extracted oil
(a) has low free fatty acid-content
(b) is odorless
(c) has more of unsaturated oil
(d) none of these
23. Hydrogenation of oil does not
(a) remove double bonds
(b) rise in melting point
(c) improve its resistance oxidation
(d) none of these
24. Catalyst used in hydrogenation of oil is
(a) nickel
(b) platinum
(c) iron
(d) alumina
25. Soaps remove dirt by
(a) increasing the surface tension
(b) decreasing wettability
(c) supplying hydrophilic group
(d) none of these
26. Metallic soap is
(a) sodium salt of fatty acids
(b) potassium salt of fatty acids
(c) both sodium and potassium salt of fatty acids
(d) aluminum or calcium salt of fatty acids




27. Fat splitting catalyst is
(a) CaCO
3

(b) ZnO
(c) alumina
(d) iron
28. Free alkali in toilet soap is
(a) less than that in a laundry soap
(b) more than that in a laundry soap
(c) same as that in a laundry soap
(d) not present in laundry soap
29. Soap cannot be used with hard water because
(a) hard water contains sulfate
(b) they form insoluble calcium soaps which precipitate
(c) they attract back the removed dirt
(d) they increase the surface tension
30. Builders are added in soap to
(a) boost cleaning power
(b) act as anti-redeposition agent
(c) act as corrosion inhibitor
(d) acts as fabric brightener
31. Bio-degradable detergents
(a) can be readily oxidized
(b) pose problem in sewerage plant
(c) have an isoparaffinic structure
(d) should not be used as it spoils the cloth
32. Which of the following is a detergent?
(a) fatty alcohol
(b) alkyl benzene sulfonate
(c) fatty acids
(d) methyl chloride
33. Yellow glycerin is made into white, using
(a) activated carbon
(b) diatomaceous earth
(c) bauxite
(d) bentonite
34. Essential oils are usually obtained using
(a) steam distillation
(b) extractive distillation
(c) solvent extraction
(d) leaching




35. Plasticizers are added to paints to
(a) make it corrosion resistant
(b) make glossy surface
(c) give elasticity and prevent cracking of the film
(d) increase atmospheric oxidation
36. Which oil is preferred for paint manufacture?
(a) drying oil
(b) non-drying oil
(c) semi-drying oil
(d) saturated oil
37. Function of thinner in a paint is to
(a) accelerate the oxidation of oil
(b) prevent gelling of the paint
(c) suspend pigments and dissolve film-forming materials
(d) form a protective film
38. Varnish does not contain
(a) pigment
(b) thinner
(c) dryer
(d) anti-skinning agent
39. Enamels
(a) give good glossy finish
(b) are same as varnish
(c) are prepared from non-drying oil
(d) do not contain pigment
40. SO
2
is bubbled through hot sugar-cane juice to
(a) act as an acidifying agent
(b) increase its concentration
(c) increase the amount of molasses
(d) increase the crystal size
41. Molasses is the starting material for
(a) alcohol
(b) essential oil
(c) fatty acids
(d) ether
42. The ideal pulp for the manufacture of paper should have high
(a) cellulose content
(b) lignin content
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) neither (a) nor (b)



43. In Kraft process of paper manufacture, white cooking liquor consists of
caustic soda
(a) sodium sulfide, sodium carbonate
(b) sodium sulfite, sodium carbonate
(c) sodium sulfite, sodium sulfide
(d) and sodium carbonate
44. Comparing sulfate process with sulfite process, we find that
(a) both temperature and pressure in former is less than that in the latter
(b) both temperature and pressure in former is more than that in
the latter
(c) temperature is more in former whereas pressure is more in the latter
(d) pressure is more in the former whereas temperature is less in the latter
45. Cooking liquor in case of sulfite process is
(a) sodium sulfite and sodium bisulfite
(b) magnesium sulfite and free SO2 in acid medium
(c) magnesium sulfate and magnesium bicarbonate
(d) sodium bisulfite
46. Which is a high-grade pulp?
(a) rag pulp
(b) mechanical pulp
(c) sulfate pulp
(d) sulfite pulp
47. Which of the following paper does not require a filler during manufacture?
(a) bond paper
(b) writing paper
(c) blotting paper
(d) colored paper
48. Bleaching of paper pulp is done with
(a) activated clay
(b) bromine
(c) chlorine or chlorine dioxide
(d) magnesium sulfite
49. Sizing material is incorporated in paper to
(a) impart resistance to penetration by liquids
(b) increase its thickness
(c) increase its flexibility and opacity
(d) increase its brightness
50. Viscose rayon is
(a) cellulose nitrate
(b) regenerated cellulose nitrate
(c) regenerated cellulose acetate
(d) regenerated cellulose fiber


51. Which of the following coal has the highest calorific value?
(a) Lignite
(b) Sub-bituminous
(c) Anthracite
(d) Peat
52. The main product of high temperature carbonization is
(a) Coke
(b) Ammonia
(c) Tar
(d) Phenol
53. High temperature carbonization produces
(a) inferior coke compared to low temperature carbonization
(b) less of gases compared to liquid products
(c) larger quantity of tar compared to low temperature carbonization
(d) relatively low tar and yields of gaseous products are larger than
the yield of liquid
products
54. High temperature carbonization takes place at
(a) 4000 - 5000ºF
(b) 950ºF
(c) > 1650ºF
(d) < 1000ºF
55. Low temperature carbonization takes place at
(a) 500ºF
(b) 1300ºF
(c) 750 - 1100ºF
(d) 2500 F
56. Proximate analysis of coal determines
(a) moisture, ash, sulfur, volatile matter
(b) moisture, volatile matter
(c) moisture, sulfur, nitrogen, fixed carbon
(d) carbon, hydrogen, ash
57. Ultimate analysis of coal determines
(a) moisture, hydrogen, nitrogen, sulfur
(b) carbon, ash, sulfur,nitrogen
(c) carbon, sulfur, volatile matter, ash
(d) carbon,volatile matter, ash, moisture
58. Washing of coal is done to
(a) remove the inherent impurities
(b) remove the adhering impurities
(c) reduce the ash content
(d) both b and c


59. A good quality coal should have
(a) low fusion point of ash
(b) high ash content
(c) high sulfur content
(d) none of these
60. Coke oven gas consists mainly of
(a) H
2
, CH
4

(b) CO, CO
2

(c) H
2
, CO
(d) CH
4
, CO
61. Lurgi coal gasifier is a pressurized
(a) moving bed reactor
(b) fixed bed reactor
(c) fluidized bed reactor
(d) entrained bed reactor
62. In Lurgi gasifier
(a) cooking coals cannot be used
(b) low carbon conversion efficiency is achieved
(c) entrainment of solids is higher
(d) large quantity of coal can be processed
63. The catalyst used in shift converter is
(a) nickel
(b) vanadium
(c) silica gel
(d) alumina
64. The gasification reaction C + H
2
O CO + H
2
is
(a) exothermic
(b) endothermic
(c) catalytic
(d) autocatalytic
65. The combustion reaction C + O2 CO2 is
(a) exothermic
(b) endothermic
(c) autocatalytic
(d) catalytic
66. Kopper-Totzek coal gasifier
(a) can give ammonia synthesis gas
(b) is a moving bed reactor
(c) cannot use cooking coal
(d) operate at very high pressure


67. Acrylonitrile is mainly used in
(a) polymer industry
(b) printing industry
(c) dyeing industry
(d) photographic industry
68. The major use of butadiene is
(a) as a plasticizer for unsaturated polyester
(b) in the manufacture of synthetic rubber
(c) as an anti-skinning agent in paint
(d) as corrosion inhibitor
69. Phenol is mainly used
(a) to produce benzene
(b) to produce phenol formaldehyde
(c) to produce polyester resin
(d) as a plasticizer for unsaturated polyester
70. Phthalic anhydride is made by
(a) Oxidation of naphthalene
(b) Oxidation of benzene
(c) Dehydrogenation of ethyl benzene
(d) Oxidation of toluene
71. Trinitrotoluene (TNT), an explosive, is made by nitration of
(a) nitrobenzene
(b) toluene
(c) nitrotoluene
(d) benzene
72. Which is the most suitable dye for synthetic fibers?
(a) acid dye
(b) azoic dye
(c) pigment dye
(d) mordant dye
73. Fumigant insecticides
(a) kill insects when they eat it
(b) emit poisonous vapor
(c) are absorbed throughout the plant
(d) are stomach poisons
74. Systemics insecticides
(a) are absorbed throughout the plant
(b) kill insects following external bodily contact
(c) are stomach poisons
(d) emit poisonous vapor




75. DDT stands
(a) diethyl-diphenyl-trichloromethane
(b) dichloro-diphenyl-trichloromethane
(c) diphenyl-dichloro-trichloromethane
(d) dichloro-diphenyl-trichloroethane
76. BHC (Benzene hexa-chloride) is made by chlorination of benzene
(a) which is an addition reaction
(b) which is a substitution reaction
(c) in absolute dark
(d) in presence of sunlight
77. Analgesic drugs are
(a) pain relievers
(b) antibiotics
(c) used in the treatment of TB
(d) used in the treatment of typhoid
78. Antibiotic
(a) prohibits/destroys the growth of micro-organism
(b) is used as pain reliever
(c) is an anti-malaria
(d) is an anaesthetic
79. Penicillin is made employing
(a) continuous fermentation process
(b) aerobic batch fermentation
(c) anaerobic batch fermentation
(d) aerobic or anaerobic batch fermentation
80. Which of the following is not an antibiotic?
(a) penicillin
(b) streptomycin
(c) tetracyclin
(d) quinine
81. Molecular weights of polymers are in the range of
(a) 10 - 1000
(b) 10
5
- 10
9

(c) 10
3
- 10
7

(d) 10
5
- 10
7

82. Zeigler process
(a) produces high density polyethylene
(b) produces low density polyethylene
(c) uses no catalyst
(d) employs very high pressure




83. Poly-Vinyl Chloride (PVC) is
(a) thermosetting
(b) thermoplastic
(c) a fibrous material
(d) chemically active
84. Phenol formaldehyde
(a) employs addition polymerization
(b) employs condensation polymerization
(c) is a monomer
(d) is an abrasive material
85. Epoxy resin
(a) is a good adhesive
(b) is an elastomer
(c) cannot be used on surface coatings
(d) is a polyester
86. Vulcanization of rubber
(a) decreases its tensile strength
(b) increases its ozone and oxygen reactivity
(c) increases its oil and solvent resistant
(d) converts its plasticity into elasticity
87. Most commonly used rubber vulcanizing agent is
(a) sulfur
(b) bromine
(c) platinum
(d) alumina
88. Styrene butadiene rubber (SBR) is
(a) a natural rubber
(b) a synthetic polymer
(c) a synthetic monomer
(d) another name for silicon rubber
89. Nylon-6 is manufactured from
(a) caprolactam
(b) hexamethylene diamine and adipic acid
(c) hexamethylene diamine and maleic anhydride
(d) hexamethylene diamine and sebacic acid
90. Nylon 6-6 is manufactured from
(a) hexamethylene diamine adipic acid
(b) hexamethylene diamine and maleic anhydride
(c) caprolactam
(d) dimethyl terephthalate and ethylene glycol




91. Dacron is
(a) a polyester
(b) an unsaturated polyester
(c) a polyamide
(d) an inorganic polymer
92. Celluloid is
(a) cellulose acetate
(b) regenerated cellulose
(c) cellulose nitrate
(d) cellulose acetate butyrate
93. Thermoplastic materials
(a) do not soften on application of heat
(b) are heavily branched molecules
(c) are solvent insoluble
(d) are capable of softening or fusing when heated and of hardening
again when cooled
94. Thermosetting materials
(a) are capable of becoming permanently rigid when heated or
cured
(b) soften on application of heat
(c) are solvent insoluble
(d) are heavily branched molecules
95. Type of glass used in optical work is
(a) soda-lime glass
(b) fiber glass
(c) lead glass
(d) borosilicate glass
96. Silicon carbide is
(a) an adhesive
(b) an abrasive
(c) a type of glass
(d) brittle
97. The temperature in the calcium carbide furnace is
(a) 200 - 300ºC
(b) 700 - 850ºC
(c) 2000 -2200ºC
(d) 4000 - 4500ºC
98. Cumene (Isopropyl benzene) is made by
(a) oxidation of naphthalene
(b) propylene alkylation of benzene
(c) polymerization of a mixture of benzene and propylene
(d) polymerization of propylene


99. Glycerin can be obtained from
(a) fat
(b) naphthalene
(c) cumene
(d) sucrose
100. Cumene is the starting material for the production of
(a) benzoic acid
(b) phenol and acetone
(c) isoprene
(d) styrene
101. Which of the following is not responsible for causing permanent hardness of
water?
(a) Ca(HCO
3
)
2

(b) CaCl
2

(c) MgCl
2

(d) NaCl
102. Zeolite used in water softening process (cation exchange) is regenerated by
washing
withƦ
(a) brine
(b) chloramines
(c) sodium bisulfite
(d) liquid chlorines
103. Presence of H
2
S in raw water (to be chlorinated) results in
(a) reduced softening capacity of zeolite
(b) increase dosage of chlorine to provide a disinfecting residual
in the water
(c) easy removal of its hardness
(d) residual turbidity
104. Lime and soda ash are added to water to remove
(a) bicarbonates and sulfates of calcium and magnesium
(b) undesirable taste and odor
(c) bacteria
(d) its corrosiveness
105. Chloramines are used in water treatment for
(a) disinfection and control of taste and odor
(b) corrosion control
(c) removing turbidity
(d) control of bacteria
106. Deaeration of water in its treatment is necessary as it
(a) minimizes its turbidity
(b) helps in controlling its taste and odor
(c) minimizes its corrosiveness
(d) controls bacteria
107. Sodium Bisulfate is used for
(a) deaeration of water
(b) dechlorination of water
(c) both a and b
(d) neither a nor b
108. Dechlorination of treated water is necessary to
(a) remove residual turbidity
(b) reduce the bacterial load on filter
(c) control taste and odor
(d) remove chlorinous taste
109. The main used of the activated carbon in water treatment is to control
(a) bacterial growth
(b) taste and odor
(c) turbidity
(d) corrosion
110. Alum [Al
2
(SO
4
)
3
] is used as a coagulant in water treatment to remove
(a) color
(b) turbidity
(c) bacteria
(d) all a, b and c
111. Use of hydrated lime in water treatment
(a) before filtration, reduces the bacterial load on filters
(e) after filtration, combats the corrosiveness of water due to
presence of O
2
and CO
2

(c) is to adjust the pH value
(d) all a, b and c
112. The purpose of adding Na
2
CO
3
to water of low alkalinity is to
(a) permit the use of alum as a coagulant
(b) increase the softening capacity of zeolite
(c) facilitate the easy regeneration of zeolite
(d) all a, b and c
113. Pick out the true statement pertaining to water treatment
(a) Slow sand filters can remove color completely
(b) Activated carbon can be used for taste and odor control without
subsequent filtration
(c) Application of activated carbon reduces the temporary hardness of water
(d) Normally, the turbidity is removed by adding a coagulant prior
to sedimentation






114. Pick out the false statement pertaining to water treatment
(a) Aeration of water is effective in CO2 removal
(b) The zeolite water softening process reduces the hardness of
water by not more
than 50%
(c) Sodium sulfate or sodium carbonates do not cause hardness in water
(d) Water with pH value less than 7, is acidic
115. Pick out the wrong statement pertaining to solvent extraction of oil
Rate of extractionƦ.
(a) decreases with decrease of thickness of the flakes
(b) increases with the increasing flake size keeping the flake thickness
constant
(c) increases considerably with the rise of temperature
(d) decreases as the moisture content of flakes increases
116. Fats as compared to oils have
(a) more unsaturated glycerides of fatty acids
(b) less unsaturated glycerides of fatty acids
(c) much higher reactivity to oxygen
(d) lower melting point
117. Salt is added in the kettle during soap manufacture to separate
(a) soap from lye
(b) glycerin from lye
(c) the metallic soap
(d) the unsaponified fat from soap
118. Hydrazine (N
2
H
4
) is used mainly as
(a) explosive
(b) rocket fuel
(c) an additive in detergent
(d) catalyst
119. Oils are partially hydrogenated (not fully) to manufacture vanaspati,
because fully saturated
solidified oils
(a) cause cholesterol build up and blood clotting
(b) are prone to rancid oxidation
(c) always contain some amount of nickel (as their complete removal is
very difficult)
(d) have affinity to retain harmful sulfur compounds
120. Hydrogenation of oil takes place in
(a) an autothermal reactor
(b) a trickle bed reactor
(c) a plug flow reactor
(d) backmix reactor


121. Temperature during hydrogenation of oil should not be more than 200ºC,
otherwise it will
result in
(a) pyrolysis of oil
(b) sintering of porous catalyst
(c) hydrogen embrittlement
(d) all a, b and c
122. Shaving soaps are
(a) soft potassium soaps (potassium salt of fatty acid) with free
stearic acid to give
lather a lasting property
(b) metallic soaps compounded with frothing agents
(c) high free alkali soaps having excess of cane sugar and alcohol
(d) usually soap soaps
123. Transparent soaps (e.g. Pears) are
(a) usually soft soaps (made from coconut oil) in which cane sugar
and alcohol are
added and finally washed with methylate spirit to achieve
transparency
(b) metallic soaps with frothing agent and free stearic acid to achieve
transparency
(c) metallic soaps with frothing agent from which glycerin has not been
recovered
(d) high free alkali soaps having excess of cane sugar and alcohol
124. Glycerin is recovered from lye by
(a) evaporation followed by vacuum distillation
(b) liquid extraction technique
(c) extractive distillation technique
(d) steam distllation
125. Glycerin is not used in the
(a) manufacture of explosive
(b) conditioning and humidification of tobacco
(c) manufacture of pharmaceuticals
(d) manufacture of caustic soda


FLOW OF FLUIDS



1. A fluid is one which
(a) cannot remain at rest under the action of shear force
(b) continuously expands till it fills any container
(c) is incompressible
(d) permanently resists distortion

2. In an incompressible fluid density
(a) is greatly affected by moderate changes in pressure
(b) is greatly affected only by moderate changes in temperature
(c) remains unaffected with moderate change in temperature and pressure
(d) is sensible to changes in both temperature and pressure

3. Potential flow is the flow of
(a) compressible fluids with shear
(b) compressible fluids with no shear
(c) incompressible fluids with shear
(d) incompressible fluids with no shear

4. Potential flow is characterized by
(a) irrotational and frictionless flow
(b) irrotational and frictional flow
(c) one in which dissipation of mechanical energy into heat occurs
(d) the formation of eddies within the stream

5. Newton¶s law of viscosity relates
(a) shear stress and velocity
(b) velocity gradient and pressure intensity
(c) shear stress and rate of angular deformation in a fluid
(d) pressure gradient and rate of angular deformation

6. Dimension of viscosity is
(a) ML
-1
T
-1
(b) MLT
-1

(c) MLT
-1
T (d) MLT

7. Poise is converted into stoke by
(a) multiplying with density (gm/c.c.)
(b) dividing with density (gm/c.c.)
(c) multiplying with specific gravity
(d) dividing with specific gravity



8. Dimension of kinematic viscosity is
(a) ML
-2
(b) L
2
T
-1

(c) L
2
T (d) L
2
T
2


9. With increase in the temperature viscosity of a liquid
(a) increase (b) decreases
(c) remains constant (d) first decreases and then increases

10. For water, when the pressure increases the viscosity
(a) also increases (b) decreases
(c) remains constant (d) first decreases and then increases


11. The pressure intensity is the same in all direction at a point in a fluid
(a) only when the fluid is frictionless
(b) only when the fluid is at rest having zero velocity
(c) when there is no motion of one fluid layer relative to an adjacent layer
(d) regardless of the motion of one fluid layer relative to an adjacent layer

12. Choose the set of pressure intensities that are equivalent
(a) 4.33 psi, 10 ft. of water, 8.83 inches of Hg.
(b) 4.33 psi, 10 ft. of water, 20.7 inches of Hg.
(c) 10 psi, 19.7 ft. of water, 23.3 inches of Hg.
(d) 10 psi, 19.7 ft of water, 5.3 inches of Hg.

13. For a fluid rotating at constant angular velocity about vertical axis as a rigid body, the
pressure intensity varies as the
(a) square of the radial distance
(b) radial distance linearly
(c) averse of the radial distance
(d) elevation along vertical direction

14. The center of pressure is
(a) always below the centroid of the area
(b) always above the centroid of the area
(c) a point on the line of action of the resultant force
(d) at the centroid of the submerge area

15. A rectangular surface 3¶x4¶, has the lower 3 edge horizontal and 6¶ below a free oil
surface (sp. gr. 0.8). The surface inclination is 300 with the horizontal. The force in
one side of the surface is :(y = specific weight of water)

(a) 39.6y (b) 48y
(c) 49.2y (d) 58y


16. Fill up the blanks
A stream tube is that which has ««« cross-section entirely bounded by stream
lines.
(a) a circular (b) any convenient
(c) a small (d) a large

17. Mass velocity is the independent of temperature and pressure when the flow is
(a) unsteady through uncharged cross-section
(b) steady through changing cross-section
(c) steady and the cross-section is unchanged
(d) unsteady ant the cross-section is changed

18. In turbulent flow
(a) the fluid particles move in an orderly manner
(b) momentum transfer is on molecular scale only
(c) shear stress is caused more effectively by cohesion than momentum transfer
(d) shear stresses are generally larger than in a similar laminar flow

19. Turbulant flow generally occurs for cases involving

(a) highly viscous fluid (b) very narrow passages
(c) very slow motion (d) none of these

20. An ideal fluid is
(a) frictionless and incompressible
(b) one which obeys Newton¶s law of viscosity
(c) highly viscous (d) none of these

21.Steady flow occurs when
(a) conditions change steadily with time
(b) conditions are the same at the adjacent points at any instant
(c) conditions do not change with time at any point
(d) rate of change of velocity is constant

22. Which of the following must be followed by the flow of fluid (real or ideal)?
(i) Newton¶s law of viscosity
(ii) Newton¶s second law of motion
(iii) the continuity equation
(iv) velocity of boundary must be zero relative to boundary
(v) fluid cannot penetrate a boundary
(a) I, II, III (b) II, III, V
(c) I, II, V (d) II, III, V

23. Discharge (ft
3
/sec) from a 24 inch pipe of water at 10 ft/sec will be
(a) 7.65 (b) 32.36
(c) 48.22 (d) 125.6

24. The unit velocity head is
(a) ft-lb/sec (b) ft-lb/ft
3

(c) ft-lbf/lb.m (d) ft-lb.f/sec

25. Bernoulli¶s equation describes
(a) mechanical energy balance in potential flow
(b) kinetic energy balance in laminar flow
(c) mechanical energy balance in turbulent flow
(d) mechanical energy balance in boundary layer

26. The kinetic energy correction factor for velocity distribution of laminar flow is
(a) 0.5 (b) 1.66
(c) 1 (d) 2

27. The momentum correction factor for the velocity distribution of laminar flow is
(a) 1.3 (b) 1.66
(c) 2.5 (d) none of these

28. The loss due to sudden expansion is
(a) V
1
2
± V
2
2

2g
c

(b) (V
1
± V
2
)
3

2g
C

(c) V
1
± V
2

2g
c

(d) none of these

29. The loss due to sudden contraction is proportional to
(a) velocity (b) velocity head
(c) turbulence (d) none of these

30. The value of critical Reynolds number for pipe flow is
(a) 1300 (b) 10,000
(c) 100,000 (d) none of these


31. Reynolds number flow of water at room temperature through 2 cm diameter pipe at
average velocity of 5 cm/sec is around
(a) 2000 (b) 10
(c) 100 (d) 1000


32. Shear stress in a fluid flowing in a round pipe
(a) varies parabolically across the cross-section
(b) remains constant over the cross-section
(c) is zero at the center and varies linearly with the radius
(d) is zero at the wall and increase linearly to the center

33. Discharge in laminar flow through a pipe varies
(a) as the square of the radius
(b) inversely as the pressure drop
(c) inversely as the velocity
(d) as the square of the diameter

34. Boundary layer separation is caused by
(a) reduction of pressure below vapor pressure
(b) reduction of pressure gradient to zero
(c) an adverse pressure gradient
(d) reduction of boundary layer thickness to zero

35. The friction factor for turbulent flow in a hydraulically smooth pipe
(a) depends only on Reynolds number
(b) does not depend on Reynolds number
(c) depends on the roughness
(d) none of these

36. For a given Reynolds number, in hydraulically smooth pipe, further smoothing
(a) brings about no further reduction of friction factor
(b) increases the friction factor
(c) decreases the friction factor
(d) none of these

37. Hydraulic radius is the ratio of
(a) wetted perimeter to flow area
(b) flow area to wetted perimeter
(c) flow area to square of wetted perimeter
(d) square root of flow area to wetted perimeter

38. Hydraulic radius of 6´ x 12´ c/s is
(a) 2´ (b) 0.5´
(c) 1.5´ (d) none of these

39. Reynolds number is the ratio of
(a) viscous forces to gravity forces
(b) inertial forces to viscous forces
(c) viscous forces to inertial forces
(d) inertial forces to gravity forces

40. Mach. number is the ratio of the speed of the
(a) fluid of that of the light (b) light to that of the fluid
(c) fluid to that of thesound (d) sound to that of the fluid




41. Power loss in an orifice meter is
(a) less than that in a venturi meter
(b) same as that in a venturi meter
(c) more than that in a venturi meter
(d) data insufficient, cannot be predicted


42. The velocity profile for turbulent flow through a closed conduit is
(a) logarithmic (b) parabolic
(c) hyperbolic (d) linear

43. For laminar flow through a closed conduit
(a) V
max
= 2 V
av
(b) V
max
= V
av

(c) V
max
= 1.5 V
av
(d) V
av
= 2 V
max


44. f = 16/N
Re
is valid for
(a) turbulent flow
(b) laminar flow through an open channel
(c) steady flow (d) none of these

45. Isotropic turbulence occurs
(a) where there is no velocity gradient
(b) at higher temperatures
(c) only in newtonion fluid
(d) none of these

46. Consider two pipes of same length and diameter through which water is passed at the
same velocity. The friction factor for rough pipe is f
1
and that for smooth pipe is f
2
.
Pick out the correct statement.
(a) f
1
= f
2
(b) f
1
< f
2

(c) f
1
> f
2
(d) data not sufficient to relate f
1
and f
2


47. Bernoulli¶s equation for steady frictionless, continuous flow states that
(a) total pressure at all sections is same
(b) total energy at all section is same
(c) velocity head at all section is same
(d) none of these

48. Drag is defined as the force exerted by the
(a) fluid on the solid in a direction opposite to flow
(b) the fluid on the solid in the direction of flow
(c) the solid on the fluid (d) none of these



49. Drag co-efficient for flow past immersed body is the ratio of
(a) shear stress to the product of velocity head density
(b) shear force to the product of velocity head and density
(c) average drag per unit projected area to the product of velocity head and
density
(d) none of these

50. Stoke¶s law is valid when the particle Reynolds number is
(a) < 1 (b) > 1
(c) < 5 (d) none of these

51. Drag co-efficient C
D
is given by (in Stoke¶s law range)
(a) C
D
= 16
R
e
.p
(b) C
D
= 24
R
e
.p
(c) C
D
= 18.4
R
e
.p
(d) C
D
= 0.079
R
e
.p

52. At low Reynolds number
(a) viscous forces are unimportant
(b) viscous forces control
(c) viscous forces control and inertial forces are unimportant
(d) gravity forces control
53. At high Reynolds number
(a) inertial forces control and viscous forces are unimportant
(b) viscous forces predominate
(c) inertial forces are unimportant and viscous forces control
(d) none of these

54. For flow of fluid through packed bed, the superficial velocity is
(a) less than the average velocity through channels
(b) more than the average velocity through channels
(c) dependent on the pressure drop across the bed
(d) same as the average velocity through channels

55. Pressure drop in a packed bed for laminar flow is given by
(a) Kozeny-Carman equation (b) Blake-Plummer equation
(c) Leva¶s equation (d) none of these

56. Pressure drop in a packed bed for turbulent flow is given by
(a) Kozeny-Carman equation (b) Blake-Plummer equation
(c) Leva¶s equation (d) none of these






57. Force acting on a particle settling in fluid are
(a) gravitational and bouyant forces
(b) centrifugal and drag forces
(c) gravitational or centrifugal, bouyant and drag forces
(d) external, drag and viscous forces

58. Terminal velocity is
(a) a constant velocity with no acceleration
(b) a fluctuating velocity
(c) attained after moving one-haft of total distance
(d) none of these

59. In hindered settling, particles are
(a) placed farther from wall
(b) not affected by other particles and the wall
(c) near each other (d) none of these

60. Drag co-efficient in hindered settling is
(a) lesser than in free settling
(b) equal to that in free settling
(c) not necessarily greater than in free settling
(d) greater than free settling

61. For the free settling of a spherical particle through a fluid, the slope of C
D
± log N
Re
,
plot is
(a) 1 (b) ±1
(c) 0.5 (d) ±0.5


62. In continuous fluidization
(a) solids are completely entrained
(b) the pressure drop less than that for batch fluidisation
(c) there is no entrainment of solids
(d) velocity of the fluid is very small

63. Pressure drop in fluidized bed reactor is
(a) less than that in a similar packed bed reactor
(b) more than that in a similar packed bed reactor
(c) same as that in a similar packed bed reactor
(d) none of these





64. Slugging in a fluidized bed can be avoided by
(a) using tall narrow vessel
(b) using deep bed solids
(c) the proper choice of particle size and by using shallow beds of solids
(d) using very large particles

65. Minimum porosity for fluidization is
(a) that corresponding to static bed
(b) that corresponding to completely fluidized bed
(c) the porosity of the bed when true fluidization begins
(d) less than that of the static bed

66. In a fluidized bed reactor
(a) temperature gradients are very high
(b) temperature is more or less uniform
(c) hot spot formed
(d) segregation of the solids occurs

67. Lower BWG means
(a) lower thickness tube
(b) lower cross-section of tube
(c) outer diameter of tube
(d) inner diameter of tube

68. Cavitation occurs in a centrifugal pump when
(a) the suction pressure < vapour pressure of the liquid at that temperature
(b) the suction pressure > vapour pressure of the liquid at that temperature
(c) the suction pressure = vapour pressure
(d) the suction pressure = developed head

69. Cavitation can be prevented by
(a) suitably designing the pump
(b) maintaining the suction head sufficiently greater than the vapour pressure
(c) maintaining suction head = developed head
(d) maintaining suction head lower than the vapour pressure

70. Priming needed in a
(a) reciprocating pump (b) gear pump
(c) centrifugal pump (d) diaphragm pump

71. The maximum depth from which a centrifugal pump can draw water
(a) dependent on the speed N of the pump
(b) dependent on the power of the pump
(c) 34 feet (d) 150 feet


72. Boiler feed pump is usually a
(a) reciprocating pump (b) gear pump
(c) multisatge centrifugal pump (d) diaphragm pump

73. Plunger pumps are used for
(a) higher pressure (b) slurries
(c) viscous mass (d) none of these

74. Molten soap mass is transported by a
(a) diaphragm pump (b) reciprocating pump
(c) gear pump (d) centrifugal pump

75. To handle smaller quantity of fluid at high discharge pressure use
(a) reciprocating pump (b) centrifugal pump
(c) volute pump (d) rotary vacuum pump

76. The head developed by a centrifugal pump is largely determined by the
(a) power of the pump
(b) nature of the liquid being pumped
(c) angle of the vanes and the speed of the tip of the impeller
(d) vapour pressure of the liquid

77. The maximum head that can be developed with a single impeller is
(a) 25 ft. (b) 1000 ft.
(c) 250 ± 300 ft. (d) 1000 ft.

78. A fluid jet discharging from a 2´ diameter orifice has a diameter of 1.75´ at its vena-
contracta. The co-efficient of contraction is
(a) 1.3 (b) 0.766
(c) 0.87 (d) none of these

79. The discharge through a V-notch weir varies as
(a) H
3/2
(b) H
1/2

(c) H
5/2
(d) none of these

80. The discharge through a rectangular weir varies as
(a) H
1/2
(b) H
3/2

(c) H
2/5
(d) none of these

81. Propellers are
(a) axial flow mixers (b) low speed impeller
(c) used for mixing liquids of high viscosity
(d) radial flow mixers



82. Turbine impeller
(a) produces only radial current
(b) produces only tangential current
(c) is effective over wide range of viscosities
(d) does not produce tangential current

83. With increase in pump speed, its NPSH requirement
(a) decreases (b) increases
(c) remains unaltered
(d) can either increase or decrease, depends on other factors

84. One dimensional flow implies
(a) Flow in the straight line (b) steady uniform flow
(c) unsteady uniform flow
(d) a flow which does not account changes in transverse direction

85. In case of centrifugal fan or blower, the gas capacity varies as
(a) spect speed (b) (speed)
(c) (speed)
3
(d) none of these

86. The continuity equation
(a) relates mass flow rate along a stream tube
(b) relates work and energy
(c) stipulates that Newton¶s second law of motion must be satisfied at every point in
the fluid
(d) none of these

87. For a specific centrifugal air blower operating at constant speed and capacity the
power requirement and pressure vary
(a) directly as squares of gas density
(b) directly as gas density
(c) directly as square root of density
(d) inversely as gas density

88. Foot valves are provided in the suction line of a centrifugal pump to
(a) avoid priming every time we start the pump
(b) remove the contaminant present in the liquid
(c) minimize the fluctuation in dischrarge
(d) control the liquid discharge

89. Differential manometer measures
(a) atmospheric pressure (b) sub-atmospheric pressure
(c) pressure difference between two points
(d) none of these


90. Velocity distribution for flow between the fixed parallel plates
(a) varies parabolically across the section
(b) is constant over the entire cross section
(c) is zero at the plates and increases linearly to the midplane
(d) none of these

91. While starting a centrifugal pump, its delivery valve should be kept
(a) opened (b) closed
(c) either opened or closed; it does not make any difference
(d) either opened or closed; depending on the fluid viscosity

92. Path followed by water jet issuing from the bottom of a water tank will be a
(a) parabola (vertex being at the opening)
(b) hyperbolic
(c) horizontal straight line
(d) zig-zag path (which is geometrically undefined)

93. A centrifugal pump loses prime after starting. The reason of this trouble may be
(a) incomplete priming (b) too high a suction lift
(c) low available NPSH and air leaks in the suction pipe
(d) all µa¶, µb¶, and µc¶

94. Capacity of a rotary gear pump can be varied by
(a) changing the speed of rotation
(b) bleeding air into suction
(c) bypassing liquid from the suction or discharge line
(d) all µa¶, µb¶, and µc¶

95. For liquid flow through a packed bed, the superficial velocity as compared to average
velocity through the channel in the bed is
(a) more (b) less
(c) equal (d) independent of porosity

96. Reciprocating pumps compared to centrifugal pumps
(a) deliver liquid at uniform pressure
(b) can handle slurries more efficiently
(c) are not subject to air binding
(d) can be operated with delivery valve closed

97. A tube is specified by its
(a) thickness only (b) outer diameter
(c) thickness and outer diameter both (d) inner diameter



98. For pipes that must be broken at intervals for maintenance, the connector used should
be a
(a) union (b) tee
(c) reduce¶s (d) elbow

99. If more than two branches of pipes are to be connected at the same point, then use
(a) elbow (b) union
(c) tee (d) none of these

100. The most economical valve for use with large diameter pipes is
(a) butterfly valve (b) globe valve
(c) needle valve (d) none of these

101. Which of the following factors does not contribute to the pressure drop in a
pipeline?
(a) velocity of liquid (b) size of pipe
(c) length of pipe and number of bends (d) none of these

102. Which of the following can be used to create a flow of gas where no significant
compression is required?
(a) reciprocating compressor (b) blower
(c) axial flow compressor (d) centrifugal compressor

103. Erosion and pits formation on the impeller of a centrifugal pump may be due to
(a) cavitation (b) low speed of impeller
(c) its operation with delivery valve closed for considerable time after starting the
pump
(d) off centering of pump with motor

104. Which of the following valves will incur maximum pressure drop for the same
discharge of water?
(a) globe valve (b) gate valve
(c) needle valve (d) butterfly valve

105. While starting on axial flow pump, its delivery valve should be kept
(a) open (b) closed
(c) either open or closed (d) none of these

106. Identification of pipelines carrying different liquids and gases is done by
(a) diameter of the pipe (b) color of the pipe
(c) the altitude of at which pipe is located (d) none of these





107. A centrifugal pump has the following specifications:
Power ± 4 H.P.; Speed ± 800 rpm
Head ± 8 meters; Flow ± 1000 liters/minutes
If its speed is halved , then the new head will be
(a) 2 m (b) 4 m
(c) 8 m (d) 5.5 m

108. In question No. 107, the power consumed now will be
(a) 0.5 H.P. (b) 2 H.P.
(c) 4 H.P. (d) 1 H.P.

109. In question No. 107, the new discharge will be
(a) 500 liters/min. (b) 200 liter/min
(c) 1000 liter/min (d) 750 liter/min

110. Interstage coolers are provided in a multistage compressor to
(a) save power in compressing a given volume to a given pressure
(b) cool the delivered air
(c) achieve the exact delivery
(d) none of these

111. Surge tanks are provided in high pressure water pipelines to
(a) store a definite quantity of water all the time
(b) reduce water hammer
(c) facilities easy dismantling of pipeline for cleaning and maintenance
(d) none of these

112. Pipes having diameter 14 inches or more are designated by their
(a) outside diameter (b) inside diameter
(c) schedule number (d) none of these

113. Disc compensators are provided in large diameter gas carrying pipelines to
(a) keep the pipe in proper orientation
(b) make the pipe joint leak-proof
(c) account for contraction/ expansion of pipe due to temperature changes of
the surroundings
(d) account for pressure variation inside the pipelines

114. Nominal Pipe Size (NPS) of a pipe less than 12 inches in diameter indicates its
(a) inner diameter (b) outer diameter
(c) thickness (d) neither inner or outer





115. The most important factor which determines the maximum height to which water
can be lifted by a pump at standard temperature (62ºF) is
(a) barometric pressure (b) speed of the impeller
(c) diameter of the impeller (d) both µb¶ and µc¶

116. Bear pump
(a) is a positive displacement pump
(b) is a centrifugal pump
(c) is a non-positive displacement pump
(d) can be started with delivery valve closed

117. When the water is warm, the height to which it can be lifted by a pump
(a) decreases due to reduced velocity
(b) decreases due to reduced vapor pressure
(c) increases due to increased vapor pressure
(d) decreases due to increased frictional resistance

118. Multistage centrifugal pumps are generally used for
(a) high head (b) low head but high discharged
(c) highly viscous liquid (d) slurries of high solid concentration

119. Centrifugal pump can¶t be used to pump
(a) molten sodium (used as a coolant in Fast Breeder Reactor)
(b) moderately vegetable oil used in soap industry
(c) thick molten soap at 80ºC
(d) none of the above

120. Volute type of casing is provided in a centrifugal pump to
(a) convert velocity head to pressure head
(b) convert pressure head to velocity head
(c) reduce the discharge fluctuation
(d) increase the discharge

121. A pump operating under specific conditions delivers insufficient quantity of liquid.
This may be set right by
(a) decreasing the size of the inlet pipe
(b) increasing the size of the inlet pipe
(c) lowering the pump position
(d) both µb¶ and µc¶

122. Delivery of insufficient quantity of liquid by a pump may be caused by
(a) air leak in the inlet (b) low rpm
(c) too high a lift (d) all µa¶, µb¶ and µc¶



123. Actual lift of pump always less than the theoretical lift and is limited by
(a) specific gravity and temperature of the liquid
(b) leakage and pressure decreasing at higher elevations
(c) frictional resistance through pipes, fittings and passages
(d) all µa¶, µb¶ and µc¶

124. Fill up the blank
Nominal size of the discharge pipe of a pump is usually ««« the nominal size of
the inlet pipe
(a) smaller than (b) larger than
(c) same as (d) twice

125. Horsepower requirement for given pump capacity depends upon the
(a) specific gravity of the liquid (b) suction lift
(c) discharge head (d) all µa¶, µb¶ and µc¶


DRYING

1. The vapor pressure exerted by the moisture contained in a wet solid depends
upon the
a) nature of the moisture
b) temperature
c) nature of the solid
d) all a, b, and c

2. To remove all the moisture from a wet solid requires exposure to
a) perfectly dry air
b) highly humid air
c) air at high temperature
d) none of these

3. Milk is dried usually in a
a) freeze dryer
b) spray dryer
c) tray dryer
d) rotary dryer

4. Equilibrium-moisture curves of different solids
a) are different
b) are same
c) depend on the humidity of the gas
d) none of these


5. Detergent solution is dried to a powder in a
a) spray dryer
b) spouted bed dryer
c) tunnel dryer
d) pan open to atmosphere.

6. If moisture content of a solid on dry basis is X then the same on wet basis is
a) X
÷÷÷
X + 1
b) X
÷÷÷
1 - X
c) 1 + X
÷÷÷
X
d) 1 ƛ X
÷÷
X

7. In paper industry, paper is dried in
a) tunnel dryer
b) heated cylinder dryer
c) conveyor dryer
d) festoon dryer

8. Moisture content of a substance when at equilibrium with a given partial
pressure of the
vapor is called
a) free moisture
b) unbound moisture
c) equilibrium moisture
d) bound moisture

9. Calcium ammonium nitrate (a fertilizer) is dried in a
a) rotary dryer
b) vacuum dryer
c) tunnel dryer
d) none of these





10. Moisture in a substance exerting an equilibrium vapor pressure less than that
of pure liquid at
at the same temperature is
a) bound moisture
b) unbound moisture
c) critical moisture
d) none of these

11. Rotary dryer cannot handle
a) free flowing materials
b) dry materials
c) sticky materials
d) granular materials

12. Moisture in a solid exerting an equilibrium vapor pressure equal to that of the
pure liquid at
the same temperature is
a) unbound moisture
b) critical moisture
c) free moisture
d) bound moisture

13. Refractory bricks are usually dried in a
a) tray dryer
b) tunnel dryer
c) conveyor dryer
d) festoon dryer

14. Heat sensitive materials like certain pharmaceuticals and food stuff can be
dried
a) in indirect tray dryer
b) in spray dryer
c) by freeze drying
d) none of these

15. Moisture contained by a substance in excess of the equilibrium moisture is
called
a) unbound moisture
b) free moisture
c) critical moisture
d) bound moisture



16. Flights in a rotary dryer are provided to
a) lift and shower the solids thus exposing it thoroughly to the
drying action of the gas
b) reduce the residence time of solid
c) increase the residence time of the solid
d) none of these

17. In the constant rate period of the rate of drying curve for batch drying
a) cracks develop on the surface of the solid
b) rate of drying decreases abruptly
c) surface evaporation of unbound moisture occurs
d) none of these

18. The falling rate period in the drying of a solid is characterized by
a) increase in rate of drying
b) increasing temperatures both on the surface and within the solid
c) decreasing temperatures
d) none of these

19. Dryer widely used in a textile industry is
a) cylinder dryer
b) conveyor dryer
c) tunnel dryer
d) festoon dryer

20. Sticky material can be dried in a
a) tray dryer
b) rotary dryer
c) fluidized bed dryer
d) none of these

21. Drying of a solid involves
a) only heat transfer
b) only mass transfer
c) both heat and mass transfer
d) none of these

22. A solid material shows case hardening properties while drying. Which of the
following
should be controlled to control the drying process?
a) flow rate of inlet air
b) relative humidity of outlet air
c) humidity of inlet air
d) temperature of the solid

23. Capacity of a rotary dryer depends on
a) its r.p.m
b) its inclination with ground surface
c) both a and b
d) neither a nor b

24. Air at a particular humidity is heated in a furnace. The new dew point
a) decreases
b) increases
c) depends on the extent of heating
d) remains unchanged

25. The critical moisture content in case of drying indicates
a) beginning of falling rate period
b) beginning of constant rate period
c) end of falling rate period
d) none of these

26. A slurry is to be dried to produce flaky solid. Which dryer would you
recommend?
a) spray dryer
b) drum dryer
c) rotary dryer
d) dielectric dryer

27. For continuous drying of granular or crystalline material, the dryer used is
a) tunnel
b) tray
c) rotary
d) none of these

28. All moisture in a non-hygroscopic material isƦƦmoisture
a) free
b) equilibrium
c) unbound
d) bound

29. During constant rate period, the rate of drying decreases with
a) decrease in air temperature
b) increased air humidity
c) both a and b
d) neither a nor b

30. Which is the controlling factor for a drum dryer?
a) diffusion
b) heat transfer
c) both a and b
d) neither a nor b

31. Paper industry employsƦƦ..dryers
a) cylinder
b) rotary
c) spray
d) fluidized bed

32. Sand is dried in foundaries in a ƦƦ..dryer
a) rotary
b) fluidized bed
c) vacuum
d) spray

33. Free flowing granular materials can be best dried in a
a) rotary dryer
b) cylinder dryer
c) drum dryer
d) freeze dryer



HUMIDIFICATION

1. Humidification involves mass transfer between a pure liquid phase and a fixed
gas which is:
a) insoluble in the liquid
b) soluble in the liquid
c) non-ideal in nature
d) at a fixed temperature

2. At a fixed total pressure, humidity depends only on the
a) partial pressure of vapor in the mixture
b) heat capacity of the vapor
c) density of the vapor
d) none of these





3. In saturated gas, the
a) vapor is in equilibrium with the liquid at the gas temperature
b) vapor is in equilibrium with the liquid at the room temperature
c) partial pressure of vapor equals the vapor pressure of the liquid at room
temperature
d) none of these

4. Relative humidity is the ratio of the
a) partial pressure of the vapor to the vapor pressure of the liquid at room
temperature
b) partial pressure of the vapor to the vapor pressure of the liquid
at gas temperature
c) actual humidity to saturation humidity
d) none of these

5. The percentage humidity is less than the relative humidity only at
a) zero percentage humidity
b) hundred percent humidity
c) both zero or hundred percent humidity
d) none of these

6. Heat is BTU necessary to increase the temperature of 1 lb. of gas and its
accompanying
vapor by 1
o
F is called the
a) latent heat
b) humid heat
c) specific heat
d) sensible heat

7. Humid volume is the total volume in cubic feet of 1 lb. of
a) vapor laden gas at 1 atm. And room temperature
b) gas plus its accompanying vapor at 1 atm. and room temperature
c) gas plus its accompanying vapor at 1 atm. and gas temperature
d) vapor laden gas at 1 atm. and gas temperature

8. The temperature to which a vapor gas mixture must be cooled (at varying
humidity)
to become saturated is
a) dew point
b) wet bulb temperature
c) dry bulb temperature
d) none of these

9. The dew point of a saturated gas phase equals the
a) gas temperature
b) room temperature
c) wet bulb temperature
d) none of these

10. Steady state temperature reached by a small amount of liquid evaporating
into a large amount
of unsaturated vapor-gas mixture is
a) dry-bulb temperature
b) wet bulb temperature
c) dew point
d) adiabatic saturation temperature

11. Dry bulb temperature of the gas is
a) less than the wet-bulb temperature
b) greater than the wet-bulb temperature
c) equal to the wet-bulb temperature
d) none of these

12. The difference of wet bulb temperature and adiabatic saturation temperature
of unsaturated
mixture of any system is
a) positive
b) negative
c) zero
d) none of these

13. When the temperature and humidity of air is low we usually use
a) natural draft cooling tower
b) forced draft cooling tower
c) induced draft cooling tower
d) none of these

14. The equipment frequently used for adiabatic humidification-cooling operation
with
recirculating liquid is
a) natural draft cooling tower
b) induced draft cooling tower
c) spray chamber
d) none of these



15. The most efficient cooling tower out of the following is
a) induced draft
b) forced draft
c) natural draft
d) atmospheric

16. Critical humidity of a solid salt means the humidity
a) above which it will always become damp
b) below which it will always stay dry
c) both a and b
d) above which it will always become dry and below which it will always stay
damp.

19. Percentage saturation isƦƦƦƦ..the relative saturation.
a) always smaller than
b) always greater than
c) not related to
d) none of these

20. Wet bulb and dry bulb temperatures become identical at
a) 100% saturation curve
b) 50% saturation curve
c) 78% saturation curve
d) none of these

21. Which of the following processes is followed by unsaturated air (with dry bulb
temperature
12
o
C and relative humidity 47%) passing through water spray washer
(temperature of water being constant at 40
o
C)?
a) humidification only
b) heating only
c) both heating and humidification
d) evaporative cooling

22. Which of the following remains constant during sensible cooling process?
a) specific humidity
b) partial pressure of vapor
c) both a and b
d) neither a nor b





23. During sensible cooling process
a) relative humidity decreases
b) relative humidity increases
c) wet bulb temperature increases
d) both b and c

24. A mixture of 10% C
6
H
6
vapor in air at 25
o
C and 750 mm Hg has a dew point
of 20
o
C. Its
dew point at 30
o
C and 700 mm Hg will be around
a) 21.7
o
C
b) 20
o
C
c) 27.3
o
C
d) 18.7
o
C

25. Which of the following remains constant during evaporative cooling process
with
recirculated water supply?
a) relative humidity
b) partial pressure of vapor
c) wet bulb temperature
d) none of these

26. Dew point of a gas-vapor mixture
a) increases with temperature rise
b) decreases with temperature rise
c) decreases with increases in pressure
d) increases with increases in pressure

27. Which of the following decreases during evaporative cooling process with
recirculated water
supply?
a) wet bulb temperature
b) relative humidity
c) partial pressure of vapor
d) none of these

28. Which of the following increases during evaporative cooling process with
recirculated water
supply?
a) wet bulb temperature
b) relative humidity
c) partial pressure of vapor
d) both b and c

29. The relative saturation of a partially saturated mixture of vapor and gas can
be increased by
a) reducing the total pressure of the mixture
b) increasing the total pressure of the mixture
c) reducing the temperature of the mixture
d) both b and c

30. Condensation of a vapor-gas mixture just begin when
a) p = P
b) p > P
c) p < P
d) p>= P
where: p = partial pressure of the vapor
P = vapor pressure of the liquid

31. Unsaturated air (with dry and wet bulb temperatures being 35
o
C and 25
o
C
respectively) is
passed through water spray chamber maintained at 35
o
C. The air will be
a) cooled
b) humidified
c) both a and b
d) dehumidified

32. In case of unsaturated air
a) dew point wet bulb temperature
b) wet bulb temperature dry bulb temperature
c) both a and b
d) neither a nor b

33. Unsaturated air (with dry bulb temperature and dew point being 35
o
C and
18
o
C respectively)
is passed through a water spray chamber maintained at 15
o
C. The air will be
a) cooled and humidified
b) cooled and dehumidified with increase in wet bulb temperature
c) cooled at the same relative humidity
d) cooled and dehumidified with decrease in wet bulb temperature

34. Which of the following parameters remains almost constant during adiabatic
saturation of
unsaturated air?
a) dry bulb temperature
b) dew point
c) wet bulb temperature
d) none of these

35. Unsaturated air (with dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures being 45
o
C and
25
o
C respectively)
is passed through a water spray chamber maintained at 23
o
C. The air will be
a) cooled and humidified with wet bulb temperature decreasing
b) cooled and humidified at constant wet bulb temperature
c) cooled and dehumidified
d) none of these


Diffusion

1. The unit of volumetric diffusivity is
a.) cm
2/
ec b.) cm/sec
c.) cm
3
/sec d.) cm
3
/sec
3


2. The diffusivity (D) in a binary gas mixture is related to the temperature (T)
as
a.) D w T b.) D w T
0.5

c.) D w T
1.5
d.) D w T
3


3. The diffusivity (D) in a binary gas mixture is related to the pressure (P) as
a.) D w T
1.5
b.) D w 1
P
0.5

c.) D w 1 d.) D w 1
P P
1.5

4. Molecular diffusion is caused by
a.) transfer of molecules from low concentration to high concentration region
b.) thermal energy of the molecules
c.) activation energy of the molecules
d.) potential energy of the molecules

5. Pick out the correct statement
a.) Diffusivity decreases with increase in temperature
b.) Diffusivity increases with increase in molecular weight
c.) Diffusivity increases with the size of the individual molecule
d.) None of these

6. Mass transfer co-efficient is defined as
a.) Flux = (Co-efficient) / (concentration difference)
b.) Co-efficient = Flux / concentration difference
c.) Flux = concentration difference / co-efficient
d.) None of these

7. Mass transfer co-efficient (K) and diffusivity (D) are related according to film
theory as
a.) K w D b.) K w ½D
c.) K w D
1.5
d.) K w D
2


8. Penetration theory relates average mass transfer co-efficient (K) with
diffusivity (D) as
a.) K w D b.) K w ˜D
c.) K w D
1.5
d.) K w D
2


9. Corresponding to Prandtl number in heat transfer, the dimensionless group in
mass transfer is
a.) Schmidt number b.) Sherwood number
c.) Peclet number d.) Stanton number

10. Schmidt number is
a.) Q b.) Re.Pe
oD
AB

b.) Sh x Pe d.) Re / Pe

11. In physical terms, Schmidt number means
a.) thermal diffusivity / mass diffusivity
b.) thermal diffusivity / momentum diffuisivity
c.) momentum diffusivity / mass diffusivity
d.) mass diffusivity / thermal diffusivity

12. Corresponding to Nusselt number in heat transfer, the dimensionless group in
mass transfer, is
a.) Scherwood number b.) Schmidt number
c.) Peclet number d.) Stanton number

13. Mass transfer coefficient of liquid is
a.) affected more by temperature than that for gases
b.) affected much by less temperature than that for gases
c.) not affected by temperature
d.) none of these

14. Lewis number (Le) is
a.) Sc x Pr b.) Pr x Sc
c.) Sc x Pr d.) St x Sh



15. Which of the following is not a unit of mass transfer coeffiecient?
a.) moles transferred
(time)(area)(mole fraction)
b.) moles transferred
( time)(area)(pressure)
c.) mass transferred
(time)(area)(mass A / mass B)
d.) none of these

16. In case liquid-liquid binary diffusion , diffusivity of one constituent into
another is not dependent on
a.) temperature and pressure
b.) concentration
c.) nature of the constituents
d.) none of these

17. Steady state equimolal counter diffusion is encountered in
a.) separation of a binary mixture by distillation
b.) absorption of NH
4
from air by water
c.) all liquid-liquid diffusion systems
d.) all liquid-solid diffusion systems

18. Which of the following has the same dimension as mass diffusivity?
a.) momentum flux b.) kinematic viscosity
c.) thermal diffusivity d.) both b and c

19. Diffusivity in concentrated solutions differs from that in dilute solutions
because of changes in
a.) viscocity with concentration
b.) degree of ideality of the solution
c.) both a and b
d.) neither a nor b

20. The value of Lewis number Le = Sc for air-water vapour system is around
Pr
a.) 1 b.) 0.24
c.) 3.97 d.) 600.







GAS ABSORPTION

1. For absorbing a sparingly soluble gas in a liquid, the
a.) gas side coefficient should be increased
b.) liquid side coefficient should be increased
c.) gas side coefficient should be decreased
d.) liquid side coefficient should be decreased

2. For contacting a highly soluble gas with a liquid
a.) bubble the gas through liquid
b.) spray the liquid on gas stream
c.) either a or b will suffice
d.) none of these

3. Wetted wall tower experiment determines
a.) molal diffusivity b.) volumetric coefficient
c.) mass transfer coefficient d.) none of these

4. Stacked packing compared to dumped packing
a.) provides poorer contact between the fluids
b.) gives lower pressure drop
c.) both (a) and (b)
d.) gives higher drop

5. Channeling is most severe
a.) in towers packed with stacked packing
b.) in towers packed randomly with crushed solids
c.) in dumped packing of regular units
d.) at very high liquid flow rate

6. Flooding results in
a.) High tray efficiency
b.) Low tray efficiency
c.) High gas velocity
d.) Good contact between the fluids

7. Operating velocity in a packed tower is usually
a.) half the flooding velocity
b.) twice the flooding velocity
c.) equal to flooding velocity
d.) more than the flooding velocity



8. At the same gas flow rate, the pressure drop in a packed tower being
irrigated with liquid
a.) is greater than that in dry packed
b.) is lower than that in drying packing
c.) is same as that in drying packing
d.) cannot be predicted as data are insufficient

9. Berl saddle made of carbon cannot be used
a.) for alkalis b.) for SO
2

c.) for H
2
SO
4
d.) in oxidizing atmosphere

10. Flooding in a column results due to
a.) high pressure drop b.) low pressure drop
c.) low velocity of the liquid d.) high temperature

11. The operating line for an absorbed is curved when plotted in terms of
a.) mole fractions b.) mole ratios
c.) partial pressure d.) mass fractions

12. In case of an absorber, the operating
a.) line always lies above the equilibrium curve
b.) line always lies below the equilibrium curve
c.) line can be either above or below the equilibrium curve
d.) velocity is more than the loading velocity

13. For an absorber, both equilibrium and operating line will be straight for
a.) concentrated solution and non-isothermal operation
b.) dilute solution and non-isothermal operation
c.) dilute solution and isothermal operation
d.) concentrated solution and isothermal operation

14. In case of desorber (stipper)
a.) the operating line always lies above the equilibrium curve
b.) the operating line always lies below the equilibrium line
c.) temperature remains unaffected
d.) temperature always increases

15. The minimum liquid rate to be used in an absorber corresponds to an
operating line
a.) of slope = 1 b.) of slope = '1
c.) tangential to the equilibrium curve d.) none of these



16. Absorption factor is defined as
a.) slope of the equilibrium curve
slope of the operating line
b.) slope of the operating line
slope of the equilibrium curve
c.) slope of the operating line - slope of the equilibrium curve
d.) slope of the operating linexslope of the equilibrium curve

17. H
2
S present in naphtha reformed gas is removed by absorbing with
a.) ethanolamine b.) K
2
CO
2

c.) HCL d.) vacuum gas soil

18. If G = insoluble gas in gas stream and L = non-volatile solvent in liquid
stream, then the slope of the operating line for the absorber is
a.) L/G b.) G/L
c.) always < 1 d.) none of these

19. Raschig ring made of porcelain cannot be used for treating
a.) concentrated hydrochloric acid
b.) concentrated nitric acid
c.) alkalis
d.) concentrated sulfuric acid

20. For absorbers, high pressure drop results in
a.) increased efficiency b.) decreased efficiency
c.) high operating cost d.) better gas liquid
contact

21. Which of the following is an undesirable property for an absorbing solvent?
a.) low vapour pressure b.) low velocity
c.) low freezing point d.) none of these

22. Out of the following properties of a solvent for absorption, which combination
of properties provides a good solvent?
I. high viscosity II. Low viscosity
III. high vapour pressure IV. Low vapour pressure
V. high gas solubility VI. High freezing point
VII. low freezing point

Choose from the following combinations:
a.) II,IV,V,VII b.) I,IV,V,VI
c.) II,IV,V,VI d.) I,IV,V,VII

23. When both the fluids flow concurrently in an absorber, the slope of the
operating line is
a.) negative b.) positive
c.) 1 d.) -1

24. Ammonia present in the coke oven gas is removed by washing with
a.) caustic solution b.) dilute ammoniacal liquor
c.) dilute HCl d.) ethanolamine

25. Which of the following is not fixed by process requirements in the design of
absorbers?
a.) flow rate of the entering gas
b.) composition of the entering liquid
c.) terminal concentration of gas stream
d.) none of these

26. In an absorber, HETP does not vary with
a.) flow rate of liquid b.) flow rate of gas
c.) type and size of packing d.) none of these

27. Which of the following is an undesirable property in a low-packing
a.) large surface per unit volume
b.) large free cross-section
c.) low weight per unit volume
d.) large weight of liquid retained

28. Very tall packed towers are divided into series of beds to
a.) reduce the over-all pressure drop
b.) avoid channeling
c.) reduce liquid hold-up
d.) avoid flooding

29. For the same system, if the same liquid used in an absorber is decreased, the
tower height will
a.) increase
b.) decrease
c.) remain unaffected
d.) decrease or increase depends on the type of liquid

30. HETP is numerically equal to HTU only when operating line
a.) lies below the equilibrium line
b.) lies above the equilibrium line
c.) and equilibrium lines are parallel
d.) is far from the equilibrium line

31. Desirable value of absorption factor in an absorber is
a.) 1 b.) <1
c.) >1 d.) 0.5

32. Absorption accompanied by heat evolution results in
a.) increased capacity of the absorber
b.) increase in equilibrium solubility
c.) decrease in equilibrium solubility
d.) none of these

33. Co-current absorbers are usually used when the gas to be dissolved in the
liquid is
a.) sparingly soluble b.) highly soluble
c.) a pure substance d.) a mixture

34. Channeling in a packed tower results from
a.) high pressure drop b.) maldistribution of liquid
c.) non-uniformity of packing d.) both b and c

35. Diameter of raschig rings used in packed tower in industry is normally around
a.) 2" b.) 8"
c.) 12" d.) 18"



FILTRATION

1. For a classification of potable water, we use
a.) gravity sand filter b.) plate and frame filter
c.) vacuum leaf filter d.) rotary vacuum filter

2. Vacuum filter is most suitable for
a.) removal of lines from liquid b.) liquid having high vapour
pressure
c.) liquids of very high viscosity d.) none of these

3. Filter aid is used
a.) to increase the rate of filtration b.) to decrease the pressure drop
c.) to increase the porosity of the cake d.) as a support base for the
septum



4. During the washing of cake
a.) all resistance are constant b.) filter medium resistance
increases
c.) filter medium resistance d.) change resistance decreases

5. The porosity of a compressible cake is
a.) minimum at the filter medium b.) minimum at the upstream
face
c.) maximum at the filter medium d.) same throughout the
thickness

6. The specific cake resistance is
a.) gm / cm
2
b.) cm / gm
c.) cm / gm
2
d.) gm / gm.

7. The unit of filter medium resistance is
a.) cm-1 b.) gm / cm-1
c.) cm / gm-1 d.) gm -1

8. The medium resistance is controlled by
a.) the pressure drop along
b.) the flow rate alone
c.) both pressure drop and flow rate
d.) the cake thickness

9. Compressibility coefficient for an absolutely compressible cake is
a.) 0 b.) 1
c.) 0 to 1 d.) none of these

10. In continuous filtration (at a constant pressure drop) filtrate flow rate varies
inversely as the
a.) square root of the velocity
b.) square root of the viscosity
c.) filtration time only
d.) washing time only

11. For separation of sugar solution from settled out mud we use
a.) sparkler filter b.) plate and frame
c.) centrifugal filter d.) rotary drum vacuum filter

12. The most common filter aid is
a.) diatomaceous earth b.) calcium silicate
c.) sodium carbonate d.) silica gel

13. Removal of activated carbon from glycerine is done by
a.) plate and frame filter b.) rotary vacuum filter
c.) batch backed centrifuge d.) none of these

14. Filtration of water in a paper mill is done by
a.) open sand filter b.) plate and frame filter
c.) vacuum leaf filter d.) sparkler filter

15. The speed of a rotary drum vacuum filter (in rpm) may be
a.) 1 b.) 50
c.) 100 d.) 500

16. Gelatinous solid (which plug the septum) can be filtered by
a.) sparkler filter b.) plate and frame filter
c.) vacuum leaf filter d.) precost filter

17. For laminar of flow of filtrate through the cake deposited on septum which of
the following with the valid?
a.) Kozency-Carman Equation b.) Leva's equation
c.) Clack-Plummer equation d.) none of these

18. Which of the following may prove unsuitable for filtering volatile liquids?
a.) pressure filter b.) gravity filter
c.) centrifugal filter d.) vacuum filter

19. In washing type plate and frame filter press the ratio of washing rate to the
final filtrate rate is
a.) 4 b.) 1/4
c.) 1 d.) 1/2

20. Moore filter is a
a.) leaf filter b.) filter press
c.) rotary filter d.) sand filter

21. Diatomaceous earth is
a.) explosive b.) filter aid
c.) filter medium d.) none of these

22. Flow of filtrate through cake in a plate and frame filter press is best described
by
a.) Kozency-Carman equation b.) Hagen-Poiseu equation
c.) Fanning's equation d.) Kremser equation


23. A straight line is obtained on plotting reciprocal of filtration rate vs the
volume of filtrate
a.) compressible cakes and laminar flow of filtrate
b.) incompressible cakes and laminar flow of filtrate
c.) compressible cake and turbulent flow of filtrate
d.) incompressible cake and turbulent flow of filtrate

24. Percentage of drum submerged in slurry in case of rotary drum filter is
a.) 3% b.) 30%
c.) 85% d.) 25%


25. Which of the following represents the plot of filtrate cvolume versus time for
constant pressure filtration?
a.) parabola b.) straight line
c.) hyperbola d.) exponential curve

26. With increase in drum speed, in a rotary drum filter, the filtration rate
a.) increases b.) increases linearly
c.) decreases d.) is not affected

27. The inlet pressure in a constant rate filtration
a.) increases continuously b.) decreases
c.) remains constant d.) none of these

28. Which is a continuous filter?
a.) plate and frame filter b.) cartridge filter
c.)shell and leaf filter d.) none of these

29. Addition of filter aid to the slurry before filtration is done to Ʀ.. of the coke
a.) increase the porosity
b.) increase the compressibility coefficient
c.) decrease the porosity
d.) decrease the compressibility coefficient

30. The cake resistance increases steadily with the time of filtration in a plate and
frame filter employing constant Ʀ.. filtration
a.) rate b.) pressure
c.) both a and b d.) neither a nor b

31. The controlling resistance in a rotary drum vacuum filter is the Ʀ. Resistance
a.) piping b.) cake
c.) filter medium c.) none of these



ADSORPTION


1. Physical adsorption is
a. an irreversible phenomenon
b. a reversible phenomenon
c. accompanied by evolution of heat
d. both b and c

2. Chemisorption (chemical adsorption) is
a. same as ³Van der Waals´ adsorption
b. characterized by adsorption of heat
c. also called activated adsorption
d. none of these

3. Rate of adsorption increases as the
a. temperature increases c. pressure decreases
b. temperature decreases d. size of adsorbent increases

4. When adsorption hysteresis is observed, the desorption equilibrium pressure is
a. always lower than that obtained by adsorption
b. always higher than that obtained by adsorption
c. same as that obtained by adsorption
d. dependent on the system can be either lower or higher than that obtained by adsorption

5. Which of the following adsorbent is used to decolorize yellow glycerine?
a. silica gel c. Fuller¶s earth
b. alumina d. activated carbon

6. Freundlich equation applies to adsorption of solute from
a. dilute solutions, over a small concentrated range
b. gaseous solutions at high pressure
c. concentrated solutions
d. none of these

7. In case of physical adsorption, the difference between heat of adsorption and heat of normal
condensation is
a. equal to the heat of formation of surface compound
b. equal to the heat of wetting
c. zero
d. called integral heat of adsorption

8. Pick out the wrong statement
Generally for physical adsorption, a gas of
a. higher molecular weight is adsorbed in preference to a gas of low molecular weight
b. high critical temperature is adsorbed in preference to a gas of low critical temperature
c. low volatility is adsorbed in preference to a gas of high volatility
d. both b and c

9. The change in enthalpy per unit weight of adsorbed gas when adsorbed on gas free or
³outgassed´ adsorbent to form a definite concentration of adsorbate is called its
a. integral heat of adsorption
b. heat of wetting
c. differential heat of adsorption
d. heat of normal condensation

10. With increase in concentration of the adsorbate the integral heat of adsorption
a. increases
b. decreases
c. remains unchanged
d. may increase or decrease; depends on type of adsorbate

11. The change in enthalpy when a unit quantity of gas is adsorbed by a relatively large quantity
of adsorbent (on which a definite concentration of the adsorbed gas already exists) is termed
as the
a. differential heat of adsorption c. integral heat of adsorption
b. heat of wetting d. heat of normal condensation

12. As complete saturation of an adsorbent is approached, the differential heat of adsorption
approaches
a. heat of normal condensation c. zero
b. integral heat of adsorption d. none of these

13. Ion exchange process is similar to
a. absorption c. adsorption
b. extraction d. leaching

14. CO
2
can be adsorbed by
a. hot cupric oxide c. Cold Ca (OH)
2

b. heated charcoal d. alumina


CENTRIFUGATION


1. For separation of sugar solution from settled out mud we use
a. sparkler filter c. centrifugal filter
b. plate & frame filter d. rotary drum vacuum filter

2. Moisture can be removed from lubricating oil using
a. tubular centrifuge c. sparkler filter
b. clarifier d. vacuum leaf filter

3. Which of the following can be most effectively used for clarification of tube oil and printing
ink?
a. sparkler filter c. disc-bowl centrifuge
b. precoat filter d. sharpless supercentrifuge

4. If the radius of a basket centrifuge is halved and the rpm is doubled, then
a. linear speed of the basket is doubled
b. linear speed of the basket is halved
c. centrifugal force is doubled
d. capacity of centrifuge is increased

5. Where the difference in density of the two liquid phases to be separated is very small (as in
milk cream separator), the most suitable separator is
a. disc bond centrifuge c. batch basket centrifuge
b. sharpless supercentrifuge d. sparkler filter



FLOTATION



1. Froth Flotation is most suitable for treating
a. iron ores c. quartz
b. sulfide ores d. metal ores

2. In Froth Flotation, chemical agent added to cause air adherence is called
a. collector c. modifier
b. frother d. promoter

3. Pine oil used in forth flotation technique acts as a
a. collector c. frother
b. modifier d. activator

4. Which of the following is the most suitable for cleaning of fine coal dust (< 0.5 m)?
a. Through washer c. Spiral separator
b. Baum Jig Washer d. Froth Flotation



LEACHING


1. Which of the following operations does not involve leaching?
a. dissolving gold from ores
b. dissolving pharmaceutical products from bark or roots
c. dissolving sugar from the cells of the best
d. removing nicotine from its water solution by kerosene

2. Tea percolation employs
a. liquid-liquid extraction c. absorption
b. leaching d. adsorption



3. Rate of leaching increases with increasing
a. temperature c. pressure
b. viscosity of solvent d. size of the solid

4. Stage efficiency in a leaching process depends on the
a. time of contact between the solid and the solution
b. rate of diffusion of the solute through the solid and into the liquid
c. both a and b
d. vapor pressure of the solution

5. Extraction of coffee from its seed is done by
a. liquid-liquid extraction c. extractive distillation
b. leaching d. steam distillation

6. Leaching of sugar from sugar beets is done by
a. hot water c. dilute H
2
SO
4

b. hexane d. lime water

7. With increase in temperature, the leaching rate increases due to
a. decreased liquid viscosity c. both a and b
b. increased diffusivity d. neither a nor b

8. Leaching rate is independent of the
a. agitation c. temperature
b. particle size d. none of these



LIQUID LIQUID EXTRACTION


1. Heats sensitive materials with very high latent heat of vaporization may be
economically separated using
a. liquid extraction c. evaporation
b. distillation d. absorption

2. Fractional solvent extraction
a. employs only one solvent c. results in low interfacial tension
b. employs two solvents d. none of these

3. Choose the best combination or properties for a good solvent for extraction out of the
following
(i) high selectivity
(ii) low selectivity
(iii) high viscosity
(iv) low viscosity
(v) large distribution coefficient
(vi) small distribution coefficient
(vii) high interfacial tension
(viii) low interfacial tension

a. ( i ), ( iv ), ( v ), ( vii ) c. ( i ), ( iii ), ( v ), ( vii )
b. ( i ), ( iii ), ( v ), ( vi ) d. ( i ), ( ii ), ( iv ), ( vii )

4. Selectivity of solvent used in extraction should be
a. 1 c. > 1
b. < 1 d. 0

5. In liquid extraction, if selectivity is unity, then
a. separation of the constituent is most effective
b. no separation will occur
c. amount of solvent required will be minimum
d. solvent flow rate should be very low

6. When the solvent dissolves very little of solute then
a. solvent of low latent heat of vaporization should be used
b. solvent of low freezing point should be used
c. large quantity of solvent is required to extract the solute
d. very small quantity of solute is required

7. Which of the following is the most suitable for extraction in a system having very low density
difference?
a. mixer-settler extractor c. pulsed extractor
b. centrifugal extractor d. packed extraction tower

8. In extraction, as the temperature increases, the area of heterogeneity (area covered by binodal
curve)
a. decreases c. remains unchanged
b. increases d. none of these

9. The apex of an equilateral triangular coordinate (internary liquid system) represents
a. a pure component c. a ternary mixture
b. a binary mixture d. an insoluble binary system

10. In a countercurrent extractor as the axial mixing increases, the extraction efficiency
a. increases c. remains unchanged
b. decreases d. depends on the pressure of the system

11. The solvent used in liquid extraction should not have high latent heat of vaporization because
a. the pressure drops and hence the pumping cost will be very high
b. it cannot be recovered by distillation
c. its recovery cost by distillation may be prohibitively high
d. it will decompose while recovering by distillation






12. In a countercurrent liquid extractor
a. both liquids flow at fixed rate
b. both liquids can have any desired flow rate
c. only one of the liquids may be pumped at any desired rate
d. liquid¶s flow rate depends upon the temperature and pressure

13. Sides of equilateral triangular coordinates (on which ternary liquid system is plotted)
represent
a. a pure component c. a ternary mixture
b. a binary mixture d. partially miscible ternary system

14. As the reflux ratio, in a continuous counter current extraction is increased, the number of
stages
a. increase c. remain unchanged
b. decrease d. can either increase or decrease, depends on
the system

15. Acetic acid will be most economically separated from a dilute solution of acetic acid in water
by
a. solvent extraction c. evaporation
b. continuous distillation d. absorption



MATERIALS HANDLING




1. Which is most suitable for transportation of sticky material?
a. apron conveyor c. belt conveyor
b. screw conveyor d. pneumatic conveyor

2. Which of the following cannot be recommended for transportation of abrasive materials?
a. belt conveyor c. apron conveyor
b. flight conveyor d. chain conveyor

3. For transporting pastry material, one will use
a. apron conveyor c. belt conveyor
b. screw conveyor d. bucket elevator

4. The capacity of a belt conveyor depends upon two factors. If one is the cross section of the
load, the other is the
a. speed of the belt c. thickness of the belt
b. length of the belt d. material to be transported

5. Dry powdery solid material are transported by a
a. belt conveyor c. belt conveyor
b. screw conveyor d. bucket elevator

6. Apron conveyors are used for
a. heavy loads and short runs c. heavy loads and long runs
b. small loads, long runs d. transporting powdered materials


SCREENING


1. The ratio of the actual mesh dimension of Taylor series to that of the next smaller screen is
a. 2 b. 2 c. 1.5 d. none of these

2. The opening of 200 mesh screen (Taylor series) is
a. 0.0074 cm b. 0.0074 mm c. 0.0047 cm d. 0.0047 mm

3. The ratio of the area of opening in one screen (Taylor series) to that of openings in the next
smaller screen is
a. 1.5 b. 1 c. 2 d. none of these

4. Cumulative Analysis for determining surface is more precise than differential analysis
because of the
a. assumption that all particles in single fraction are equal in size
b. fact that screening is more effective
c. assumption that all particles in a single fraction are equal in size is not needed
d. none of these

5. Increasing the capacity of screen
a. decreases the screen effectiveness c. does not affect the screen effectiveness
b. increases the screen effectiveness d. none of these

6. Screen efficiency is
a. recovery rejection b. recovery c. rejection d. none of these

7. As particle size is reduced
a. screening becomes progressively more difficult
b. screening becomes progressively easier
c. capacity and effectiveness of the screen is increased
d. none of these

8. A screen is said to be blinded when
a. oversizes are present in undersize fraction
b. undersizes are retained in oversize fraction
c. the screen is plugged with solid particles
d. its capacity is abruptly increased

9. Size measurement of ultrafine particles can be best expressed in terms of
a. centimeter c. micron
b. screen size d. surface area per unit mass



10. Trommels separate a mixture of particles depending on their
a. size c. screen size
b. wet ability d. electrical and magnetic

11. Screen capacity is expressed in terms of
a. tons/h b. tons/ft
2
c. both a and b d. tons/h-ft
2


12. Which of the following screens has the maximum capacity?
a. grizzlies c. shaking screen
b. trommels d. vibrating screen

13. For sizing of fine materials, the most suitable equipment is a
a. trommel c. shaking screen
b. grizzly d. vibrating screen

14. Mesh number indicates the number of holes per
a. square inch c. square foot
b. linear inch d. linear foot

15. Optimum ratio of operating speed to critical speed of a trommel is
a. 0.33 ± 0.45 c. 0.5 ± 2
b. 1.33 ± 1.45 d. 1.5 ± 2.5

16. 200 mesh screens means
a. 200 openings/cm
2
c. 200 openings/cm
b. 200 openings/inch d. 200 openings/inch
2


17. In screen analysis, notation + 5 mm/ -10 mm means passing through
a. 10 mm screen and retained on 5 mm screen
b. 5 mm screen and retained on 10 mm screen
c. both 5 mm and 13 mm screens
d. neither 5 mm nor 10 mm screens

18. The critical speed of a trommel (n) is related to its diameter (D)
a.
1
o N
D
c. E N D
b. E N D d.
1
o N
D


19. With increase in the capacity of screens, the screen effectiveness
a. remains unchanged c. decreases
b. increases d. decreases exponentially

20. Vibrating screens have capacity (tons/ft
2
± hr ± mm mesh size) in the range of
a. 0.2 to 0.8 c. 50 to 100
b. 5 to 25 d. 100 to 250

21. The material passing one screening surface and retained on a subsequent surface is called
a. intermediate material c. plus material
b. minus d. none of the above


SEDIMENTATION

Questions 1 and 2 are based on the following information and illustration
In an experiment, a sphere of density
1
V and radius r is dropped in a tank of oil of
viscosity
1
µ and density
2
V . The time of descent for the sphere through the first section of height
d is recorded as t
1
and through the second section of the same height as t
2
, 0 < t
2
± t
1
<< 1.




d
d



1. Which of the following is true for the experiment
a. The drag force exerted on the sphere increases during it descent through the second
section.
b. The sphere never reaches its terminal velocity while falling through both sections
c. The sphere reaches its terminal velocity while falling through the first section
d. The drag force exerted on the sphere decreases during the descent through the second
section

2. The drag force exerted on the sphere during its descent through the second section is
a. ´ )
3
1 2
4
3
V V T g r c.
3
1 1
2
4
6
3
T V Tµ
+

© ¹
ª º
d
r g r
t

b.
3
1
4
3
V T g r d.
3
1 1
2
4
6
3
T V Tµ
+
+
© ¹
ª º
d
r g r
t


3. Drag is defined as the force exerted by the
a. fluid on the solid in a direction opposite to flow
b. the fluid on the solid in the direction of flow
c. the solid on the fluid
d. none of these

4. Drag coefficient for flow of past immersed body is the ratio of
a. shear stress to the product of velocity head and density
b. shear force to the product of velocity head and density
c. average drag per unit projected area to the product of the velocity head and density
d. none of these

5. Stoke¶s law is valid when the particle Reynolds number is
a. <1 c. >1
b. <5 d. none of these


Sphere
V (V
1
)
o
2

6. Drag coefficient C
D
is given by (in Stoke¶s law range)
a.
16
e
!
D
C
p
c.
24
e
!
D
C
p

b.
18.4
e
!
D
C
p
d.
0.23
0.079
e
!
D
C
p


7. At low Reynolds number
a. viscous forces are unimportant
b. viscous forces control
c. viscous forces control and inertial forces are unimportant
d. gravity forces control

8. At high Reynolds number
a. inertial forces control and viscous forces are unimportant
b. viscous forces predominate
c. inertial forces are unimportant and viscous forces control
d. none of these

9. Forces acting on a particle settling in fluid are
a. gravitational and buoyant forces
b. centrifugal and drag forces
c. gravitational or centrifugal, buoyant and drag forces
d. external, drag and viscous forces

10. Terminal velocity is
a. constant velocity with no acceleration
b. a fluctuating velocity
c. attained after moving one-half of total distance
d. none of these

11. In hindered settling, particles are
a. placed farther from the wall c. near each other
b. not affected by other particles and the wall d. none of these

12. Drag coefficient in hindered settling is
a. less than in free settling
b. equal to that in free settling
c. not necessarily quarter than in free settling
d. greater than in free settling

13. For the free settling of a spherical particle through a fluid, the slope of C
D
vs log N
Re
plot is
a. 1 c. ± 1
b. 0.5 d. ± 0.5

14. The terminal velocity of a small sphere settling in a viscous fluid varies as the
a. first power of its diameter
b. inverse of the fluid viscosity
c. inverse square of the diameter
d. square of the difference in specific weights of solid and fluid

15. Buoyant force
a. for non symmetrical bodies is not vertical
b. depends on the depth of the submergence of the floating body
c. depends on the weight of the floating body
d. none of these

16. Center of pressure in an immersed body is _______ the center of gravity
a. above
b. below
c. at
d. either above or below; depends on the liquid density

17. The line of action of the buoyant force passes through the center of gravity of the
a. submerged body
b. displaced volume of the fluid
c. volume of fluid vertically above the body
d. horizontal projection of the body

18. Drag is the force component exerted on an immersed object
a. passing the centroid of the body at 60° to the direction of motion
b. the component being parallel to the flow direction
c. the component being normal to the flow direction
d. none of these

19. Sphericity of raschig ring (whose length and diameter are equal) is
a. >1 c. <2
b. 1 d. 2

20. Sphericity of pulverized coal is
a. 1 c. <1
b. >1 d. g

21. Sedimentation on commercial scale occurs in
a. classifiers c. thickeners
b. rotary drum filters d. cyclones

22. For non spherical particle, the sphericity
a. is defined as the ratio of surface area of a sphere having the same volume as the
particle to the actual surface area of the particle
b. has a dimension of length
c. is always less than 1
d. is the ratio of volume of a sphere having the same surface area as the particle to the actual
volume of the particle

23. Sphericity of a cubical particle when its equivalent diameter is taken as the height of the tube
is
a.0.5 c. 2
b.1 d. 3


24. For raschig rings, the sphericity is
a. 0.5 c. < 1
b. 1 d. 3

25. Sphericity for a non-spherical particle is given by
a.
6V
DS
c.
DS
V

b.
6
V
DS
d.
V
DS


where: V and S are volume and surface area respectively of one particle
D = equivalent diameter of particles


SIZE REDUCTION

1. Shape factor for a cylinder whose length equals its diameter is
a. 1.5 b. 0.5 c. 1 d. 0

2. Equivalent diameter of a particle is the diameter of the sphere having the same
a. ratio of surface to volume as the actual volume
b. ratio of volume to surface as the particle
c. volume as the particle
d. none of these

3. For coarse reduction of hard solids, use
a. impact b. attrition c. compression d. cutting

4. Soft and non abrasive materials can be made into fines by
a. attrition b. compression c. cutting d. none of these

5. Crushing efficiency is the ratio of
a. surface energy created by the crushing to the energy absorbed by the solid
b. the energy absorbed by the solid to that fed to the machine
c. the energy fed to the machine to the surface energy created by the crushing
d. the energy absorbed by the solid to the surface energy created by the crushing.

6. Rittinger¶s crushing law states that
a. work required to form a particle of any size is proportional to the square of the surface to
volume ratio of the product.
b. work required to form a particle of a particular size is proportional to the square root of
the surface to volume ratio of the product
c. work required in crushing is proportional to the new surface created
d. for a given machine and feed, crushing efficiency is dependent on the sizes of feed and
product




7. Bond crushing law
a. calls for relatively less energy for the smaller product particle than does the
Rittinger law
b. is less realistic in estimating the power requirements of commercial crushes
c. states that the work required to form particle of any size from very large feed is
proportional to the square root of the volume to surface ratio of the product
d. states that the work required for the crushing is proportion

8. Work index is defined as the
a. gross energy (Kwh/ton of feed) needed to reduce very large feed to such a size that
80% of the product passes a 100 micron screen
b. energy needed to crush one ton of feed to 200 microns
c. energy (Kwh/ton of feed) needed to crush small feed to such a size that 80% of product
passes a 200 mesh screen
d. energy needed to crush one ton of feed to 100 microns

9. The operating speed of a ball mill should be
a. less than the critical speed c. at least equal to the critical speed
b. much more than the critical speed d. none of these

10. A fluid energy mill is used for
a. cutting c. ultragrinding
b. grinding d. crushing

11. Wet grinding in a revolving mill
a. gives less wear on chamber walls than dry grinding
b. requires more energy than for dry grinding
c. increases capacity compared to dry grinding
d. complicates handling of the product compared to dry grinding

12. Cement clinker is reduced to fine size
a. Roll crusher c. Tube mill
b. Ball mill d. Hammer mill

13. For the preliminary breaking of hard rock, we use
a. gyratory crusher c. Tube mill
b. Ball mill d. Squirrel-cage disintegrator

14. Fibrous material is broken by
a. Roll crusher c. Ball mill
b. Squirrel-cage disintegrator d. none of these

15. As the product becomes finer, the energy required for grinding
a. decreases c. is same as for coarser grinding
b. increases d. is 1.5 times than for coarser grinding

16. Ultrafine grinders operate principally by
a. slow compression c. attrition
b. impact d. cutting action


17. The energy consumed by a ball mill depends on
a. its speed c. the density of the material being ground
b. its ball load d. all a, b and c

18. Grinding efficiency of a ball mill is of the order of
a. 1 ± 5% c. 75 ± 80%
b. 40 ± 50% d. 90 ± 95%

19. In case of a revolving mill, wet grinding compared to dry grinding
a. requires more energy c. complicates handling and classification of the product
b. has less capacity d. none of these

20. Choke crushing (in case of a jaw crusher) compared to free crushing
a. results in increased capacity c. consumes more power
b. consumes less power d. both a and c

21. For efficient grinding, ball mills, must be operated
a. at a speed less than critical speed c. at a speed equal to critical speed
b. at a speed more than critical speed d. with minimum possible small balls

22. To get ultra fine particles, the equipment used is
a. ball mill c. hammer crusher
b. rod mill d. fluid energy mill

23. The material is crushed in a gyratory crusher by the action of
a. impact c. compression
b. attrition d. cutting

24. To get fine talc powder from its granules, the equipment used is
a. roller crusher c. jaw crusher
b. ball mill d. gyratory crusher

25. Ball mill is used for
a. crushing c. fine grinding
b. coarse grinding d. attrition

26. The main differentiation factor between tube mill and ball mill is the
a. length to diameter ratio c. final product size
b. size of the grinding media d. operating speed

27. Kick¶s law relates to
a. energy consumption c. feed size
b. final particle size d. none of these









28. Fluid energy mill comes in the category of
a. Grinder c. cutting machine
b. crusher d. ultrafine grinder

29. Which of the following gives the crushing energy required to create new surface?
a. Taggart¶s rule c. Rittinger¶s law
b. Fick¶s Law d. none of these

30. Size reduction mechanism used in Jaw crushers is
a. attrition c. cutting
b. compression d. impact

31. Feed size of • 25 cm can be accepted by
a. ball mill c. fluid energy mill
b. rod mill d. jaw crusher

32. Maximum size reduction in a ball mill is done by
a. attrition c. impact
b. compression d. cutting

33. The main size reduction operation in ultra fine grinders is
a. cutting c. compression
b. attrition d. impact

34. The reduction ratio for grinders is defined as
a. Df/Dp c. Df ± Dp
b. Dp/Df d. Dp ± Df

35. The reduction ratio for fine grinders is
a. 5 ± 10 c. 10 ± 20
b. 20 ± 40 d. as high as 100

36. Maximum size reduction in a fluid energy mill is achieved by
a. compression c. cutting
b. interparticle attrition d. impact

37. Pick out the material having minimum Rittinger¶s number
a. calcite c. quartz
b. pyrite d. galena

38. Pick out the material having maximum Rittinger¶s number
a. Calcite c. quartz
b. pyrite d. galena

39. Crushing efficiency of a machine ranges between
a. 0.1 to 2 % c. 20 to 25 %
b. 5 to 10 % d. 50 to 70 %



40. According to Bond crushing law, the work required to form particle of size µD¶ from very
large feed is
a. ´ ) / o S V p c. ´ ) / o
p
S V
b. ´ )
2
/ o S V p d. ´ ) / o
f
S V
when ´ ) /
p
S V and ´ ) /
f
S V are surface to volume ratio of the product and feed
respectively


PROCESS EQUIPMENT DESIGN

1. Vertical valves are not supported by
a. brackets b. skirts
c. column d. saddles
2. Bracket supports are most suitable for
a. thick walled vertical vessels b. horizontal vessels
c. thin spherical vessel (e.g. Hortonsphere) d. none of these
3. Skirt support is most suitable for
a. small horizontal vessels b. large horizontal vessels
c. tall vertical vessels d. thick walled small vertical
vessels
4. Saddle supports are used for supporting
a. horizontal cylindrical vessels b. tall vertical vessels
c. thick walled vertical vessels d. thick spherical vessels
5. Wind load consideration in the design of a support can be neglected when the
vessel is
a. tall (say 30 meters) but is full of liquid b. tall but empty
c. short (<2 m) and housed indoor d. none of these
6. Leg support is meant for
a. large horizontal cylindrical vessels b. tall but empty vessels
c. small vessels d. thick walled tall vessels
7. The force due to wind load acting on a tall vessels depends upon its
a. shape b. outside diameter
c. height d. all (a), (b) and (c)
8. Joint efficiency for a seamless pipe is
a. 1 b. 0.85
c.1.2 d. 0.5
9. In the design of a paddle agitator the ratio paddle diameter to tank diameter
is normally taken as:
a.0.1 b. 0.8 c.0.25 d. 0.5
10. The ratio propeller agitator diameter to tank diameter is normally taken as
a. 0.15-0.30 b. 0.5-0.65 c. 0.75-0.85 d. 0.60-0.90


11. Baffle width is normally taken as
a. 0.1-0.12 tank diameter b. 0.4-0.5 tank diameter
c. 0.45-0.6 tank diameter d. 0.2-0.45 tank diameter
12. The minimum baffle height should be
a. equal to the impeller diameter b. twice the impeller
diameter
c. twice the diameter d. 3/4 of the tank height
13. Baffles may be eliminated for
a. low viscosity liquids (<200 poise) b. high viscosity (>600 poise)
c. large diameter tank d. none of these
14. Power required for agitation depends upon the
a. height and properties of the liquid b. agitator type and speed of
agitation
c. size of agitator and the tank d. all (a), (b) and (c)
15. The retention time of material in rotary dryer depends upon
a. its rpm b. its slope and length
c. the arrangement of flights d. all (a), (b) and (c)
16. Filtration rate is affected by
a. pressure drop across the cake and filter medium
b. cake and filter medium resistance
c. area of filtering surface and viscosity of filtrate
d. all (a), (b) and (c)
17. Rate of filtrate delivery is inversely proportional to the
a. filtering the area and the pressure difference driving force
b. viscosity of filtrate
c. cake and filter medium resistance
d. both (b) and (c)
18. In the case of a shell and the tube heat exchanger, the logarithmic mean temperature
difference
a. is always less than arithmetic average value
b. is always more than arithmetic mean value but more than geometric mean
value
c. is always less than arithmetic mean value but more than geometric mean
value
d. may be either more or less than geometric mean and arithmetic mean
value depending upon whether the flow of stream is co-current or counter-
current
19. In a double pipe (concentric) heat exchanger, the hydraulic radius for heat transfer (for a
fluid flowing through the annulus) would be
a. same as that for fluid flow
b. less than that for fluid flow
c. more than that for fluid flow
d. D2 - D1 (D1 and D2 are I.D. of inner and outer pipes respectively)


20. Fouling factor must be included in the calculation of over all design heat
transfer co-efficient when the liquid
a. containing suspended solids flows at low velocity
b. containing suspended solids flows at high velocity
c. is highly viscous
d. is of high specific gravity
21. The value of fouling factor depends upon the
a. characteristics of process fluid b. velocity process fluid
containing suspended solids
c. suspended solids in the fluid d. all (a), (b) and (c)
22. Floating head heat exchangers are used for
a. heat transfer between corrosive fluids
b. cases where temperature difference between the shell and the
tubes is more (>50 C)
c. co-current heat transfer systems
d. counter-current heat transfer systems
23. In a shell and tube heat exchanger, shortest center to center distance
between adjacent tubes is
a. called tube pitch
b. called tube clearance
c. always less than the diameter of the tube
d. none of these
24. Shortest distance between two tubes is
a. called tube pitch
b. called tube clearance
c. more in case of triangular pitch as compared to square pitch of tube layout
d. none of these
25. In most of the shell and tube heat exchanger, the tube pitch is generally
a. less than the diameter of the tube b. 1.25 -1.50 times the tube
diameter
c. 2.5 times the tube diameter d. one-fourth of the tube
diameter
26. Triangular pitch tube layout as compared to square pitch in a shell and tube
heat exchanger
a. permits the use of less tubes in given shell diameter
b. facilitates comparatively easier external cleaning because of larger
clearance
c. permits the use of more tubes in a given shell diameter
d. both (b) and (c)
27. Twenty five percent cut segmental baffle means that the baffle
a. height is 75% of the I.D. of the shell b. height is 25% of the I.D. of
the shell
c. spacing is 75% of its height d. width is 25% of its height
28. In shell and tube heat exchangers, straight tie rods are used to
a. hold baffle in space b. fix the tubes in position
c. account for thermal strain d. none of these
29. Baffle spacing is generally
a. more than the I.D. of the shell
b. not greater than the I.D. of the shell
c. not less than one fifth of the I.D. of the shell
d. both (b) and (c)
30. Which of the following is the most common baffle used in industrial shell and
tube heat exchange?
a. 75% cut segmental baffle b. 25% cut segmental baffle
c. orifice baffle d. disk and doughnut baffle
31. In a shell and tube heat exchanger for given heat transfer surface area, smaller diameter
tubes are favored as compared to larger diameter ones because smaller diameter tubes.
a. are easier to clean
b. are less prone to fouling
c. can be fitted into a smaller shell diameter hence the cost of the
heat exchanger would be less
d. none of these
32. High pressure fluid in a shell and tube heat exchanger should preferably be
routed through the
a. tubes to avoid the expense of high pressure shell construction
b. shell side for smaller total pressure drop
c. shell side if the flow is counter-current and tube side if the flow is co-
current
d. shell side for larger overall heat transfer co-efficient
33. When one of the fluids is highly corrosive and has fouling tendency, it should
a. preferably flow inside the tube for its easier internal cleaning
b. preferably flow outside the tube
c. flow at very slow velocity
d. flow outside the tube when the flow is counter-current and inside the tube
when the flow is co-current
34. In a shell and tube heat exchanger, the clearance of the tube is generally
a. not less than one-fourth of the tube diameter or 3/16
b. more than the tube diameter
c. equal to the tube diameter
d. more in case of triangular pitch as compared to the square pitch tube
layout.
35.For a given fluid as the pipe diameter increases, the pumping cost
a. decreases
b. increases
c. remains unaffected
d. may increase or decrease depending upon whether the fluid is Newtonian
or non-Newtonian
36. Optimum economic pipe diameter for fluid flow is determined by the
a. viscosity of the fluid
b. density of the fluid
c. total cost considerations (pumping cost plus fixed cost of the
pipe)
d. none of these.
37. Friction factor turbulent flow in new pipe is given by
a. f = 16/NR
E
b. f = 0.04/(NR
E
)
0.16
c. f = 0.22NR
E
0.5
d. f =
25/NR
E

38. In case of continuous distillation column, increase in the reflux ratio may
result
a. lower fixed charges for the column b. greater cost for the reboiler
heat supply
c. greater cost for the condenser coolant d. all (a), (b) and (c)
39. Optimum reflux ratio in a continuous distillation column is determined by the
a. maximum permissible vapor velocity
b. flooding limit of the column
c. total cost consideration (fixed cost of the column plus the cooling
water and steam
cost)
d. none of these
40. Pressure drop due to pipe fittings can be estimated by Ƴp/o = 4f (L
e
/D)
(V
2
/2gc) where L
e
=
equivalent length of straight pipeline which will incur the same frictional loss
as the fitting and D = diameter of the fitting. The value of Le /D
(dimensionless) for 45º elbow and 180º close return bends would be
respectively around
a. 5 and 10 b. 45 and 75
c. 180 and 300 d. 300 and 500
41. L
e
/D for 90º elbow (medium radius) and 90º square elbow would be
respectively around
a. 25 and 60 b. 3 and 5
c. 100 and 250 d. 250 and 600
42. Le/D for a Tee (used as elbow, entering run) would be around
a.5 b. 60
c. 200 d. 350
43. Le/D for a Tee (used as elbow, entering branch) would be
a. less than that for Tee (used as elbow, entering run)
b. more than that for Tee (used as elbow, entering run)
c. around 90
d. both (b) and (c)
44. Le/D for couplings and unions would be
a. 60 b. 200 c. 350 d. negligible

45. Le/D for fully open gate valves would be
a. much more than that for fully open globe valve
b. much less (say 2% than that for fully open globe valve)
c. around 7
d. both (b) and (c)
46. Le/D for fully open globe valve may be around
a. 10 b. 25 c. 75 d. 300
47. For turbulent flow (N
Re
>2100) of low viscosity fluid (Q<20 cp) in steel pipes,
the optimum inside pipe diameter is given by
a.
0.45 0.13
3.9 V !
opt f
Di q c.
0.49 0.14
4.7 V !
opt f
Di q
a.
0.45 0.95
3.9 µ !
opt f c
Di q d.
0.36 0.18
3 µ !
opt f c
Di q
where
f
q = fluid flow rate, ft
3
/sec
V = fluid density, lb/ft
3

Q
c
= fluid viscosity, centipoise

opt
Di = optimum inside pipe diameter, inches
48. For laminar flow (N
Re
< 2100) in steel pipe, the optimum inside pipe
diameter is given by
a.
0.45 0.28
3.6 Q !
opt f c
Di q c.
0.487 0.025
Q !
opt f c
Di q
a.
0.36 0.18
3 Q !
opt f c
Di q d.
0.364 0.182
Q !
opt f c
Di q

49. The necessary wall thickness for a metallic storage vessel is a function of the
a. ultimate tensile strength (or yield point) of the material and operating
temperature
b. operating pressure and welding / joint efficiency
c. diameter of the vessel
d. all (a), (b) and (c)
50. Bubble cap plate column is
a. a finite stage contactor
b. used only for distillation, not for absorption
c. a differential stage contactor
d. a continuous contactor
51. The most common standard size of bubble caps used in industrial operation
is
a. 1" diameter cap with 0.5" diameter riser
b. 6" diameter cap with 4" diameter riser
c. 8" diameter cap with 1" diameter riser
d. 4" diameter cap with 8" diameter riser




52. Pick out the wrong statement pertaining to the design of the distillation
column
a. Generally, a skirt clearance of 0.5 to 1.5 is recommended to prevent
plugging of the slots by residue build up.
b. The purpose of the slot is to disperse the gas into the liquid in the form of
small bubbles.
c. If sufficient slot area is not provided, the gas may pass through the skirt
clearance
d. none of these
53. For a given design of bubble cap, the number of bubble caps to be used per
tray is set by the
a. allowable gas velocity through the slots b. plate spacing
c. diameter of the column d. all (a), (b) and (c)
54. Maximum and minimum linear slot velocities (in the distillation column design) as
recommended by Davies are respectively
a. 12/ Q
0.5
and 3.4/ Ǻ
0.5
b.3.4/ Ǻ
0.5
and 12/ Ǻ
0.5

c. 3.4/ Q
0.5
and 12/ Q
0.5
d. 3.4/ Ǻ
0.5
and 12/ Q
0.5

55. Normally, the ratio of the total riser area to the tower cross sectional area
(for bubble cap towers of
diameter more than 3 ft) is around
a. 0.4 - 0.6 b. 0.35 - 0.75
c. 0.1 - 0.2 d. 0.55 - 0.85
56. An adequate clearance between the tray and the shell wall of a distillation
column is provided to
a. drain the liquid from the tray when the unit is not in operation.
b. allow for thermal expansion and facilitate installation
c. avoid back-trapping
d. none of these
57. The function of manholes provided in the shell of a distillation column is to
a. keep a check on the liquid gradient over the plate by direct visual
observation
b. give access to the individual trays for cleaning, maintenance and
installation
c. guard against foaming and entrainment by dumping anti-forming agent
through it.
d. all (a), (b) and (c)
58. Weep holes provided in the plates of a distillation column
a. facilitate draining out liquid from a tray when the unit is not in operation
b. are normally located near the overflow weir so that any delivery of liquid
during operation follow approximately the same path as the overflow fluid
c. must be large enough (usually 1/4 inch to 5/8 inch diameter) to prevent
plugging but should not deliver excessive amount of fluid during operation
d. all (a), (b) and (c).


59. Excessive liquid gradient on a tray may result in
a. maldistribution of gas
b. back trapping
c. gas blowing beneath cap skirt
d. all (a), (b) and (c)
60. The maximum liquid gradient over a tray must not exceed
a. 0.5" - 1.25" b. 2"-3.5"
c. 5" d. half the tray spacing
61. Liquid gradient over the tray results due to
a. the resistance offered to flow of liquids by caps and risers and
the flow of gas.
b. low gas velocity
c. large plate spacing
d. large reflux ratio
62. Liquid gradient over a tray can be minimized by
a. providing a higher skirt clearance or a higher weir
b. decreasing the number of rows of caps through which the liquid flows or
by decreasing the
velocity of liquid flow past the caps or by reducing the distance along the
tray through which the
liquid must flow.
c. using split flow, radial flow or cascade flow for column diameter larger than
4 ft.
d. all (a), (b) and (c).
63. Which of the following factors determine the amount of entrainment in a
distillation column?
a. plate spacing
b. depth of liquid above the bubble cap slots
c. vapor velocity in the volume between the plates
d. all (a), (b) and (c)
64. Larger depth of liquid on the trays of a distillation column
a. lead to high tray efficiency
b. results in higher pressure drop per tray
c. both (a) and (b)
d. neither (a) nor (b)
65. The minimum tray spacing in distillation column of diameter than 3 ft is
normally
a. 6" b. 18" c. 24" d. 34"
66. The minimum plate spacing in most of the petroleum refinery distillation
columns (of diameter 73 ft)
is normally
a. 6" b. 12" c. 18" d. 34"


67. Back-trapping in a distillation column results due to
a. low gas velocity b. high gas velocity
c. excessive liquid gradient over the tray d. low reflux ratio
68. A calming section below the liquid flows into the downcomer is provided to
a. permit release of entrained vapor in the liquid
b. reduce the discharge fluctuation
c. ensure better vapor liquid contract
d. cool the liquid before it flows down.
69. The length of straight rectangular weir used on cross-flow trays is generally
a. 0.6 - 0.8 times the column diameter
b. equal to the column diameter
c. twice the column diameter
d. 2 ft irrespective of column diameter (for column 73 ft diameter)
70. Pick out the wrong statement
a. If sufficient residence time (around 8 seconds) is not provided to the
downcoming liquid in the
downcomer, it may entrain some vapor.
b. The liquid head in the downcomer should not be greater than one half the
plate spacing to avoid
flooding.
c. The discharge end of the downcomer must project far enough into the tray
liquid so that no gas
bubbles can enter the open end and bypass the bubble caps.
d. none of these


INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL

1. What is the Laplace transform of sin t ?
(a) __1__ (b) __s_____
s² + 1 1 + s²
(c) __1 (d) __s_____
s² - 1 s² - 1
2. The transfer function of the first order system is
(a) __1 (b) _1_
Ts + 1 Ts
(c) ___s__ (d) 1/s
Ts + 1
3. Pick out the first order system from among the following
(a) damped vibrator
(b) mercury in glass thermometer kept in boiling water
(c) interacting system of two tanks in series
(d) non-interacting system of two tanks in series

4. Response of a system to a sinusoidal input called
(a) impulse response (b) unit step response
(c) frequency response (d) step response
5. What is the ratio of output amplitude to input amplitude for a sinusoidal
forcing
function in a first order system ?
(a) 1 (b) > 1
(c) < 1 (d) none of these
6. Phase lag of the sinusoidal response of a first order system is
(a) 120º (b) 30º
(c) 180º (d) 90º
7. Conversion formula for converting amplitude ratio (AR) into decibels is
(a) Decibel=20 log10 (AR) (b) Decibel=20 log e(AR)
(c) Decibel=20 log10 (AR)0.5 (d) Decibel = log10 (AR)
8. ƠA control system is unstable if the open loop frequency response exhibits an
amplitude ratio exceeding unity at the cross-over frequency.ơ This is
(a) Bode stability criterion (b) Nyquist criterion
(c) Routh stability criterion (d) both b and c
9. Typical specifications for design stipulates the gain margin and phase margin
to be
respectively
(a) > 1.7 and > 30º (b) < 1.7 and > 30º
(c) < 1.7 and < 30º (d) >1.7 and < 30º
10. The frequency at which maximum amplitude ratio is attained is called
(a) corner frequency (b) resonant frequency
(c) cross-over frequency (d) natural frequency
11. A negative gain margin expressed in decibels means
(a) a stable system (b) unstable system
(c) critically damped system (d) both a and c
12. Bode diagram is a plot of
(a) log (AR) vs. log (f) and Ø vs. log (f)
(b) log (AR) vs. f and log Ø vs. f
(c) AR vs.log (f) and Ø vs. log (f)
(d) log (AR) vs. log f
13. For measuring the temperature of a furnace, which is the most suitable
instrument?
(a) Platinum resistance thermometer (b) Thermocouple
(c) Optical pyrometer (d) Bimetallic thermometer
14. Degree to which an instrument indicates the changes in measured variable
without
dynamic error is called
(a) speed of response (b) reproducibility of instrument
(c) fidelity (d) its static characteristics

15. Which of the following is a desirable characteristic of an instrument?
(a) high drift (b) high fidelity
(c) high temperature lag (d) poor reproducibility
16. Which of the following shows maximum dip affect (indicating reverse
direction of
temperature change)?
(a) mercury thermometer (b) radiation pyrometer
(c) bimetallic thermometer (d) thermocouple
17. Pick out the most suitable instrument for measuring temperature in the
range of -40
to 800ºF.
(a) mercury thermometer (b) bimetallic thermometer
(c) radiation pyrometer (d) radiation pyrometer
18. Thermocouple is suitable for measuring
(a) liquid temperatures only (b) very high temperatures only
(c) very low temperatures only (d) both high and low
temperatures
19. Which of the following relates the absorption and evolution of heat at the
junctions
of a thermocouple to the current flow in the circuit?
(a) Seebeck effect (b) Peltier effect
(c) Joule heating effect (d) Thomson effect
20. Thermal wells are used in temperature measurement to
(a) guard against corrosive and oxidizing action on thermocouple
materials
(b) reduce measuring lag
(c) increase the fidelity
(d) increase the sensitivity
21. Gas analysis is commonly done using
(a) thermal conductivity cell (b) X-ray diffraction
(c) mass spectrometer (d) emission spectrometer
22. Psychrometer determines
(a) humidity of gases (b) moisture content of solids
(c) water of crystallization (d) hygroscopic nature of solids
23. Continuous measurement of moisture content of paper in paper industry is
done by
measuring
(a) thermal conductivity through the paper
(b) electrical resistance through the paper
(c) magnetic susceptibility
(d) both b and c
24. Optimal activity of a solution can be determined using a
(a) polarimeter (b) polarograph
(c) dilatometer (d) refractometer
25. A simple pitot tube measures
(a) average velocity (b) maximum velocity
(c) point velocity (d) static pressure
26. Pirani gauge is used for
(a) measurement of very high pressure (b) measurement of high
vacuum
(c) liquid level under pressure (d) liquid level at atmospheric
pressure
27. A barometer measures
(a) absolute pressure (b) gauge pressure
(c) both absolute and gauge pressure (d) dynamic pressure

28. The level of a liquid under pressure can be determined using
(a) bubbler system (b) differential pressure
manometer
(c) diaphragm box system (d) air-trap system
29. Continuous measurement of specific gravity of a liquid is done by
(a) hydrometer (b) contact-type electric
indicators
(c) displacement meter (d) both a and c
30. Hot wire anemometer is used for the measurement of
(a) flow rates of fluid (b) flow rates of granular solids
(c) very high temperature (d) thermal conductivity of gases
31. Flow rate through an orifice is
(a) proportional to the pressure differential
(b) inversely proportional to the square root of pressure differential
(c) proportional to the square root of pressure differential
(d) inversely proportional to the square root of pressure differential
32. Which of the following flow-metering instruments is an area meter?
(a) venturi meter (b) rotameter
(c) pitot tube (d) hot wire anemometer
33. Continuous measurement of flow rates of dry granular fertilizer is done using
(a) velocity meters (b) area-meters
(c) weighing meters (d) anemometer
34. Pick out the symbol for Ơlocally mounted instrumentơ in instrumentation
diagram
(a) (b) (c) (d)

35. Which is the symbol for Ơpneumatic control valveơ
(a) (b) (c) (d) none of these



36. The symbol for Ơcapillary lineơ in instrumentation diagram is

_

(a) ___ ___ _ ___ _ ___ (b)

(c) _________________ (d) Ǡ Ǡ Ǡ

37. Instrumentation in a plant offers the advantage of
(a) greater safety of operation (b) better quality of product
(c) greater operation economy (d) all a, b and c
38. Dilatometer is used to measure
(a) stress (b) strain
(c) deflection (d) contraction/expansion
due to changes
in temperature
39. Stalagmometer is used for the measurement of
(a) kinematic viscosity (b) surface tension
(c) refractive index (d) optical activity
40. Stroboscope is used for the measurement of
(a) rpm of a flywheel (b) frequency of light
(c) depression of freezing point (d) liquid level under pressure
41. Minute depression of freezing point of a liquid solvent or addition of a solid
solute
can be best measured by
(a) Beckman thermometer (b) dilatometer
(c) mercury thermometer (d) bimetallic thermometer
42. Gain margin is equal to the
(a) amplitude ratio (b) reciprocal of amplitude
ratio
(c) gain in P controller (d) gain in P-I controller
43. Phase margin is equal to
(a) 180º - phase lag (b) phase lag - 180º
(c) phase lag + 180º (d) phase lag - 90º
44. A system with a transfer function __2s _ is of
4s + 1
(a) zero order (b) 1st order
(c) 2nd order (d) 3rd order
45. Bode stability method uses
(a) open loop transfer function (b) closed loop transfer function
(c) either a or b (d) neither a nor b
46. Routh stability method uses
(a) open loop transfer function (b) closed loop transfer function
(c) either a or b (d) neither a nor b



47. Nichelƞs chart deals with
(a) A.R. vs. phase lag of first order
(b) A.R. vs. phase lag of second order
(c) closed loop values vs. open loop value
(d) frequency response values of controllers
48. The fluid used in hydraulic controller is
(a) water (b) steam
(c) air (d) oil
49. Number of poles in a system with transfer function ________1______ is
s² + 2s² + 1
(a) 2 (b) 5
(c) 3 (d) 1
50. Which of the following controllers has maximum offset?
(a) P-controller (b) P-I controller
(c) P-D controller (d) P-I-D controller
51. Process degrees of freedom
(a) indicates the maximum number of controller to be used

(b) indicates the minimum number of controller to be used
(c) determines both maximum and minimum number of controllers to be
used
(d) gives no idea of controllers
52. Resistance of a gas in a vessel is
(a) __V__ (b) nRT
nRT V
(c) nRT (d) __P_
P nRT
Where: P =pressure V= volume of the vessel
n= number of moles of the gas R= gas constant
52. In an exothermic chemical reactor, the manipulated variable is the flow rate
of
(a) coolant (b) reactant
(c) product (d) hot fluid
53. Use of I-control along with P-control facilitates
(a) elimination of offset (b) reduction of offset
(c) reduction of stability time (d) both b and c
54. Which of the following error integral is considered as the best criterion in
controller settings?
(a) œ
’
| e | dt (b) œ
’
| e | dt

0 0
(c) œ
’
e
2
dt (d) both a and b

0




55. Cascade control means
(a) feed forward control (b) more than one feed-back loop
(c) on-off control (d) one feed-back loop
56. Which of the following controllers has the least maximum deviation?
(a) P-controller (b) P-I controller
(c) P-I-D controller (d) P-D controller
57. Measurement of pressure in ammonia reactor is done by
(a) Bourdon gauge (b) U-tube manometer
(c) Inclined tube manometer (d) Pirani gauge
58. Pressure of 0.01 psi (absolute) can be measured by
(a) Ionization gauge (b) Pirani gauge
(c) Mcleoid gauge (d) Bourdon gauge
59. Continuous measurement of moisture in paper is done by
(a) sling psychrometer
(b) hair-hygrometer
(c) weighing
(d) high resistance, Wheatstoneƍs bridge circuit
60. Pressure of 0.0001 absolute psi can be measured by
(a) Meloid gauge (b) Pirani gauge
(c) Thermocouple gauge (d) Bourdon gauge
61. E.m.f. generated by thermocouples is of the order of
(a) millivolts (b) microvolts
(c) volts (d) bi-metallic thermometer
62. Measurement of sub-zero Celsius temperature in industry is done by
(a) thermocouples (b) resistance thermometers
(c) gas thermometer (d) bi-metallic thermometer
63. Starting temperature of optical radiation pyrometer is
(a) 800ºC (b) 400ºC
(c) 1200ºC (d) 1500ºC
64. Which thermocouple can be used to measure temperature around 1400ºC?
(a) copper-constantan (b) aluminum-chromel
(c) platinum-platinum+rhodium (d) copper-aluminum
65. pH meter has
(a) one cell (b) two cells
(c) three cells (d) no cell
66. Maximum differential pressure in liquid manometer is
(a) 20 psi (b) 30 psi
(c) 40 psi (d) 50 psi
67. Interfacial level in pressure vessel is measured by
(a) float (b) manometers of float type
(c) U-tube manometer (d) Bourdon gauge



68. Flow rate of sludge is measured by
(a) V-notch (b) rectangular notch
(c) circular pipe (d) Kennison nozzle
69. Composition of natural gas can be determined by
(a) chromatograph (b) orsat apparatus
(c) spectrometer (d) photometer
70. Bellows are made of
(a) leather (b) paper
(c) plastic (d) thin copper
71. Flapper nozzle is a
(a) pneumatic controller (b) hydraulic controller
(c) electronic controller (d) both a and b
72. Weir valve is used for
(a) slurries (b) acids
(c) neutral solutions (d) bases
73. Valve used to supply oil to burner is
(a) gate valve (b) butterfly valve
(c) rotary plug valve (d) both a and b
74. Mode used for transmitting signal for one kilometer distance is
(a) hydraulic (b) pneumatic
(c) electronic (d) all a, b and c
75. Use of pilot in transmission (pneumatic) is to
(a) speed up signal (b) change the flow of air
(c) adjust the signal (d) all a, b and c
76. Final control element is a
(a) valve (b) switch
(c) signal (d) both a and b
77. Example of a second order instrument is a
(a) mercury-glass thermometer with covering
(b) bare mercury-glass thermometer
(c) pressure gauge
(d) Bourdon gauge
78. Offset
(a) varies with time (b) varies exponentially with time
(c) does not vary with time (d) varies as square of the time
79. Regulator problem means that
(a) set point is constant (b) load is constant
(c) both set point and load are constant (d) neither set point nor load is
constant
80. Servo problem means that
(a) set point is constant (b) load is constant
(c) both a and b (d) neither a nor b


81. Critically damped system means that the damping coefficient is
(a) 1 (b) < 1
(c) > 1 (d) 0
82. In Bode stability criterion, amplitude ratio at 180º should be
(a) 1 (b) < 1
(c) > 1 (d) 0
83. Phase plane method is used for
(a) linear-behavior (b) non-linear behavior
(c) both a and b (d) neither a nor b
84. Laplace transform method is used for
(a) linear behavior (b) non-linear behavior
(c) both a and b (d) neither a nor b
85. Phase lag of first order system is
(a) tan
-1
( Ȃ T) (b) tan
-1
( Ȃ T)
(c) T/2 (d) 0
86. P-I controller as compared to P-controller has a
(a) higher maximum deviation (b) longer response time
(c) longer period of oscillation (d) all a, b and c
87. Difference at any instant between the value of controlled variable and the
set point is
called
(a) deviation (b) derivative time
(c) error ratio (d) differential gap
88. The time difference by which the output of a P-D controller leads the input
when the input changes linearly with time is called
(a) error ratio (b) derivative time
(c) proportional sensitivity (d) gain
89. Steady state deviation resulting from a change in the value of the load
variable is called
(a) offset (b) error ratio
(c) deviation (d) static ratio
90. Time required for the output of a first order system to change from a given
value to within 36.8% of the final value when a step change of input is made is
called
(a) time constant (b) settling time
(c) rise time (d) derivative time
91. A controller action in which there is a continuous linear relation between
value of the controlled variable and rate of change of controlled output signal is
called
(a) proportional action (b) integral action
(c) derivative action (d) proportional-integral action


92. A controller action in which there is a continuous relation between value of
the controlled variable and the value of the output signal of the controller is
called
(a) proportional action (b) derivative action
(c) integral action (d) proportional-derivative action
93. Steady state ratio of the change of proportional controller output variable
and the
change in actuating signal is called
(a) proportional sensitivity (b) reset rate
(c) rangeability (d) integral action
94. In case of flow measurement by an orifice, the pressure difference signal is
proportional to
(a) Q² (b) Q
(c) Q
3
(d) 1 /ƹQ
where Q= volumetric flow rate
95. Thermistor is a
(a) semiconductor whose resistance decreases with temperature
rise
(b) metal whose resistance increases linearly with temperature rise
(c) metal whose resistance does not vary with temperature
(d) device for measuring nuclear radiation
96. Which of the following factors does not influence measurement accuracy?
(a) static and dynamic error (b) reproducibility
(c) dead zone (d) none of these
97. Which of the following is suitable for measuring the temperature of a red
hot moving object
(e.g. steel ingots on roller table) ?
(a) thermocouple (b) radiation pyrometer
(c) thermistor (d) radiograph
98. Thermocouples
(a) have very slow speed of response
(b) canƞt be connected to the measuring instrument remotely located
(c) need cold junction compensation
(d) are much less accurate compared to bimetallic or vapor pressure
thermometer
99. Selection of material for thermocouple depends on the
(a) depth of immersion in the hot fluid
(b) minimum and maximum temperature
(c) pressure and velocity condition of the fluid whose temperature is to be
measured
(d) both a and b



100. Radiation pyrometers
(a) have very low speed of response
(b) need not Ơseeơ the temperature source; it is measuring
(c) canƞt measure temperature of objects without making physical contact
(d) none of these
101. V-notch is used to measure flow rate of a liquid in
(a) an open channel (b) a non-circular cross-section closed
channel
(c) vertical pipeline (d) horizontal pipeline
102. Which of the following is not a head flowmeter?
(a) segmental orifice plate (b) pitot tube
(c) rotameter (d) flow nozzle
103. Flow rate of a liquid containing heavy solids (e.g. sand) can be best
measured by
(a) pitot tube (b) concentric orifice
(c) eccentric orifice (d) rotameter
104. Orifice plates for flow measurement
(a) incurs very low permanent pressure loss
(b) has poor accuracy on high orifice ratios (above 0.75)
(c) canƞt be easily interchanged
(d) is best for very large liquid flows and big pipelines
105. Pitot tube is used
(a) for highly accurate flow measurement
(b) when the fluid contains lot of suspended material
(c) when the line is large and the velocity is high
(d) both a and c
106. In an area meter (e.g. rotameter), the flow rate is
(a) proportional to the square root of the differential pressure

(b) inferred from the change in area of an orifice in the flow line
across which the pressure differential is constant zero
(c) inferred from change in flow cross-section across which the pressure
differential is zero
(d) all a, b and c
107. A rotameter
(a) incurs constant and small permanent pressure drop
(b) incurs constant but very large permanent pressure drop
(c) is inaccurate for low flow rates
(d) need not be mounted always vertically





108. On-off control
(a) fully opens the final control element when the measured variable is
below the set point
(b) fully closes the final control element when the measured variable is
above the set point
(c) is a two position (fully open or fully closed) control adequate to
control a process with slow reaction rate and minimum dead time
or transfer lag
(d) all a, b, and c
109. Floating control action
(a) moves the final control element at constant speed in either
direction in
response to an error signal
(b) changes the position of the final control element from on to off
(c) is used to counteract rapid load changes
(d) both b and c
110. Cascade control is
(a) the continuous adjustment of the set point index of an automatic
control loop by a primary (master) controller
(b) used when changes in process conditions cause serious upsets
in controlled variable
(c) useful to control flow from temperature
(d) all a, b and c



MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION

1. Bog iron is used for adsorption of H
2
S from coke oven gas is
a. an intimate mixture of saw dust and iron dust (i.e. moist ferric
hydroxide)
b. iron impregnated with resin (usually bakelite)
c. carbon free iron
d. none of these
2. Iron alloyed with carbon up to 2% is called
a. pig iron b. wrought iron
c. high carbon steel d. none of these
3. The softest material in Mhoƞs scale (for measuring hardness) is
a. talc b. gypsum
c. rubber d. none of these




4. Karbate is
a. a mixture of iron dust and saw dust
b. carbon impregnated with resin (usually bakelite)
c. acid resistant material
d. both (b) and (c).
5. Duralumin is an alloy of
a. aluminum, copper and manganese
b .aluminum, nickel and silicon
c. aluminum and nickel
d. none of these
6. Corrosion resistance of steel is increased by the addition of
a. phosphorus and tungsten
b. nickel and chromium
c. lead and vanadium
d. molybdenum and tungsten
7. White metal is an alloy of
a. lead, tin and cadmium b. copper, tin and zinc
c. copper and lead d. none of these
8. Presence of cobalt in steel improve its
a. cutting ability b. corrosion resistance
c. tensile strength d. none of these
9. The impure iron (Pig iron) that is taped out from blast furnace contains
about
a. 0.2% carbon b. 2% carbon
c. 4% carbon d. 8% carbon
10. Carbon content in steel is
a. 0.1 Ɗ 2% b. 4 ƛ 6%
c. 5- 10% d. 0
11. An ideal material of construction for the storage of 50% caustic soda
solution would be
a. Karbate b. high silica cast iron
c. monel d. none of these
12. For storing water and acid free benzol, use
a. steel vessel b. karbate vessel
c. stainless steel vessel d. none of these
13. Brine (15% concentration) can be stored in a vessel made of
a. monel b. karbate
c. cast iron d. none of these
14. Most suitable material of construction for the storage of concentrated
nitric acid is
a. cast iron
b. monel
c. karbate
d. aluminum or chromium alloys (Cr > 18% for cold acid).
15. Babbit metal (used for making bearings) comprises
a. mainly tin (85%) and lead
b. saw dust and iron dust mixture
c. zinc and aluminum
d. copper and aluminum
16. The material of construction of pressure mills used for squeezing out the
juice from sugar cane is
a. stainless steel b. cast iron
c. mild steel d. monel.
17. Chlorination of benzene is done to produce benzene hexachloride (a
pesticide) in a photochemical reactor lined with
a. karbate b. lead or glass
c. fire clay bricks d. PVC
18. Polymerization reactor used for the production of styrenebutadiene rubber
(SBR) is made of
a. vessel b. stainless steel or glass lined vessel
c. karbate d. wrought iron
19. Which of the following is the most suitable material of construction for
evaporator and its tubes for concentrating NaOH solution to 70%?
a. cast iron b. steel
c. nickel d. karbate
20. Most common stainless steel type 316, which it highly resistant to
corrosion contains
a. 16 Ɗ 13% chromium, 10 Ɗ14% nickel and 2 Ɗ 3%
molybdenum
b. 20 ƛ 22% chromium, and 8 ƛ10% nickel
c. 2 ƛ 4% chromium, 22% nickel and 2 ƛ 4% molybdenum
d. none of these
21. Caustic soda can be stored in
a. steel drums b. cast iron drums
c. brass drums d. gun metal drums
22. Brass is an alloy of
a. nickel and tin b. copper and zinc
c. tin and lead d. copper, nickel and zinc
23. The carbonating tower used in Solvay Process of soda ash manufacture is
made of
a. cast iron b. stainless steel
c. karbate d. lead lined steel
24. Gun metal is an alloy of
a. nickel, tin and copper
b. copper, tin and zinc
c. copper, phosphorus and nickel
d. manganese, phosphorus and nickel

25. Marcy ball mills are usually made of
a. steel b. cast iron
c. stainless steel d. bronze
26. Bronze is an alloy of
a. lead and copper b. copper and tin
c. nickel and copper d. copper and zinc
27. Rotary kilns in cement industry are lined with
a. fire clay b. silica
c. lead d. high alumina and high magnesia
bricks
28. In the Kraft (sulfate) process for the paper manufacture the digester is
made of
a. cast iron b. stainless steel
c. karbate carbon d. wrought iron
29. Dry chlorine can be handled in a vessel made of
a. iron or steel b. PVC
c. nickel d. brass
30. Tank furnace used for melting of glass is made of
a. mild steel b. cast iron
c. refractory blocks d. stainless steel
31. Stainless steel contains
a. chromium and nickel b. copper
c. aluminum d. vanadium
32. Caustic soda is reduced in a mercury cell having anode and cathode made
respectively of
a. moving mercury and graphite
b. graphite and moving mercury
c. moving mercury and carbon
d. moving mercury and crimped steel wire
33. Monel metal is an alloy of
a. molybdenum and nickel
b. nickel and copper
c. molybdenum and aluminum
d. molybdenum and zinc
34. German silver is an alloy of
a. copper, nickel and zinc
b. copper, aluminum and silver
c. silver, zinc and aluminum
d. silver, nickel and zinc
35. Chromel (Nichrome) is an alloy of
a. chromium and molybdenum
b. nickel and chromium
c. molybdenum and nickel
d. chromium and aluminum
36. Urea autoclave is made of
a. cast iron b. refractory blocks
c. stainless steel d. lead lined steel
37. Steel tower used for storage of oleum
a. is lined with lead b. need not be lined
c. is lined with rubber d. is lined with acid-proof bricks
38. Hydrochloric acid is stored in
a. lead lined steel vessel b. rubber-lined steel vessel
c. stainless steel vessel d. cast iron vessel
39. Photographic plates are coated in
a. silver nitrate b. silver halide
c. calcium silicate d. metallic silver
40. Aqueous nitric acid is stored in
a. steel drum
b. stainless steel vessel
c. cast iron vessel lined with acid-proof masonry brick
d. cast iron vessel
41. SO
3
is absorbed using H
2
SO
4
in
a. cast iron packed tower
b. stainless steel plate tower
c. packed steel tower lined with acid proof bricks
d. none of these
42. Hydrochloric acid absorber is made of
a. cast iron b. mild steel
c. karbate d. stainless steel
43. Sulfuric acid is mixed with ground phosphate rock (to produce phosphoric
acid) in a steel digester lined with
a. acidic refractory b. rubber
c. karbate d. lead or acid-proof bricks
44. Fill up the blanks from among the following alternatives:
Hydrochloric acid is _______ corrosive to common metals
a. least b. not
c. mildly d. highly
45. In SO
3
absorber (Contact Process), packing material used is of
a. cast iron b. chemical stoneware
c. karbate d. mild steel
46. Valves in pipe sizes of 2ơ and under are normally made of
a. wrought iron b. brass
c. bronze d. monel
47. Acid proof stoneware
a. has very low strength
b. cannot be heated
c. is broken by small temperature changes
d. all (a), (b) and (c)
48. Duriron is
a. acid resistant, brittle and very hard
b. high silicon iron
c. prone to breakage due to thermal expansion because of very high co-
efficient of thermal expansion.
d. all (a), (b) and (c)
49. Lead pipe is
a. especially resistant to solutions containing H2SO4
b. usually joined by burning (e.g. by melting to adjacent pieces with a
torch)
c. having very low elastic limit resulting in permanent deformation from
either mechanical or thermal strain
d. all (a), (b) and (c)
50. The most resistant material to alkaline corrosion is
a. duriron b. nickel
c. aluminum d. karbate
51. Presence of nickel in steel improves its
a. corrosion resistance b. cutting ability
c. wear resistance d. all (a), (b) and (c)
52. An alloy of iron containing 4% carbon is called
a. high carbon steel b. wrought iron
c. mild steel d. none of these
53. Bell metal is an alloy of
a. copper and zinc b. copper and tin
c. copper and nickel d. zinc and tin
54. Inconel is an alloy of
a. tin, zinc and nickel b. iron, nickel and chromium
c. copper and nickel d. zinc and tin
55. Hastelloy comprises
a. copper and tin b. copper and nickel
c. molybdenum and nickel d. lead and tin
56. Ability of a material to absorb energy in deformation in the plastic range is
characterized as its
a. ductility b. toughness
c. creep d. resilience
57. Slow and progressive deformation of a material with time under constant
stress is called
a. creep b. erosion
c. resilience d. none of these
58. Wrought iron is
a. high carbon iron
b. highly resistance to acid corrosion
c .malleable and ductile; hence used for chain links, hooks and couplings
d. an alloy of iron, chromium and carbon


59. Which of the following constituents of cast iron is mainly responsible for
imparting it an anti-corrosive property?
a. silicon b. phosphorus
c. sulfur d. none of these
60. Mild steel is
a. a low carbon steel (0.05 Ɗ 0.3% carbon)
b. highly resistance to corrosion (as much as stainless steel)
c. a high carbon steel (0.5 ƛ 1.5% carbon)
d. very poor in strength and ductility
61. Presence of manganese in alloy steel improves its
a. corrosion resistance
b. cutting ability
c. abrasion resistance and toughness
d. elasticity and creep resistance
62. H
2
SO
4
(<50% concentration) is corrosive to
a. aluminum, mild steel, stainless steel, concrete and tin
b. copper, cast iron and high silicon iron (14% Si)
c. rubber (butyl and hard) silicon rubber and teflon
d. glass, graphite, porcelain and stoneware
63. Aluminum storage vessel can be used to store
a. aqua regia b. ferrous sulfate
c. hydrochloric acid (10%) d. none of these
64. Brass container is suitable for storing
a. aqueous ammonia b. beer
c. H
2
SO
4
(95% concentration) d. phosphoric acid (95%)
65. Cast iron vessels are not suitable for the storage of
a. Freon b. H
2
SO
4
(95%) at room temperature
c. H
2
SO
4
(fuming) d. Wet SO
2

66. Out of the following, copper vessels are most suitable for the storage of
a. bromine
b. dry chlorine and dry fluorine
c. nitric acid (95% and fuming)
d. phosphoric acid (95%) and sulfuric acid (95% and fuming)
67. Gun metal and bronze are not corroded by the action of
a. wet chlorine b. synthetic detergent
solution
c. hydrochloric acid (10%) d. nitric acid (<25%)





68. Containers made of high silicon cast iron (14% Si) are not suitable for the
storage of
a. acetic acid
b. benzoic and boric acids
c. phosphoric acid (95%) and sulfuric acid (95%)
d. hydrochloric acid (concentrated)
69. Lead lined equipments and vessels are suitable for handling
a. hydrochloric acid (10%) b. nitric acid
c. sulfuric acid up to 60ĨC d. all (a), (b) and (c)
70. Mild steel storage vessels are suitable for the storage of
a. anhydrous ammonia b. fatty acids
c. hydrochloric acid (95%) d. sulfuric acid (25%)
71. Nickel made clad equipments are suitable for handling
a. ammonia (both aqueous and anhydrous)
b. fruit juices, milk and its products and caustic soda solution
c. nitric acid and hydrochloric acid (concentrated)
d. sulfuric acid (concentrated)
72. Platinum and silver are corroded by
a. caustic soda solution b. phosphoric acid
c. sulfuric acid (10%) d. none of these
73. 18-8 stainless steel means that it contains
a. 18% chromium and 8% nickel
b. 18% chromium and 8% molybdenum
c. 18% nickel and 8% chromium
d. 18% molybdenum and 8% chromium
74. Stainless steel is not corroded by
a. hydrochloric acid (10%) b. nitric acid (10%)
c. sulfuric acid (10%) d. saturated brine
75. Tin vessels are corroded by
a. anhydrous ammonia b. aromatic solvents
c. synthetic detergent solution d. none of these
76. Rubber lined vessels are corroded by the action of
a. aqua regia b. chloroform
c. sulfuric acid (95%) d. all (a), (b) and (c)
77. Silicon rubber is not resistant to the corrosive action of
a. sulfuric acid (10%) b. sulfuric acid (95%)
c. ether d. both (b) and (c)
78. Perspex is nothing but
a. acrylic sheet b. an elastomer
c. an alloy of lead and tin d. aluminum foil clad with bakelite
79. Teflon is corroded by
a. hydrochloric acid (10%) b. hydrochloric acid (95%)
c. sulfuric acid d. none of these

80. Polythene (low or high density) containers are not corroded by
a. sulfuric acid (10%) at room temperature
b. nitric acid (95%) at room temperature
c. sulfur trioxide at 60ĭC
d. any of these
81. The most commonly used resin for making reinforced plastic is
a. unsaturated polyester b. polyproplylene
c. polyurethane d. nylon ƛ 6
82. Carbon tetrachloride can be stored in a storage vessel made of
a. high silicon iron (14%) b. tin
c. stainless steel d. all (a), (b) and (c)
83. Concrete tank can be used to store
a. alum b. sulfuric acid
c. sulfuric acid d. saturated brine
84. Glass is corroded by
a. fluorine (dry or wet) b. sulfuric water
c. phosphoric acid d. none these
85. Graphite is corroded by
a. sulfuric acid (10%) b. sea Water
b. hydrochloric acid d. none of these
86. Wood is corroded by
a. hydrochloric acid b. SO
2
(dry or wet)
c. chlorine (dry or wet) d. all (a), (b) and (c)
87. The 'bomb' in the bomb calorimeter is made of
a. molybdenum stainless steel b. mild steel
c. high silicon iron (14% Si) d. copper
88. Most suitable material for high pressure vessel operating at 500 atm and
500ºC is
a. molybdenum stainless steel b. 18-8 stainless steel
c. mild steel d. high silicon iron (14% Si)
89. Centrifugal pump made of pyrex or glass can't be used to pump
a. mild and fruit juices b. alkaline solutions
c. dilute H
2
SO
4
at room temperature

d. brine
90. Rubber lined pumps can be used to pump
a. caustic soda b. chlorinated brine
c. hypochlorous acid d. all (a), (b) and (c)
91. Copper is dissolved from its ore by H
2
SO
4
in percolation tanks made of
a. wood b. stainless steel
c. reinforced concrete lined with lead d. high silicon iron (14% Si)
92. Rotary dryers are generally made of
a. cast iron b. mild steel
c. high silicon iron (14% Si) d. tin lined with refractory bricks


93. Kel-F is
a. nothing but polycholorotrifluroethylene
b. having excellent chemical and high temperature resistance (up to
200ºC)
c. an elastomer
d. all (a), (b) and (c)
94. Zircaloy used as a fuel cladding material in a nuclear reactor (thermal) is an
alloy of zirconium
a. tin, nickel, iron and chromium b. and graphite
c. and copper d. none of these
95. Which of the following would not be a suitable material of construction for
handling aqueous
hydrofluoric acid (HF) at 100ºC?
a. none b. stainless steel
c. graphite d. Kel-F and Teflon
96. Specify the materials of construction suitable for handling concentrated
HNO
3
at 100ºC.
a. high silicon iron, Kel-F and Teflon b. silicon rubber
c. tin and wood d. stainless steel
97. Concentrated HCl at 30ºC can be stored in a vessel made of
a. PTFE and porcelain
b. cast iron and aluminum
c. stainless steel and high silicon cast iron
d. copper, nickel and monel
98. Which of the following material of construction may be recommended by a
chemical engineer
for handling a gaseous chlorine (dry or wet) stream in a fluid flow system?
a. High silicon iron, silicone rubber, Kel-F and teflon
b. Mild steel and stainless steel
c. Cast iron, tin and aluminum
d. Copper, nickel and monel
99. Which of the following materials may prove unsuitable for handling acetic
(glacial and
anhydrous) at 40ºC?
a. silicone rubber, teflon, porcelain and wood
b. nickel, monel, stainless steel and graphite
c. aluminum, copper, high silicon iron
d. brass, cast iron, mild steel and tin
100. 100% H
2
SO4 at 30ºC can't be used and stored in a vessel made/ lined with
a. cast iron and high silicon iron b. mild steel and stainless steel
c. aluminum, tin and rubber d. teflon, glass and porcelain



ENGINEERING ECONOMY


1. The following cost item which in common both the fixed and operating cost of
an enterprise is:
a. interest b. depreciation
c. taxes d. supplies
2. The length of time, usually in years for the cumulative net annual profit to
equal the investment is called:
a. receivable turnover b. return of investment
c. price earning ratio d. payback period
3. The reduction in value and marketability due to competition from newest
products / model
a. depreciated cost b. fixed cost
c. indirect cost d. obsolescence
4. Form of summary of assets, liabilities and net worth
a. production b. break even point
c. balance method d. balance sheet
5. The worth of property which is equal to the original cost less depreciation.
a. earning value b. scrap value
c. book value d. face value
6. The type of interest that is periodically added to the amount of loan so that
subsequent interest is based on the cumulative amount.
a. compound interest b. simple interest
c. interest rate d. sinking fund
7. Output or sales at which income is insufficient to equal operating cost
a. break even point b. investment
c. depreciation d. cash flow
8. The price at which a given product will be supplied and purchased is the price
that will result in the supply and the demand being equal.
a. law of demand and supply b. law of diminishing returns
c. present worth method d. obsolescence
9. An estimate of an assets' net market value at the end of its estimated life.
a. break even point b. cash flow
c. interest d. book value
10. An estimate of an assets' net market value at the end if its estimated life.
a. book value c. salvage value
c. depreciation d. cash flow
11. A lessening of the value of an asset due to a decrease in the quantity
available as a coal, oil and timber in forests.
a. depletion b. depreciation
c. amortization d. investment


12. A certificate of indebtedness of a corporation usually for a period of net loss
that ten years and guaranteed by a mortgage on certain assets of the
corporation or its subsidiaries.
a. appraisal b. bond
c. written contract d. equity capital
13. Funds supplied and used by owners of an enterprise in the expectation that
profit will be earned.
a. equity capital b. investment
c. working capital d. present
14. Funds supplied by others on which a fixed rate of interest must be paid and
the debt be repaid at a specific place and time
a. discount b. cash flow
c. working capital d. borrowed capital
15. The quantity of a certain commodity that is offered for sale at a certain price
at a given place and time
a. supply b. demand
c. discount d. investment
16. The quantity of a certain commodity that is bought at a certain price at a
given place and time.
a. supply b. demand
c. discount d. investment
17. A condition where only few individuals produce a certain product that action
of one will lead to almost the same action by the other.
a. monopoly b. oligopoly
c. semi monopoly d. perfect competition
18. Is the simplest form of business organization
a. sole proprietorship b. enterprise
c. partnership d. corporation
19. An association of two or more persons for a purpose of engaging in a
profitable business
a. sole proprietorship b. enterprise
c. partnership d. corporation
20. A distinct legal entity which can practically transact any business transaction
which a real person could do.
a. sole proprietorship b. enterprise
c. partnership d. corporation
21. An increase in the value of capital asset is called
a. profit b. capital gain
c. capital expenditure d. capital stock
22. The reduction in the money value of a capital asset is called
a. capital expenditure b. capital loss
c. loss d. deficit


23. The difference between sales revenue and the cost of goods sold
a. net income b. gross profit
c. rate of return d. gross national product
24. A currency traded in a foreign exchange market for which the demand is
consistently high in relation to its supply
a. money market b. hard currency
c. treasury bill d. certificate of deposit
25. Defined as the certificate of indebtedness of a corporation usually for a period
not less than 10 years and guaranteed by a mortgage on certain assets of a
corporation
a. bonds b. T-bills
c. stock d. all of these
26. It is a negotiable claim issued by a bank in lieu of a term deposit
a. time deposit b. bond
c. capital gain d. certificate of deposit
27. The amount of a company's profit that the board of directors of the
corporation decides to distribute to ordinary shareholders
a. dividend b. return
c. share stock d. par value
28. a document that shows proof of legal ownership of a financial security
a. bond b. bank note
c. coupon d. check
29. The process determining the value of certain properties for definite reasons
a. valuation b. appraisal
c. estimate d. both a and b
30. Represent ownership and enjoys certain preferences than ordinary stock
a. authorized capital stock b. preferred stock
c. common stock d. incorporatorƞs stock
31. It is the difference between present worth and the worth of the paper at
some time in the future
a. discount b. amortization
c. depletion d. investment
32. The value which is usually determined by the disinterested third party in
order to establish a price that is fair to both seller and buyer.
a. fair value b. market value
c. salvage value d. book value
33. The price that can be obtained from the sale of property or second hand
a. book value b. salvage value
c. fair value d. market value
34. The process of determining the value of certain property for specific reasons
a. amortization b. appraisal
c. investment d. depreciation


35. A bond whereby the security behind it are the equipments of the issuing
corporation
a. debenture bond b. lien bond
c. collateral bond d. mortgage bond
36. An annuity where the payment period extends forever or in which the
periodic payment continue indefinitely.
a. ordinary annuity b. deferred annuity
c. annuity due d. perpetuity
37. It is the span of life of an equipment during which it produces the product it
is designed to produce at a profit
a. write off period b. physical life
c. economic life d. perpetual life
38. It is a depreciation method whereby the decrease in value of the unit is
constant each year
a. Matheson formula b. Straight line method
c. SYD method d. Sinking fund method
39. It is a distinct legal entity separate from the individual who own it and which
can engage in practically any business transaction which a real person can
do.
a. sole proprietorship b. partnership
c. corporation d. all of the above
40. These are costs which remain relatively constant regardless of any change in
operation or policy which is made.
a. fixed cost b. increment cost
c. variable cost d. differential cost
41. The length of time at which the original cost of capital used to purchase a
unit have already been recovered.
a. economic life b. write off period
c. physical life d. salvage life
42. The actual interest earned by a given principal is known as:
a. compound interest b. nominal interest
c. simple interest d. effective interest
43. The exclusive right of a company to provide a specific product / services in a
given region of the country.
a. franchise b. branch
c. extension d. outlet
44. It occurs when a commodity or service is supplied by a number of vendors
and there is nothing to prevent additional vendors entering the market
a. free market b. perfect competition
c. open market d. law of supply and demand
45. In making economy studies, a minimum required profit on the invested
capital is included as a cost.
a. rate of return b. annual cost pattern
c. present worth pattern d. capital cost
46. Depreciation method where the value of an asset decreases at a decreasing
rate.
a. SYD method b. sinking fund
c. straight line method d. declining balance
47. Cost of things that are neither labor nor materials
a. construction cost b. expenses
c. labor cost d. investment
48. Kind of obligation which has no condition attached
a. analytic b. gratuitous
c. private d. pure
49. Gross, profit, sales less cost of goods sold as a percentage of sale is called
a. profit margin b. gross margin
c. ROI (rate of return) d. price earnings
50. The series of equal payments at equal intervals of time
a. interest b. depreciation
c. annuity d. amortization
51. A legally binding agreement on promise to exchange goods or services
a. contract b. barter
c. memorandum d. pro-forma
52. An index of short term paying ability is called
a. current ratio b. receivable turnover
c. acid test ratio d. profit margin ratio
53. Used to produce consumer goods
a. producer goods b. supply
c. consumer goods d. cash flow
54. It is a series of equal payments occurring at equal interval of time where the
first payment is made several periods after the beginning of the payment
a. deferred annuity b. delayed annuity
c. progressive annuity d. simple annuity
55. A market whereby there is only one buyer of an item for which there are no
goods substitute
a. monopoly b. monopsony
c. oligopoly d. oligopsony
56. The amount of a property in which a willing buyer will pay to a willing seller
for the property when neither one is under the compulsion to buy or sell
a. fair value b. goodwill value
c. book value d. market value
57. A type of annuity where the payments are made at the start of each period,
beginning from the first period
a. ordinary annuity b. annuity due
c. deferred annuity d. perpetuity


58. A method of computing depreciation in which the annual charge is a fixed
percentage of the depreciated book value at the beginning of the year to
which the depreciation applies
a. straight line b. sinking fund method
c. SYD method d. declining balance method
59. The cumulative effect of elapsed time on the money value of an event based
on the earning power of equivalent invested funds capital should or will earn
a. present worth factor b. interest rate
c. time value of money d. yield
60. Double taxation is a disadvantage of which business organization?
a. sole proprietorship b. partnership
c. corporation d. enterprise
61. The function of interest rate and time that determines the cumulative amount
of a sinking fund resulting from specific periodic deposits
a. sinking fund factor b. present worth factor
c. capacity factor d. demand factor
62. The intangible item of value from the exclusive right of the company to
provide a specific product or service in a stated region of the country
a. market value b. book value
c. goodwill value d. franchise value
63. The length of time during which it is capable of performing the function for
which it was designed and manufactured.
a. economic life b. business life
c. insular life d. physical life
64. Products that are directly used by people to satisfy their wants.
a. supply b. consumer goods
c. producer goods d. cash flows
65. A change in cost for a small change in volume of production.
a. fixed cost b. sunk cost
c. first cost d. differential cost
66. An amount which has been spent and for some reasons cannot be recovered.
a. sunk cost b. first cost
c. increment d. fixed cost
67. The difference between the book value and the actual lower resale value is
a. salvage value b. resale value
c. sunk cost d. fixed cost
68. It occurs when a unique product or service is available only from a single
supplier and entry of all other possible suppliers presented.
a. competition b. monopoly
c. inventory d. profitability
69. A place where buyer and seller come together
a. market b. shop
c. department store d. parlor

70. Ratio of annual net profit and the capital invested
a. proportion b. rate of return
c. load factor d. use factor
71. The price of which a willing buyer will pay to a willing seller for a commodity
a. resale value b. market value
c. book value d. scrap value
72. The price of property when sold for a junk
a. scrap value b. book value
c. resale value d. market value
73. An interest earning fund in which equal deposits are made at equal intervals
of time
a. annuity b. sinking fund
c. interest d. investment
74. A term describing wealth which is placed in a business and could include cash
equipment, raw materials and finished products
a. capital b. investment
c. collateral d. assets
75. The first cost of any property includes
a. the original purchase price and freight and transportation charges
b. installation expenses
c. initial taxes and permits' fee
d. all of the above


ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY

1. The hydrogen or deuterium discharge tube can be used as a source of continuous
ultraviolet radiation for spectrophotometers because of
a. the characteristics of chopper-modulated radiation
b. pressure broadening of hydrogen or deuterium emission lines
c. the great sensitivity of photomultiplier tube
d. the narrow band pass of modern grating of monochromators
2. Chopping the source beam in conjunction with the use of a tuned ac amplifier in an
atomic absorption spectrophotometer accomplishes the following
a. a recording potentiometer can be used instead of a voltmeter for the readout
b. a less sensitive detector can be used instead of the usual photomultiplier tube
c. a cooler can be used without decreasing the population of ground-state atoms
d. radiation emitted by excited atoms in the flame will not interfere with the absorbance
measurement
3. Line spectra are emitted by
a. hot solids
b. excited polyatomic molecules
c. molecules in the ground electronic state
d. excited atoms and monatomic ions
4. Recording spectrophotometers sometimes operate with feedback loops that vary the
power of the reference beam until it matches the power of the beam through the sample.
This mode of operation
a. eliminates the need for a continuous source
b. requires two monochromators
c. eliminates the need for nonabsorbing solvents
d. makes the detector a null device, with the result that nonlinear response to radiant
power would not be deleterious
5. Which of the following best explains why atomic absorption is sometimes more
sensitive than flame emission spectroscopy?
a. At the temperature of a typical flame, the population of ground-state atoms is much
greater than the population of excited atoms.
b. Detectors employed in absorption work are inherently more sensitive than those
used to measure emission.
c. Hollow cathode discharge tubes have a much greater radiant power output than do
ordinary flames .
d. An absorption line in a flame is always much sharper than an emission line because
of the Doppler effect.
6. The method of standard addition compensates for matrix effects provided
a. the addition does not dilute the sample appreciably and does not itself introduce
appreciable quantities or interfering substances
b. the addition dilutes the sample enough that the concentrations of interfering
substances are lowered to negligible values
c. the addition contains none of the substance being determined
d. the addition contains a large enough quantity of some substance to swamp out
sample variations
7. Fe
3+
and Cu
2+
form complexes with EDTA. The ferric complex is colorless , as is Fe
3+

itself, at the concentration involved here: the copper complex is a deep blue color
(deeper than the color of Cu
2+
itself), while EDTA is colorless. The photometric titration
curve below was obtained when a solution containing both Fe
3+
and Cu
2+
was titrated
with EDTA using a spectrophotometer set at a wavelength of 745 nm in the visible
region of the spectrum.


ml of EDTA solution



A
B
A


a. A is the iron end point.
b. B is the iron end point
c. The distance from A to B on the milliliter axis represents the quantity of iron
d. The quantity of iron could not be calculated from a graph like this unless the
quantity of copper in the solution was known ahead of time
8. In chromatography, a substance for which the distribution of the coefficient, K, is zero
may be used to estimate
a. the volume within the column occupied by the packing materials
b. the total volume of the column
c. the volume within the pores of the packing material
d. the volume within the column available to the mobile phase
9. The purpose of the solid support material in a GLC column is to
a. immobilize the stationary liquid phase
b. adsorb sample components that are insufficiently soluble in the stationary liquid
phase
c. provide a "backup" stationary phase in the event that the liquid is lost by
evaporation
d. remove impurities from the carrier gas
10. Helium, rather than nitrogen, is sometimes used as the carrier gas in GLC because
a. being lighter than nitrogen, helium elutes the sample components more rapidly
b. helium is less expensive than nitrogen
c. nitrogen has stable isotopes which separate and cause anomalous column
behavior
d. of its much higher thermal conductivity
11. An important feature of open-tubular GLC column is
a. they can accept much larger samples than can packed column because of their
great length
b. solute partitioning between stationary and mobile phases is very rapid and the C
term in the Van Deemter equation is relatively small
c. they permit the use of a wider variety of carrier gases
d. they can be operated at temperatures closer to the boiling point of the stationary
liquid phase than can packed columns and thus handle less volatile examples
12. Raising the column temperature in GLC decreases solute retention times primarily
because
a. solute diffusion coefficients in the liquid phase decrease with increasing
temperature
b. van der Waals interactions between solutes and stationary phase are stronger at
higher temperatures
c. gases are generally less soluble in liquids at higher temperatures
d. detector sensitivity is a function of temperature, especially with a thermal
conductivity cell
13. Which of the following would have practically no effect upon the retention volume of a
solute in GLC?
a. changing the carrier-gas flow-rate
b. increasing the stationary liquid loading of the column packing from 5 to 10% by
weight
c. increasing the column temperature
d. changing the chemical nature of the stationary liquid
14. The separation factor, S, in chromatography depends upon
a. the length of the column
b. the square root of the length of the column
c. the nature of the stationary liquid phase
d. the number of theoretical plates in the column


15. In GLC, interaction of solutes with the solid support will often cause
a. unusually narrow elution bands
b. asymmetric elution band
c. excessive eddy diffusion
d. decreased detector sensitivity
16. Increasing the quantity of stationary liquid phase applied to the column packing will,
with everything else the same,
a. increase tR for a solute
b. decrease tR for a solute
c. not influence tR for a solute
d. decrease the nonequilibrium term in the van Deemer equation
17. A neutral molecule such as ethanol or sugar which has found its way into the pores of a
typical anion-exchange resin can be eliminated
a. only by replacement with a cation
b. only by replacement with an anion
c. only if replaced by another organic molecule on a one-for-one exchange basis
d. by flushing out the water
18. In chromatography, a substance for which the distribution coefficient, K, is zero may be
used to estimate
a. the volume within the column available to the moving phase
b. the volume within the column occupied by the packing
c. the volume within the pores of the packing material
d. the total volume of the column
19. Which of the following statements is false in normal phase absorption?
a. The more polar a compound, the more strongly it will be adsorbed from a solution
b. A high molecular weight favors adsorption, other factors being equal
c. The more polar the solvent, the stronger the adsorption of the solute
d. The adsorption isotherm is usually nonlinear
20. The best measure of the quantity of a solute in LC is
a. the height of the elution band
b. the area of the elution band
c. the baseline width of the elution band
d. the retention volume
21. Which of the following would be the fastest way to decide which adsorbent and what
solvent system to use for a larger-scale chromatographic separation of an organic
reaction product from materials formed in side reactions?
a. Paper chromatography
b. Affinity chromatography
c. TLC
d. Adsorption chromatography with gradient elution






22. To deionize tap water by ion exchange for laboratory use, the best approach employs
a. a column containing a strong-acid cation exchange in the hydrogen form
b. a column containing a strong-base anion exchanger in the hydroxyl form
c. a mixed-bed column containing a strong-acid cation exchanger in the sodium form
and a strong-base anion exchanger in the chloride form
d. a mixed-bed column containing a strong-acid cation exchanger in the hydrogen
form and a strong-base anion exchanger in the hydroxyl form
23. Line spectra are emitted by
a. incandescent solids
b. excited molecules
c. molecules in the ground electronic state
d. excited atoms and monatomic ions
24. Band spectra are emitted by
a. tungsten lamps and Nernst glowers
b. excited molecules in the vapor phase
c. excited atoms and monatomic ions
d. incandescent solids
25. A chemical engineer is conducting research on the development of analytical methods
based upon chemiluminescence. If a conventional spectrofluorometer is used for the
measurements, an the instrument has separate switches for its various circuits, which
switch will be left in the "off" position?
a. detector power supply
b. amplifier
c. source power supply
d. power to the motor drive of the scanning monochromator on the emission side of
the instrument
26. In flame spectroscopy, the highest temperature fuel oxidant combination available as
yet is
a. hydrogen-oxygen
b. hydrogen-nitrous oxide
c. acetylene-oxygen
d. acetylene-nitrous oxide
27. If the change in a molecule caused by absorption of light energy involves change in the
average separation of the nuclei of two or more atoms, then the change is
a. electronic
b. vibrational
c. translational
d. rotational
28. The nephelometric method of analysis is based upon
a. Beer's law
b. Fajar's law
c. Bouger law's
d. Beer Lambert's Law




29. IR spectro-photometers have practically the same basic components as visible and UV
spectro-photometers. In which of the following basic components could the devices be
used interchangeable in both:
a. sources of radiant energy
b. optical system
c. sample holders
d. detectors
30. Which of the following may not be used in the determination of sugars?
a. TLC chromatography
b. Polarimetry
c. Copper reduction methods
d. Lane and Eynon methods
31. Which is not the recommended device for a filter photometry?
a. hydrogen arc lamp
b. glass filter
c. barrier layer photocell
d. none of these
32. This law states that the amount of light absorbed or transmitted by a solution is an
experimental function of the concentration of absorbing substance present and the
sample path length
a. Bouger's Law
b. Beer's Law
c. Lambert's Law
d. Bouger-Beer Law
33. Deviation's from Beer's Law may be due to
a. instrumental
b. intermolecular reactions
c. formation of complexions with varying number of ligonds
d. all of these
34. IR spectrophotometers have the same basic components as UV spectrophotometers,
except:
a. source of radiant energy and the kind of detectors
b. materials used in the optical system
c. materials used in the sample cells
d. all of these
35. Which of the following involves emission of radiation by excited atoms:
a. Ultra-violet spectrophotometry
b. Infra-red spectrophotometry
c. Atomic absorption spectrometry
d. Nephelopmetry
36. The absorption of a solution of a particular substance does not depend on the :
a. wavelength of the incident light
b. intensity of the incident light
c. concentration of the substance
d. thickness of the sample cell


37. If we compare flame spectrophotometry and emission spectroscopy, which of the
following statements will be true?
a. Flame photometry is more senstive than emission spectroscopy
b. Flame photometry can analyze more metals than emission spectroscopy
c. Flame photometry is less sensitive to the matrix than emission spectroscopy
d. Flame photometry is simpler to use than emission spectroscopy
38. Atomic absorption spectrophotometry (AAS) differs from visible absorption
spectrophotometry because AAS
a. has no light source
b. does not need a monochromator
c. does not follow Beer's Law
d. destroys the sample when a reading is made
39. Gas chromatography does not use this detector
a. thermal conductivity detector
b. refractive index detector
c. flame ionization detector
d. electron capture detector
40. In gas chromatography, the retention time is not dependent on
a. carrier gas velocity
b. column temperature
c. volume of compound analyzed
d. volatility of compound analyzed


PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY


1. The main component of air is ____________.
a. oxygen b. argon c. carbon dioxide d. nitrogen
e. methane
2. Of the following, ____________ is characteristic of gases.
a. Gases are highly compressible
b. These are relatively large distances between molecules
c. Gases form homogenous mixtures regardless of the non-reacting gas components
d. All of these
e. A gas expands spontaneously to fill its container
3. One significant difference between gases and liquids is that ______________________.
a. a gas is made up of molecules
b. a gas assumes the volume of its container
c. a gas may consist of both elements and compounds
d. gases are always mixtures
e. all of these answers are correct
4. Molecular compounds of low molecular weights tend to be gases at room temperature.
Which of the following is most likely not a gas at room temperature?
a. Cl2 b. HCl c. LiCl d. H2 e. CH4

5. Gaseous mixtures ________________.
a. can only contain molecules
b. are all heterogeneous
c. can only contain isolated atoms
d. are all homogenous
e. must contain both isolated atoms and molecules
6. Which one of the following is NOT true about the unit Pascal (pa)?
a. 1 Pa = 1 N/m2
b. The Pa is the SI unit for pressure
c. 1 atm = 101.325 kPa
d. 1 Pa = 100 torr
e. The Pa is the Si unit for force
7. The first person to investigate the relationship between the pressure of a gas ad its
volume was ________________.
a. Amadeo Avogadro
b. Lord Kelvin
c. Jacques Charles
d. Robert Boyle
e. Joseph Louis Gay-Lussac
8. Of the following, ____________ is a correct statement of Boyle¶s law.
a. PV = constant
b. P = constant
V
c. V = constant
P
d. V = constant
T
e. n = constant
P
9. Of the following, ______________ is a valid statement of Charles¶ law.
a. P = constant
T
b. V = constant
T
c. PV = constant
d. V = constant x n
e. V = constant x P
10. Which one of the following is a valid statement of Avogadro¶s law?
a. P = constant
T
b. V = constant
T
c. PV = constant
d. V = constant x n
e. V = constant x P


11. The volume of an ideal gas is zero at _________.
a. 0ºC b. -45ºF c. -273ºK d. -363ºK
e. -273ºC

12. Of the following, only _________ is impossible for an ideal gas.
a. V1 = V2
T1 T2
b. V1T1 = V2T2
c. V1 = T1
V2 T2
d. V2 = T2 ( V1)
T1
e. V1 = T1 = 0
V2 T2
13. The molar volume of a gas at STP is _____L.
a. 0.08206 b. 62.36 c. 1.00 d. 22.4 e. 14.7
14. A gas is considered ³ideal´ if ___________.
a. it is not compressible
b. one mole of it occupies exactly 1 liter at standard temperature and pressure
c. it can be shown to occupy zero volume at 0ºC
d. its behavior is described by the ideal-gas equation
e. one mole of it in a one-liter container exerts a pressure exactly 1 atm at room
temperature
15. For which of the following changes is not clear whether the volume of a particular
sample of an ideal gas will increase or decrease?
a. increase the temperature and increase the pressure
b. increase the temperature and decrease the pressure
c. increase the temperature and keep the pressure constant
d. keep temperature constant and decrease the pressure
e. decrease the temperature and increase the pressure
16. Standard temperature and pressure (STP), in the context of gases, refers to
____________________.
a. 298 K and 1 atm
b. 273 K and 1 atm
c. 298 K and 1 torr
d. 273 K and 1 pascal
e. 273 K and 1 torr
17. Of the following, ______________ correctly relates pressure, volume, temperature,
amount (mol), molecular mass (M), density (d) and mass (g).
a. M = dRT
PV
b. M = gRT
PV
c. M = PT
GRV
d. M = gV
RT
e. M = RT
Gv
18. Of the following, _____________ correctly relates pressure, volume, temperature,
amount (mol), molecular mass (M), density (d) and mass (g).
a. d = PM
RT
b. d = gRT
PM
c. d = PTM
gRV
d. d = gV
RT
e. d = RT
PM
19. Of the following gases, ____________ will have the greatest rate of effusion at a given
temperature.
a. NH3 b. CH4 c. Ar d. HBr e. HCl
20. An ideal gas differs from a real gas in that the molecules of an ideal gas
_________________.
a. have no attraction for one another
b. have appreciable molecular volume
c. have a molecular weight of zero
d. have no kinetic energy
e. has an average molecular mass
21. The statement, ³For a fixed mass of gas at constant temperature, gas volume is
inversely proportional to gas pressure.´ Is known as:
a. Avogadro¶s law b. Boyle¶s law c. Charle¶s law d. Graham¶s law e. Kelvin¶s law
22. If gas volume is doubled but the temperature remains constant:
a. the pressure stays the same
b. the molecules move faster
c. the kinetic energy increases
d. the molecules move slower
e. none of these answers
23. Subtracting the vapor pressure of water from the total pressure of a gas collected over
water is an example:
a. Avogadro¶s Hypothesis b. Dalton¶s law c. Graham¶s law
d. van der Waals Theory e. ideal gas law

24. The energy of molecules of a gas:
a. is dependent on concentration
b. is distributed over a wide range at constant temperature
c. is the same for all molecules at constant temperature
d. increases with a decrease in temperature
e. increases with an increase in pressure




25. Which of the following assumptions is not used to explain the ideal gas law?
a. gas particles themselves occupy a negligible percent of total gas volume
b. inter-particle forces are negligible in gases
c. collisions between gas particles are perfectly elastic
d. collisions between gas particles and container walls are perfectly elastic
e. individual gas particles are perfectly compressible to nuclear size
26. If someone were to light a cigar at one end of a closed room, persons at the other end of
the room might soon perceive an odor due to gaseous emissions from the cigar. Such a
phenomenon is an example of:
a. monometry b. ideality c. effusion d. diffusion
e. barometry
27. The fact that a balloon filled with helium will leak more slowly than one filled with
hydrogen is explained by citing:
a. Avogadro¶s hypothesis b. Dalton¶s law c. Graham¶s law d. van der Waals
Theory e. ideal gas law
28. Gases tend to behave ideally at
a. low temperature and low pressure
b. low temperature and high pressure
c. high temperature and low pressure
d. high temperature and high pressure
e. gases always behave ideally
29. Assuming ideal gas behavior, which of the following gases would have the lowest
density at standard temperature and pressure?
a. SF6 b. CF2Cl2 c. CO2 d. N2 e. Kr
30. Of the following gases, the one with the greatest density at STP is:
a. CH4 b. NH3 c. Ne d. H2 e. He

31. The phenomenon in which a steel needle can, with proper care, be made to
float on the surface of some water illustrates a property of liquid known as:
a. compressibility b. polarizability c. surface tension
d. triple point e. viscosity
32. The property of liquid that measures its resistance to flow is called:
a. capillarity b. polarizability c. resistivity d. viscosity
e. wetability
33. A liquid will Ơwetơ a surface if:
a. the liquid has a lesser density than the surface
b. the forces between the liquid molecules are weak
c. the liquid has a low vapor pressure
d. the forces between the molecules and the surface are greater
than the forces between the molecules of the liquid
e. none of these answers





34. Which of the following statements concerning molecules in the liquid state is
true?
a. Cohesive forces are not important
b. The molecules contract to fit the size of the container
c. The molecules have no motion
d. The molecules in a patterned (oriented) arrangement
e. The molecules are mobile and relatively close together
35. The temperature ate which the vapor pressure of a liquid equals the external
pressure is called the :
a. boiling point b. critical point c. melting point
d. sublimation point e. thermal point
36. Liquid and vapor phases of a substance become indistinguishable at the:
a. triple point b. normal point c. permanent point
d. critical point e. absolute point
37. When a liquid is in dynamic equilibrium with its vapor at a given temperature,
the following conditions could exist:
(I) There is no transfer of molecules between liquid and vapor
(II) The vapor pressure has a unique value
(III) The opposing processes, (liquid to vapor) and (vapor to liquid),
proceed at equal rates
(IV) The concentration of vapor is dependent on time
Which of the above choices are applicable?
a. I b. II and III c. I, II, and III
d. II and IV e. none of these combination
38. Which of the following does NOT describe the critical point of a liquid?
a. The temperature and pressure at which a liquidƞs meniscus disappears
b. The point where the vapor pressure curve intersects the fusion
temperature
c. The highest temperature at which a liquid can exist
d. The temperature and pressure at which a liquid and its vapor are identical
e. The highest temperature at which it is possible to obtain a liquid form its
vapor by increasing pressure
39. A container holds a small amount of liquid and its vapor in equilibrium If the
volume of the container is decreased, which of the following has occurred
once equilibrium is reestablished?
a. the temperature is lower b. the temperature is higher
c. the pressure is higher
d. the pressure is lower e. none of these
40. When the vapor pressure of a liquid equals atmospheric pressure, the
temperature of the liquid equals:
a. 100ºC b. boiling point c. the normal boiling point
d. the vaporization point e. none of these


41. When a liquid is in equilibrium with its vapor in a closed container:
a. The rate at which molecules from the liquid phase enter the gas
phase exactly equals the rate at which molecules from the gas
phase pass into the liquid phase
b. A change in temperature will not change the pressure in the container
c. The amount of gas in the container must exactly equal the amount of
liquid
d. Molecules cannot go from the liquid phase to the gas phase because the
amount of liquid in the container is constant
e. The vapor will gradually change back to the liquid state, that is, no vapor
will be left
42. Under which of the following conditions will vaporization best occur?
a. high mass, large surface area, high kinetic energy
b. weak forces between molecules, high kinetic energy, large
surface area
c. high molecular energy, small surface area
d. low kinetic energy, strong molecular forces, large surface area
e. small surface area, low kinetic energy, low molecular mass
43. Which of the following does NOT decrease rate of vaporization?
a. closing container lid b. increasing forces between molecules
c. increasing mass of molecule
d. decreasing temperature e. decreasing surface area
44. Which of the following factors does NOT affect the normal boiling point of a
liquid?
a. atmospheric pressure b. strength of forces between molecules
c. rate of evaporation
d. rate of condensation e. none of these answers
45. A liquid is in equilibrium with its vapor. If some of the vapor is allowed to
escape, what is the immediate result?
a. condensation rate decreases b. vaporization rate increases
c. condensation rate increases
d. vaporization rate decreases e. none of these
46. The phenomenon of supercooling refers to the existence of a metastable:
a. the liquid at a temperature below that of its critical point
b. liquid at a temperature below that of its sublimation point
c. liquid at a temperature below that of its freezing point
d. gas at a temperature below that of its critical point
e. two-phase liquid/solid mixture at the freezing point
47. All of the following are true about crystals EXCEPT
a. A crystal softens and melts over a wide range of temperature
b. A crystal tends to shatter along defined planes
c. Crystals generally have a specific shape for a specific substance
d. Crystal usually have a high degree of symmetry
48. All of the following are logical consequences of the observed macroscopic
properties of crystals EXCEPT
a. The atoms or molecules of a crystal are arranged in a regularly repeating
pattern
b. The forces holding the atoms in a metal crystal are the same for
essentially every atom except at the surface
c. The distances between adjacent atoms or molecules vary greatly
d. Some defects are present in the crystals
49. Which of the following has the largest number of lattice points per unit cell?
a. The primitive (simple) cubic lattice
b. The face centered cubic lattice
c. The body centered cubic lattice
d. All these lattices have the same number of lattice points per unit cell
50. All of the following are true about lattice points in a crystal structure EXCEPT
a. The first lattice point can be placed at any location
b. All lattice points have identical environments
c. The corners of unit cells are located at lattice points
d. Atoms are always located on lattice points
51. All of the following statements are true EXCEPT
a. The face-centered cubic lattice is identical to the cubic closest packed
lattice
b. The body-centered cubic lattice is identical to the hexagonal
closest packed lattice
c. The cubic closest packed and hexagonal closest packed structures have
identical fractions of space which are occupied by atoms
d. The density of a metal sample is independent of the size of the sample
considered
52. Which of the following represents the minimal amount of date necessary to
determine the atomic mass of a metal?
a. Avogadroƞs number and the density of the metal
b. Avogadroƞs number, the density of the metal and the length of the unit
cell edge
c. Avogadroƍs number, the density of the metal, the length of the
unit cell edge and the type of lattice
d. Avogadroƞs number, the density of the metal, the length of the unit cell
edge, the type of lattice and the atomic radius of the metal
53. Which of the following is assumed when calculating atomic radii of metals
form crystallographic data?
a. The atoms are soft spheres that are deformed in the structure
b. The atoms are almost perfect cubes
c. The atoms are of different sizes and the value calculated for the radius is
an average
d. The atoms in the structure are touching


54. What is the usual relationship between the number of valence electrons and
the number of nearest neighbors of a metal atom in a solid metal?
a. The number of valence electrons is less than the number nearest
neighbors
b. The number of valence electrons is greater than the number of nearest
neighbors
c. The number of valence electrons is equal to the number of nearest
neighbors
d. The number of valence electrons can be less than, greater than, or equal
to the number of nearest neighbors
55. All of the following are consequences of the theory of the structure of metals
EXCEPT
a. Metals conduct electricity b. Metals are malleable c. Metals are ductile
d. Metals break easily when they are bent
56. Which of the following is the reason that metals conduct electricity?
a. The metal atoms are close together
b. There are no empty spaces in metal structures
c. Electrons in the structure can move freely
d. Electrons and protons in the structure can move freely
57. Which of the following is the reason why salt stay bonded in the solid state?
a. There are strong covalent bonds between the ions
b. The structure consists of salt molecules tat bind tightly to other salt
molecules
c. They are held together by electrostatic attractions and the structure
includes no electrostatic repulsions
d. There are both electrostatic attractions and repulsions within the
structure but the total of the attractions is greater
58. All of the following are possible crystal defects EXCEPT
a. An atom or ion out of its regular position and occupying a normally empty
hole
b. A crystal in which he only defect is one pair of ions of the same
charge which are missing
c. An electron occupying a site that is normally occupied by a ƛ1 anion
d. A crystal containing some ion sites empty and some ions not bearing the
expected charge
59. Which of the following is the most important explanation for the conductivity
of metals?
a. they are almost all solids b. their coordination numbers are high
c. Their numbers of valence electrons are high d. Their densities are high
60. Which of the following pairs is isoelectronic?
a. AIS and P b. GeAs and Se c. GeAs and GaSe
d. Al and SiP


61. Which of the following is always the same for allotropes of the same
element?
a. The atomic mass b. the molar mass c. the structure d. the
chemical and physical properties
62. The semiconductor crystalline Si has a low electrical conductivity in the dark
because
a. crystalline Si is a molecular solid
b. the band gap energy is much greater than 3RT at 23ƕC
c. the chemical bonding in the crystal is strong in all three dimensions
d. Si has fewer valence electrons that elements that form metallic solids
63. A laser pointer of a doped semiconductor junction (i.e., a region of A1 doped
semiconductor bonded to a region of P doped semiconductor) with a flowing
current due to an applied voltage from a battery. Which of the following
statements is TRUE?
a. The color of the light is determined by the semiconductor band gap
b. The device works better warm rather than cold because the number of
thermally generated electrons is higher
c. Light is emitted at the interface when a hole from the A1 region combines
with an electron from the P region
d. Both (a) and (c)
64. In order to dope crystalline Si with extra electrons, which element should be
incorporated into the lattice?
a. P b. A1 c. C d. O
65. All of the following statements about NaCl crystalline lattice are true, EXCEPT
a. Every Cl is surrounded by 4 Na at equal bond lengths, and vice
versa
b. The structure along the x,y and z axes of the unit cell is all the same
c. If the length of one side of the unit cell and the atomic weights of Na and
Cl are known, then the density can be calculated
d. The unit cell is cubic even though the Na and Cl ions have different ionin
radii
66. All of the following statements about the different forms of solid C are true,
EXCEPT
a. Diamond is transparent and shows no color because its band gap
is quite large
b. Graphite slides easily because the C atoms are strongly bonded in only
two dimensions
c. In diamond the structure around each C atom is due to C sp
3
hybridization
d. Diamond is hard yet brittle because the band gap is large
67. Solids with long-range microscopic order in their structures are called
a. amorphous b. crystalline c. glasses d. metals
e. none of these


68. A specimen is subjected to x-ray diffraction. The resulting diffraction pattern
contains many sharply defined spots. The specimen is
a. gaseous b. crystalline c. amorphous
d. plastic e. liquid
69. A specimen is subjected to x-ray diffraction. The resulting diffraction pattern
contains three diffuse rings close to primary x-ray beam. The specimen is
a. gaseous b. crystalline c. amorphous
d. polycrystalline e. colloidal
70. The colors in the gemstone opal result from
a. the diffraction of visible light by colloidal crystals in the stone
b. absorption by transition metal complexes
c. contamination by large organic molecules which absorb light in the visible
region
d. radioactivity
e. none of these
71. Which of the following symmetry elements can be found in an equilateral
triangle?
a. a 2-fold rotation b. a 3-fold rotation c. as mirror line or plane
d. all of these e. none of these
72. About half of all the crystals studied so far belong to the ______ crystal
system
a. hexagonal b. orthorhombic c. cubic
d. triclinic e. monoclinic
73. The crystal system with the minimum symmetry requirement of one 4-fold
rotation is
a. orthorhombic b. cubic c. tetragonal
d. triclinic e. trigonal
74. Crystalline substances are ________. Amorphous substances are ________.
a. isotropic, isotropic b. anisotropic, anisotropic
c. isotropic, anisotropic d. anisotropic, isotropic
75. The three-dimensional array made up of all points within a crystal that have
the same environment in the same orientation is called the
a. unit cell b. primitive cell c. crystal system
d. crystal lattice e. symmetry pattern
76. The basic repeating structural unit of a crystal lattice is the
a. unit cell b. atom c. molecule
d. atomic cluster e. symmetry pattern
77. The number of lattice points in a primitive unit cell is
a. 1 b. 2 c. 4 d. 8 e. this
depends on the crystal system



78. The conditions --- aƽ b ƽ c, alpha= beta =gamma = 90º --- describe the
_________ unit cell.
a. tetragonal b. orthorhombic c. monoclinic
d. hexagonal e. trigonal
79. The conditions --- aƽ b ƽ c, alpha = gamma = 90º, ß ƽ 90º--- describe the
_______ unit cell
a. tetragonal b. orthorhombic c. monoclinic d. hexagonal
e. trigonal
80. The number of lattice points in the unit cell for the body-centered cubic
lattice is
a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4 e. 8
81. For a face-centered cubic unit cell, each corner contributes _____ lattice
points to the unit cell
a. 1/8 b. ¼ c. ½ d. 1 e. none of these
82. In a face-centered cubic lattice, each lattice, each lattice point located in a
face of the unit cell is shared equally with ___ other unit cell
a. 1 b. 3 c. 5 d. 7 e. none of
these
83. A metal crystallizes in a body-centered cubic lattice. Which of the following
correctly relates the atomic radius r of the metal to the length of an edge a of
the unit cell?
a. r = a b. r = aƹ2 c. r = aƨ3
2 4 4
d. This cannot be determined without additional information
e. none of these
84. The forces holding the molecules together in the lattice of a molecular solid
are
a. van der Waals forces b. ionic bonds c. covalent bonds
d. all of these e. none of these
85. Molecular crystals typically
a. are soft b. have low melting points c. are insulators
d. all of these e. none of these
86. Most ionic solids crystallize in the ______ system
a. hexagonal b. orthorhombic c. cubic
d. tetragonal e. monoclinic
87. The rock salt structure can be viewed as a _______ lattice of anions, with
cations occupying positions exactly between pairs of anions
a. face-centered cubic b. monoclinic c. trigonal
d. body-centered cubic e. primitive cubic
88. In the rock salt structure, each ion is surrounded by ________ equidistant
ions of opposite charge
a. 1 b. 2 c. 4 d. 8
e. none of these

89. Which of the following cannot possibly crystallize in the rock salt structure?
a. VN b. Na
2
S c. ZrSe d. NH
4
I
e. MgO
90. How many chloride ions are contained in a unit cell of CsCl?
a. 1/8 b. ¼ c. ½ d. 1 e. 2
91. The coordination number of each cesium atom in CsCl is
a. 1 b. 2 c. 4 d. 8 e. 12
92. A certain solid is a good insulator, is brittle, and has a high melting point. The
substance readily conducts electricity when molten. This substance is most
likely _____ in nature.
a. molecular b. covalent c. ionic d. metallic
e. it could be more than one of these
93. In a metallic solid, _______ are located at the lattice points.
a. neutral metal atoms b. molecules c. positively charged core ions
d. electrons e. atomic clusters
94. The metal with the highest melting point is
a. Pt b. Rh c. Nb d. Ga e. W
95. A structure that forms naturally when identical rigid spheres are placed as
close together as possible is called a ____ arrangement.
a. primitive b. close-packed c. face-centered d. dense
e. nematic
96. A crystal structure which yields close packing for uniform rigid spheres is
a. primitive cubic b. tetragonal c. body-centered cubic d. all of
these e. none of these
97. In the hexagonal close-packed structure, each atom has a coordination
number of
a. 2 b. 4 c. 6 d. 8 e. 12
98. In diamond, each carbon is covalently bonded to ________ other carbon
atoms
a. 2 b. 3 c. 4 d. 6 e. 8
99. The most stable form of sulfur at room temperature is
a. gaseous atoms b. long chains of sulfur atoms c. S
4
tetrahedral
d. S2 molecules with double bonds e. S
8
rings
100. Which element in group V does not form a solid with each atom bonded to
three others?
a. As b. Bi c. N d. P e. Sb
101. Which of the following forms a layered structure?
a. graphite b. white tin c. sulfur
d. red phosphorous e. all of these
102. Which of the following forms a solid with the diamond structure?
a. sulfur b. white tin c. red phosphorous
d. sodium e. gray tin

103. The crystal defect in which an atom or ion is displaced from its regular
position in the lattice to an interstitial site is called a(n)
a. Schottky defect b. Frenkel defect c. F-center
d. site defect e. berthollide
104. Irradiation of NaCl with ultraviolet light can cause
a. chloride ions to lose electrons to the crystalline lattice
b. formation of an F-center
c. formation of a nonstoichiometric crystal
d. all of these
e. none of these
105. In a plastic crystal,
a. the molecules tumble before the lattice s disrupted
b. the lattice is disrupted before the molecules begin to tumble
c. the molecules are rod-like
d. all of these
e. none of these
106. The rate constant of a reaction depends upon
a. initial concentration of reactants
b. extent of reaction
c. temperature
d. time of reaction
107. Which of the following factors does not influence the rate of a reaction?
a. Concentration of reactants
b. Nature of reactants
c. Molecularity of the reaction
d. Temperature
108. The mechanism of a reaction can sometimes be reduced from
a. the temperature dependence of the rate
b. the rate law
c. the net equation
d. the activation energy
109. The activation energy of a reaction may be lowered by
a. raising the temperature
b. lowering the temperature
c. removing the products of the reaction
d. adding a catalyst
110. The equilibrium constant in a reversible chemical reaction at given
temperature
a. depends on the initial concentrations of the reactants
b. depends on the concentration of one of the products at equilibrium
c. does not depend on the initial concentrations
d. is not characteristic of the reaction


Answer the following questions 111-113 with the help of the hypothetical
reaction and its rate law
3A
(g)
+ B
(g)
+2C
(g)
p D
(g)
+ 2E
(g)

Rate of formation of D = k[A] [B]
2

111. Doubling of the concentration of A increases the rate of reaction by a
factor of
a. 2 b. 3 c. 4 d. 9
112. Doubling of the concentration of B increases the rate of the reaction by a
factor of
a. 2 b. 3 c. 4 d. 9
113. If the volume of the container is suddenly reduced to one-half its original
volume the rate will increase by a factor of
a. 2 b. 4 c. 8 d. 16
114. The value of k, the specific rate constant, may be increased by
a. decreasing the concentration of D
b. increasing the concentration of A
c. increasing the concentration of C
d. increasing the temperature
115. What effect does an increase in temperature of 10ºC have on the rate of
the reaction?
a. Halved b. Multiplied by 1.5
c. Doubled d. Tripled
116. Which of the following is the best explanation for the effect of increase in
temperature on the rate of the reaction?
a. It increases the number of particles with the necessary activation
of energy
b. It enables the reacting particles with the necessary activation energy
c. It lowers the activation energy for the reaction
d. It enables the activated complex to be more easily converted to the
products
117. The reactions of high molecularity are rare because
a. activation energy of many body collisions is very high
b. many body collisions have low probability
c. many body collisions are not favoured energetically
d. none of the above statement is true
118. At 25ºC , the half ƛlife for the decomposition of N2O5 is 5.7 hours, and is
dependent of the initial pressure of N2O5 the specific rate constant is
a. ln 2 b. (1/5.7)hr
-1

c. (ln2/5.7)
-1
hr
-1
d. (ln2/5.7)hr
119. If the rate of reaction is independent of the concentration of the reactant,
the reaction is of
a. zero order b. first order
c. second order d. third order

120. Who among the following gave the law of photochemical equivalence?
a. Drapper b. Einstein
c. Grotthus d. Lambert
121. The energy of electromagnetic radiation depends on
a. its amplitude b. its frequency
c. its wave length d. none of the above
122. What term is used to define the phenomenon of emission of light in a
chemical reaction?
a. Chemical luminescence
b. Photosensitization
c. Both chemical luminescence and photosensitization
d. None of the above
123. Raman spectra may be obtained in
a. IR and Visible region
b. Visible region only
c. IR and micro wave region
d. UV and visible region
124. ESR spectra mainly helps in study of
a. compounds having hydrogen
b. compounds having carbons
c. free radicals
d. ionic compounds
125. Which one of the following rate laws has an overall order of 0.5 for the
reactions involving substances X, Y, Z.?
a. Rate = k(Cx) (Cy) (Cz)
b. Rate = k (Cx)
0.5
(Cy)
0.5
(Cz)
0.5

c. Rate = k (Cx)
1.5
(Cy)
Ɗ1
(Cz)
0

d. Rate = k (Cx) (Cz)
0
/(Cy)
2

126. Chemical reaction rates in solution do not depend to any great extent
upon
a. pressure b. temperature
c. concentration d. catalyst
127. Which of the following might be used as an electrode?
a. A stick b. A nail
c. A glass rod d. A soda straw
128. The e.m.f. value for oxidation from H
2
at 1.0 atm to H
+
at 1.0 x 10
-1
M is
a. 0.00V b. 0.059V
c. ƛ0.059V d. 0.030V
129. A good reducing agent
a. will always react rapidly
b. has a negative oxidation potential
c. is readily oxidized
d. shows a negative oxidation number


130. A Faraday of electricity is
a. one ampere per second
b. 96,500 coulombs per second
c. 6.02 x 10
23
electrons per second
d. 6.02 x 10
23
electronic charges
131. When aqueous HCl is electrolyzed
a. chlorine gas is produced at the anode
b. hydrogen gas is produced at the anode
c. oxygen gas is produced at the anode
d. oxygen gas is produced at the cathode
132. The number of electrons necessary to produce 1.00gm of Cu from Cu2+
at the cathode of an electrolytic cell is
a. 1.89 x 10
22
b. 3.04 x 10
3

c. 9.47 x 10
21
d. 1.91 x 10
25
133. A possible advantage to using the half reaction method for balancing
oxidation-reduction equation is
a. electrons need not be balanced
b. oxidation numbers are not assigned
c. charges are not balanced
d. atoms need not be balanced
134. In a galvanic cell the cathode
a. is always made of copper
b. is always made of zinc
c. may be made of an inert metal
d. always attracts negative ions in the solution
135. Hydrogen ions are more readily reduced than
a. Ag
+
b. Cu
++

c. Cl
2
d. Zn
++

136. Not all galvanic cells contain
a. a cathode b. an anode
c. a porous partition d. ions
137. When a cell of a lead storage battery is being charged, it is
a. a galvanic cell b. an electrolytic cell
c. a Daniel cell d. a dry cell
138. A current of 9.65 ampere is drawn from a Daniel cell for exactly 1 hour.
The loss of mass of anode is
a. 0.180g b. 23.6g
c. 0.197g d. 11.8g
139. The following reaction does not occur spontaneously (all ions at 1m
concentration; all gases at 1 atmosphere pressure)
a. 2Cr
(s)
+ 3Cl
2(g)
p 2 Cr
+3
+ 6 Cl
-

b. NO
3
- + 2 H
+
+ Ag
(s)
p Ag
+
+ H
2
O + NO
2(g)

c. NO
3
- + 4 H
+
+ 3 Ag
(s)
p 3 Ag
+
+ NO
(g)
+2H
2
O
d. Cl
2(g)
+ 2 Br
-
p 2 Cl
-
+ Br
2

140. If 0.200 liter of 0.100 M NaCl are electrolyzed until the OH
-
concentration
is 0.0500M, how many moles of Cl
2
gas are produced?
a. 5.00 x 10
-3
mole b. 1.00 x 10
-2
mole
c. 5.00 x 10
-2
mole c. 1.00 x 10
-1
mole
141. As the lead storage battery is charged,
a. the amount of sulfuric acid decreases
b. the lead electrode becomes coated with lead sulfate
c. sulfuric acid is regenerated
d. lead dioxide dissolves
142. If an aqueous solution of KI is electrolyzed (with platinum electrodes) one
would expect to find
a. potassium deposited at the cathode
b. oxygen liberated at the anode
c. the solution around the cathode becoming alkaline
d. the solution around the anode becoming brown
143. When an aqueous solution of NaCl is electrolyzed, a product formed at the
cathode is
a. Na b. H
+

c. OH
-
d. Cl
2

144. If aqueous Cu SO4 is electrolyzed for one minute with a current of 2.00 ampere,
the volume of ozygen produced at STP at the anode is
a. 3.10 x 10-4 liter b. 6.96ml
c. 1.16 x 10-4 liter d. 1.16 ml
145. As a lead storage battery is discharged
a. water is used up
b. lead is formed
c. lead sulfate is consumed


d. sulfuric acid is consumed
146. If a large quantity of cobalt metal were dropped into a solution containing Ag+,
Fe+2, Cu+2, the products of the reaction will be:
a. Ag, Fe and Cu b. Ag, Fe
++
and Cu
+

c. Fe
++
, Cu and Co
++
d. Fe
++
, Cu, Ag and Co
++
147. Which of the following instruments makes use of the standard electrode potentials
and the variation of electrode potential with concentration?
a. Polarimeter b. pH meter
c. Electrophorous d. Electrophotometer
148. The series in which the electrode potentials of metals are arranged in an order is
known as:
a. electrical conductivity series
b. electrode potential series
c. electrochemical series
d. chemical affinity series


149. In a salt-bridge KCl is used because
a. agar-agar forms a good jelly with it
b. KCl is an electrolyte
c. K+ and Cl- have the same transference number
d. KCl is present in calomel electrode
150. Four colorless salt solutions are placed in separate test-tubes and a strip of copper
is dipped in each.. which solution finally turns blue?
a. Pb (NO
3
)
2
b. Zn (NO
3
)
2

c. AgNO
3
d. Cd (NO
3
)
2
151. When an electric current is passed through a cell containing an electrolyte,
positive ions move towards the cathode and negative ions towards the anode. What
will happen if the cathode is pulled out of solution?
a. The positive ions will start moving towards the anode and negative ions will stop
moving
b. The negative ions will continue to move towards the anode and the positive ions
will stop moving
c. Both negative and positive ions move towards the anode
d. None of these movements will take place
152. What is the standard cell potential for the cell Zn; Zn
+2
(IM) ll Cu
+2
(IM); Cu (Eº
for Zn
+2
l Zn = -.76; Eº for Cu
+2
l Cu = +0.34)
a. -0.076 + 0.34 = -0.42 V
b. ±0.34 ± (-0.76) = +1.10V
c. ±0.34 ± (-0.76) = +0.42V
d. ±0.76 ± (+0.34) = -1.10V
153. One Faraday of current was passed through the electrolytic cells placed in series
containing solutions of Ag
+
, Ni
+2
and Cr
+3
respectively. The amount of Ag (At.Wt.
108), Ni (At. Wt. 59) and Cr (At. Wt. 52) deposited will be:
Silver Nickel Chromium
a. 108g 29.5g 17.5g
b. 108g 59g 52.0g
c. 108g 108g 108g
d. 108g 117.5g 166g
154. Given standard electrode potentials

Fe++ + 2e p Fe -0.440V
Fe+++ + 3e p Fe -0.036V




The standard electrode potential (Eº) for Fe+++ + e p Fe++ is
a. ±0.476V
b. ±0.404V
c. +0.404V
d. +0.771V
155. The magnitude of the individual half cell potentials are given
(i) CO
2
+ + 2e p Co 0.28V
(ii) Hg
2
+ + 2e p 2Hg 0.78V
when both the half cells (a) and (b) are connected with SHE, the metallic
electrode Co is found to be ±ve and Hg electrode is found to be +ve. The correct sign
for the electrode potentials will be:
a. +ve for half cell (I)
b. +ve for half cell (ii)
c. ±ve for half cell (ii)
156. When an iron wire is immersed in an acidic solution of CuSo4, the blue color of
the solution is lost after some time. This is due to
a. reduction of Cu
++

b. oxidation of CuSO
4

c. formation of double complex between iron and copper sulfate
d. formation of a colorless salt of Cu
++

157. Magnesium cannot displace from solution the ions of
a. sodium b. lead
c. copper d. gold
158. The mathematical statement of Gibb¶s phase rule is
a. F = C-P+2 b. C = F-P+2
c. C = F-P+1 d. P = C+F+2
159. The homogenous physically distinct and mechanically separable parts of the
heterogeneous system in equilibrium are called
a. phases b. components
c. degrees of freedom d. none of the above
160. What is the degree of freedom of a system consisting of a gaseous mixture of
carbon dioxide and nitrogen?
a. 0 b. 1
c. 2 d. 3
161. How many phases are present in the water system?
a. 0 b. 1
c. 2 d. 3
162. How many phases will be there in the system made of water and methyl alcohol?
a. 3 b. 1
c. 1 d. 0
163. How many components are necessary to define the following equilibrium?

CaCO3 CaO + CO2
Solid solid gas
a. 0 b. 1
c. 2 d. 3
164. The minimum number of phases existing in a system is
a. 0 b. 1
c. 2 d. 3
165. The incongruent melting point is so called
a. peritectic temperature
b. meritectic temperature
c. transition temperature
d. all of the above

n
p

7. Chemical kinetics can predict the (a) rate of reaction (b) feasibility of reaction (c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these 8. Velocity of a chemical reaction (a) decreases with increase in temperature (b) increases with increase of pressure of reactant for all reactions (c) decreases with increase of reactant concentration (d) none of these 9. Sum of the powers of the concentration terms in the rate equation is called the (a) order of the reaction (b) overall order of the reaction (c) molecularity of the reaction (d) none of these 10.Molecularity of a reaction (a) is always equal to the overall order of reaction (b) may not be equal to the order of reaction (c) can¶t have a fractional value (d) both (b) and (c) 11.Inversion of cane sugar is an example of (a) unimolecular reaction with first order (b) bimolecular reaction with second order (c) bimolecular reaction with first order (d) unimolecular reaction with second order 12.Concentration of the limiting reactant (with initial concentration of a moles/liter) after time t is (a-x).Then t for a first order reaction is given by (a) kt = ln a a-x (b) kt = x a(a-x) (c) kt = ln a-x a (d) k.t = a (a-x) x 13.Half life period of a chemical reaction is (a) the time required to reduce the concentration of the reacting substance to half its initial value (b) half of the space time of a reaction (c) half of the residence time of a reaction (d) none of these

14.Fill up the blanks: Half-life period for a first order reaction is....................... the initial concentration of the reactant (a) directly proportional to (b) inversely proportional to (c) independent of (d) none of these 15. Fill up the blanks from among the alternatives given below: In a first order reaction the time required to reduce the concentration of reactant from 1 mole/liter to 0.5 mole/liter will be ............. that required to reduce it from 10 moles/liter to 5 moles/liter in the same volume (a) more than (b) less than (c) same as (d) data insufficient; can't be predicted 16. Specific rate constant for a second order reaction (a) is independent of temperature (b) varies with temperature (c) depends on the nature of the reactants (d) both (b) and (c) 17. The reaction in which rate equation corresponds to a stoichiometric equation is called (a) elementary reaction (b) non-elementary reaction (c) parallel reaction (d) autokinetic reaction 18. Equilibrium of a chemical reaction as viewed by kinetics is a (a) dynamic steady state (b) static steady state (c) dynamic unsteady state (d) none of these 19. For a zero order reaction, concentration of product increases with (a) increase of reaction time (b) increase in initial concentration (c) total pressure (d) decrease in total pressure 20. Fill up the blanks Arrhenius equation shows the variation of __________with temperature (a) Reaction rate (b) Rate constant (c) Energy of activation (d) Frequency factor

depends on the type of catalyst . the equilibrium conversion of a reversible exothermic reaction (a) decreases (d) increases (c) remain unaffected (d) decreases linearly with temperature 27. Rate constant 'k' and the absolute temperature T are related by collision theory (for bimolecular) as (a) k w T 1.21. With increase in temperature. With decrease in temperature.Reactions with high activation energy are (a) very temperature sensitive (b) temperature insensitive (c) always irreversible (d) always reversible 25. Transition state theory relates the above quantities as (a) k w e ±E/RT (b) k w Te ±E/RT (c) k w T (d) k w T 1.5 24.5 (b) k w e ±E/RT (c) k w T (d) k w T 23. In autocalytic reactions (a) one of the reactants acts as a catalyst (b) one of the products acts as a catalyst (c) catalyst has very high selectivity (d) no catalyst is used 26. The equilibrium constant of a chemical reaction (a) increases in the presence of catalyst (b) decreases in the presence of catalyst (c) remains unaffected in the presence of a catalyst (d) can either increase or decrease. the equilibrium conversion of a reversible endothermic reaction (a) decreases (b) increases (c) remains unaffected (d) increases linearly with temperature 28. The energy of activation of a chemical reaction (a) is same as heat of reaction at constant pressure (b) is the minimum energy which the molecules must have before the reaction can take place (c) varies as fifth power of the temperature (d) both (b) and (c) 22.

the rate constant obeying Arrhenius equation (a) increases (b) decreases (c) decreases exponentially with temperature (d) can either increase or decrease. Differential method for analyzing the kinetic data is used (a) for testing complicated mechanisms (b) when the data are scattered (c) when rate expressions are very simple (d) none of these 33.29. Conversion increases with increase in temperature of (a) Autocatalytic reaction (b) Irreversible reaction (c) Reversible endothermic reaction (d) Reversible exothermic reaction 30.e. solid liquid and gas) 35. Integral method for analyzing the kinetic data is used (a) when the data are scattered (b) for testing specific mechanisms with simple rate expression (c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these 32. depends on the frequency factor . The heat of reaction (a) depends on the pressure only (b) depends on the mechanism of reaction only (c) depends on both pressure and mechanism of reaction (d) is independent of the mechanism of reaction 31. A trickle bed reactor is one which (a) has altogether three streams either entering or leaving (b) processes three reactants at different flow rates (c) processes three reactant with same flow rate (d) employs all the three phases (i.According to Arrhenius equation of temperature dependency of rate constant for an elementary reaction (a) k w ˜T (b) k w e-E/RT (c) k w Te-E/RT (d) none of these 36.Exposure of a photographic plate to produce a latent image is an example of (a) Very slow reaction (b) Very fast reaction (c) Photochemical reaction (d) Both (b) and (c) 34. With increases in temperature.

A plug-flow reactor is characterized by (a) high capacity (b) presence of axial mixing (c) presence of lateral mixing (d) constant composition and temperature of reaction mixture 39. In a semi-batch reactor (a) velocity of reaction can be controlled (b) maximum conversion can be controlled (c) both the as reactants flow counter-currently (d) residence time is constant 40. (b) and (c) 44. In a continuous flow stirred tank reactor the composition of the exit stream (a) is same as that in the reactor (b) is different than that in the reactor (c) depends upon the flow rate of inlet stream (d) none of these 42. In an ideal tubular-flow reactor (a) there is no mixing in longitudinal direction (b) mixing takes place in radial direction (c) there is a uniform velocity across the radius (d) all (a). A back mix reactor (a) is same as plug-flow reactor (b) is same as ideal stirred tank reactor (c) employs mixing in axial direction only (d) is most suitable for gas phase reaction 41. A batch reactor is characterized by (a) constant residence time (b) the variation in extent of reaction and properties of the reaction mixture with time (c) variation in reactor volume (d) very low conversion 38. A high space velocity means that a given (a) reaction can be accomplished with small reactor (b) conversion can be obtained with a high feed rate (c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these . (b) and (c) 43. Space velocity (a) describes the extensive operating characteristics of a tubular flow reactor (b) is the maximum feed rate per unit volume of reactor for is given conversion (c) is a measure of the case of the reaction job (d) all (a).37.

For nearly isothermal operation involving large reaction time in a liquid ±phase reaction. Space time in flow reactor is (a) usually equal to the residence time (b) the reciprocal of the space velocity (c) a measure of its capacity (d) both (a) and (c) 46. Which of the following is the most suitable for very high-pressure gas-phase reaction? (a) batch reactor (b) tubular flow reactor (c) stirred tank reactor (d) fluidized bed reactor 51. (b) and (c) . A space-time of 3 hours for a flow reactor means that (a) the time required to process one reactor volume of feed (measured at specified conditions) is 3 hour (b) three reactor volumes of feed can be processed every hour (c) it takes three hours to dump the entire volume of the reaction with feed (d) conversion is cent per cent after three hour 47. the most suitable reactor is (a) stirred tank reactor (b) tubular flow reactor (c) batch reactor (d) fixed bed reactor 52. A batch reactor is (a) suitable for gas-phase reaction on commercial scale (b) suitable for liquid ±phase reaction involving small production rate (c) least expensive to operate for a given rate (d) most suitable for very large production rate 50. Fluidized bed reactor is characterized by (a) uniformity of temperature (b) comparatively smaller equipment (c) very small pressure drop (d) absence of continuous catalyst regeneration facility 49. A stirred tank reactor compared to tubular-flow reactor provides (a) more uniform operation condition (b) permits operation at the optimum temperature for a long reaction time (c) higher overall selectivity for a first order consecutive reaction (d) all (a).45. Space time equals the mean residence time (a) when the density of the reaction mixture is constant (b) for large diameter tubular reactor (c) for narrow diameter tubular reactor (d) for CSTR 48.

In a CSTR (a) reaction rate varies with time (b) concentration varies with time (c) both (a) and (b) occur (d) neither (a) nor (b) occurs 60. The use of space-time is preferred over the mean residence time in the design of (a) batch reactor (b) ideal tubular-flow reactor (c) slurry reactor (d) CSTR . A first order irreversible reaction A B is carried separately in a constant volume as well as a in a variable volume reactor for a particular period. pressure and temperature) (b) rate constant (c) density of mixture (d) none of these 59.5liters) in series (c) stirred tank followed by tubular flow reactor (each 2.A space velocity of 5 hour means that (a) five reactor volumes of feed (at specified conditions) are being fed into the reactor per hour (b) after five hours.5liters) (d) single tubular flow reactor (v=5liters) 54. Which of the following fixes the volume of a batch reactor for a particular conversion and production rate? (a) operating conditions (e. which will give the maximum conversion? (a) single stirred tank (v=5liters) (b) two stirred tank (each of 2.g. For the same residence time.53. A second order reaction of the form A+B C is called a pseudo-first order reaction when (a) CAO = CBO (b) CAO > CBO (c) CAO { CBO (d) CBO > CAO 56. Oil hydrogenated using nickel catalyst in a (a) batch reactor (b) slurry reactor (c) fluidized bed reactor (d) fixed bed reactor 55. reactor is being filled with the feed (c) cent percent conversion can be achieved in at least 5 hours (d) a fixed conversion of a given batch of feed takes 5 hours 58. It signifies that (a) both conversion as well as concentration are same in the two reactors (b) conversion in both will be the same but concentrations will be different in the two reactors (c) both the conversion as well as concentrations will be different in the two reactors (d) none of these 57.

reactor (d) P. can¶t be predicted 63. the suitable reactor set up is (a) P. For multiple reactions. The conversion is (a) Less when they are connected in series (b) More when they are connected in series (c) More when they are connected in parallel (d) Same whether they are connected in series or parallel 67. Which of the following gives a higher yield? (a) Large reactor followed by smaller one (b) Smaller reactor followed by larger one (c) Either of the arrangement (a) or (b) will give the same yield (d) Data insufficient. For an autocatalytic reactor.F. A first order reaction requires two unequal sized CSTR. reactor (b) higher in CSTR (c) same in both the reactors (d) data insufficient. the reaction 2A B is carried out separately in CSTR and P. reactor followed by CSTR 64. A first order reaction requires two equal sized CSTR.F.F.F. Which of the following is most suitable for isothermal reaction ? (a) Batch reactor (b) Back-mix reactor (c) Plug-flow reactor (d) Fixed bad reactor . With the same reaction time. the reaction within the vessel affects the (a) Size requirement (b) Distribution of reaction product (c) Both (a) and (b) (d) Neither (a) nor (b) 65. The concentration of A in a first order reaction A pB decreases (a) Linearly with time (b) Exponentially with time (c) Very abruptly toward the end of the reaction (d) Logarithmically with time 68. For all positive reaction orders for a particular duty (a) mixed reactor is always larger than the plug-flow reactor (b) the ratio of the volume of the mixed reactor to that of the plug-flow reactor decreases with order (c) reactor size is independent of the type of flow (d) density variation during reaction affects design 62.61. The conversion will be (a) higher in P.F. reactors in series (b) CSTR in series (c) CSTR followed by P. initial concentration and feed rate. reactor of equal volumes. can¶t be predicted 66.

F. reactor.F. An auto thermal reactor is (a) Most suitable for a second order reaction (b) Most suitable for a reversible reaction (c) Completely self supporting in its thermal energy requirements (d) Isothermal in nature 76. Back mixing is most predominant in (a) A well stirred reactor (b) Plug-flow reactor (c) A single CSTR (d) CSTR connected in series 73.F. For series reaction. The performance of a cascade of CSTR¶s can be improved by adding (a) a P. can¶t be predicted 71. the conversion will (a) Increase (b) Decrease (c) Remain same (d) Data sufficient. reactor in series (b) a P.the (a) Relative yield is always greater for plug-flow reactor tha) for the single CSTR of the same volume (b) Statement in a is wrong (c) Relative yield decreases with increasing conversion (d) Both (a) and (c) hold good . Which of the following is the optimum operating condition for an exothermic reversible reaction-taking place in a plug-flow reactor (a)Temperature should be high in the beginning and decreased towards the end of the reaction (b) Very low temperature should be used throughout the reaction (c) Very high temperature should be used throughout the reaction (d) None of these 70. reactor in parallel (c) More CSTR¶s in series (d) More CSTR¶s in parallel 75. The optimum performance for reactors operating in parallel is obtained when the feed stream is distributed in such a way that the (a) Space time for each parallel line is same (b) Space time for parallel lines is different (c) Larger reactors have more space time compared to smaller ones (d) None of these 72.69. The ratio of moles of a reactant converted into the desired product to that converted into unwanted product is called (a) Operational yield (b) Relative yield (c) Selectivity (d) None of these 74. With increase in the space-time of an irreversible isothermal reaction being carried out in a P.

if the order of the desired reaction is higher than that of the undesired reaction. Catalyst carriers (a) Have very high selectivity (b) Increase the activity of a catalyst (c) Provide large surface area with small amount of active material (d) Inhibit catalyst poisoning . Pick out the wrong statement (a) A catalyst does not alter the final position of equilibrium in a reversible reaction. depends on the type of reaction 81. A P (desired product) and A Q (unwanted product). (b) A catalyst initiate a reaction (c) A catalyst is specific in action (d) A catalyst remain unchanged in chemical composition at the end of the reaction 83. a (a) Batch rector is preferred over a single CSTR for high yield (b) Tubular rector is preferred over a single CSTR for high yield (c) Both (a) and (b) (d) A single CSTR is the most suitable 79. high yield would be favored ( for gas phase reactions) (a) At high pressure (b) At low pressure (c) By the presence of the inner gases in the reactabt stream (d) Both (b) and (c) 80. use (a) Packed column (b) Spray column (c) Tray column (d) Bubble column 78. the operation yield (a) Is greater than relative yield (b) Is smaller than relative yield (c) Equals the relative yield (d) Can be greater or smaller than relative yield. When a high liquid hold up is required in a reactor for a gas-liquid reaction. When all the limiting reactant is consumed in the reaction. In question 78. For reactions in parallel viz.77. Catalyst is a substance which (a) Increases the speed of chemical reaction (b) Decreases the speed of chemical reaction (c) Can either increase or decrease the speed of chemical reaction (d) Alters the value of equilibrium constant in a reversible reaction 84. Design of heterogeneous catalytic reactor involves consideration of (a) Only chemical steps (b) Only physical steps (c) Both (a) and (b) (d) Neither (a) and (b) 82.

33 (b) 0.85. The final conversion is (a) 0. Carbon catalyst accumulated on the catalyst used in the gas oil cracking lies in the category of : (a) Deposited poison (b) Chemisorbed poison (c) Selectivity poison (d) Stability poison 88. can¶t be predicted 90. Starting with pure A. A catalyst promoter (a) Improves the activity of a catalyst (b) Acts as a catalyst support (c) Itself has very high activity (d) All (a) (b) and (c) 86. A reaction . Kinetics of solid catalyst reaction can be studied in a (a) Batch reactor (b) Plug-flow reactor (c) Mixed reactor (d) None of these . The most suitable reactor for carrying out an auto-thermal reaction is (a) Batch reactor (b) CSTR (c) Semi-batch reactor (d) Plug-flow reactor 91 Which of the following factors control the design of a fluid solid reactor? (a) The reaction kinetics for single particle (b) The size distribution of solids being treated (c) Flow patterns of solids and fluids in the reactor (d) All (a) (b) and (c) 92.50 (c) 1 (d) Data insufficient. A catalyst inhibitor (a) Lessens its selectivity (b) May be useful for suppressing undesirable side reaction (c) Is added in small quantity during the catalyst manufacture itself (d) All (a) (b) and (c) 87. A 3 B is conducted in a constant pressure vessel. Slurry reactors are characterised by (a) Lack of intra-particle diffusion resistance (b) Presence of two mobile phase (c) Both (a) and (b) (d) Neither (a) nor (b) 89. the volume of the reaction mixture increase 3 times in 6 minutes.

use a (a) Fixed bed reactor (b) Fluidized bed reactor followed by a fixed bed reactor (c) Fixed bed reactor followed by a fluidized bed reactor (d) Fluidized bed reactor 94. Helium-mercury method can be used to determine the (a) Pore volume (b) Solid density (c) Porosity of catalyst particle (d) All (a) (b) and (c) . Which of the following factors control the deactivation of a porous catalyst pellet? (a) Decay reactions (b) Pore diffusion (c) Form of surface attack of poison (d) All (a) (b) and (c) 97. Which of the following will give the maximum gas conversion ? (a) Fixed bed reactor (b) fluidized reactor (c) Semi-fluidized reactor (d) Plug flow catalytic reactor 96. For high conversion in highly exothermic solid catalyzed reaction. BET apparatus is used to determine the (a) Specific surface of porous catalyst (b) Pore size distribution (c) Pore diameter (d) Porosity of the catalyst bed 98. If pore diffusion is the controlling step in a solid catalyzed reaction the catalyst (a) Porosity is very important (b) Porosity is less importance (c) Internal surface is utilized efficiently (d) None of these 99.93. BET apparatus (a) Measure the catalyst surface area directly (b) Operates at very high pressure (c) Is made entirely by stainless steel (d) None of these 100. In case of staged packed bed reactors carrying out exothermic reaction. use (a) High recycle for pure glass (b) Plug flow for dilute liquid require no large preheating of feed (c) Cold shot operations for a dilute solution requiring large preheating to bring the steam up to the reaction temperature (d) All (a) (b) and (c) 95.

concentration b. Enthalpy µH¶ is defined as a. mass c. Efficiency of heat engine working on Carnot cycle between two temperature levels depends upon a. heat capacity b. heat transfer is zero c. (T1 ±T2) / T1 . dQ = dU + dW b. H = U ± PV c. both mass and pressure of the working fluid 9.CHEMICAL ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS 1. pressure d. An irreversible process a. What is the degree of freedom for a system comprising liquid water equilibrium with its vapor? a. dW = dQ ± dU 4. H = U ± TS d. none of these 5. Efficiency of a Carnot engine working between temperatures T1 and T2 (T1 < T2 ) is a. First law of thermodynamics deals with a. concentration 2. 2 d. (T2 ± T1) / T2 b. H ± U = PV b. (T2 ± T1) / T1 c (T1 ± T2) / T2 d. temperature d. the mass of the working fluid d. 3 10. is an idealized visualization of behavior of a system c. enthalpy remains constant b. is the analog of linear frictionless motion in machines b. irreversible processes only d. yields the maximum amount of work d. the pressure of working fluid c. 0 b. the two temperatures only b. direction of energy transfer b. work done is a path function 7. dQ = dU ± dW c. Which of the following is a thermodynamic property of a system? a. none of these 8. 6. entropy 3. 1 c. molal heat capactiy c. temperature change is zero d. yields the amount of work less than that of a reversible process. reversible process only c. First law of thermodynamics is mathematically stated as a. Which of the following is an extensive property of a system? a. dU = dQ + dW d. In a adiabatic process a.

freezing point b. volume process 15. œCv dT 12. the enthalpy ( ¨H) change of the system is a. does not depend upon temperature b. entropy process d. decreases a. For an isothermal process the internal energy of a gas b. and temperature of a gas is called a. Gibbs Duhem equation c.11. Isobaric process means a constant a. volume process 16. pressure process b. K = Cp / C v) is valid for a. For a constant pressure reversible process. data insufficient can¶t be predicted 20. pressure process d. entropy process b. is independent of temperature d. Cp dT c. PV K = Constant (where. enthalpy process c. temperature process c. Isobaric process d. Throttling process is a constant a. enthalpy process c. œ Cp dT d. C vdT b. none of these 13. boiling point d. Isentropic process c. for an ideal gas a. The point at which all three phases co-exist is known as a. adiabatic process . Internal energy of an ideal gas a. Isothermal process b. Isentropic process means a constant a. increases c. none of these 14. Equation of state b. none of these 17. ideal gas equation d. is independent of volume only d. C. none of these 18. decreases with increase in temperature c. volume. is independent of both pressure and volume 19. Equation which relates pressure. pressure process d. triple point c. remains unchanged d. is independent of pressure only c. increases with increase in pressure b. none of these b.

vary as square of the absolute temperature c. none of these 27. not a function of pressure c. F = C ±P ± 2 d. is decreasing c. low pressure and low temperature d. are more less constant(vary from 0. only ¨H = 0 c. Number of components (C) phase (P) and degrees of freedom (F) are related by Gibbs phase rule as a. Boyle¶s law for gases states that a. pressure to critical pressure b. only ¨U= 0 b. data insufficient. P w V at a constant temperature and mass of the gas d. unity. ¨U = ¨H = 0 d. P w 1/V when temperature is constant b. use only one graph for all gases b. The equation. dQ ± dU 22. P w1/V when temperature and mass of the gas remains constant c. For an isothermal reversible compression of an ideal gas a. none of these 25. easier plotting d. high pressure and low temperature c. low pressure and high temperature b. if it follows PV = nRT 26. vary as square of the absolute pressure d.21. Compressibility factor-reduced pressure plot on reduced coordinates facilities a. not a function of its temperature b. remains constant d. not a function of its nature d. critical pressure to pressure c. can¶t be predicted 23. PV = nRT is best obeyed by gases at a. Compressibility factor of a gas is a. pseudocritical pressure to pressure 28. P + F ± C = 2 b.2 to 0. entropy of the universe a. Reduced pressure of a gas is the ratio of its a. for any gas 24. As the time is passing. is increasing b. pressure to pseudocritical pressure d. covering of wider range c. P = F ± C ±2 . C =P ± F +2 c. P/V = constant. more accurate plotting 29. Critical compressibility factor for all substances a.3) b.

both matter and energy with its surroundings. Q = ( ˜T/ ˜P)H c.30. Heat of formation of an element in its standard state is a. The absolute entropy for all crystalline substances at absolute zero temperature a. 0 b. neither matter nor energy with its surroundings d. internal energy . 2 d. matter with its surroundings b. temperature vs. Q ± ( ˜U/ ˜P)H 38. entropy vs. energy with its surroundings c. Q = ( ˜P/˜T)H b. Mollier diagram is a plot of a. is more than zero d. temperature vs. dependent on both pressure and temperature d. can¶t be determined 37. >0 d. An isolated system can exchange a. dependent on temperature only c. irreversible process only d. 1 c. all gases d. is zero b. is negative c. a function of pressure 34. gases at a very low temperature 32. dependent on pressure only b. <0 c. entropy c. gases at very high pressure b. Joule ± Thomson coefficient is defined as a. enthalpy b. temperature vs. 0 b. 3 31. Heat of reaction is a. Degrees of freedom at triple point will be a. enthalpy d. Second law of thermodynamics is concerned with a. direction of energy transfer c. amount of energy transferred b. independent of temperature changes 35. non-cyclic process only 36. Q = ( ˜U/ ˜T)H d. Cp ± Cv = R is valid for a. 33. ideal gases c.

none of these 46. none of these 42. dS = constant 44. In an irreversible process a. none of these 43. TdS ± dU ± dW <0 b. dQ = dU + pdV 47. the temperature of the heat reservoir to which a Carnot engine rejects all the heat that is taken in c.V. only temperature changes of the system d.S are related by a. Gibbs-Helmholtz equation c. Entropy is measure of a. dU = Cv dT d. In a reversible process a. Maxwell¶s equation d. For spontaneous changes in an isolated system( S = entropy ) a. TdS = dU + dW c. For equilibrium process in an isolated system a. dS < 0 c. same as c. dS < 0 c. dS>0 d. V/T = constant c. Charles law for gases states that a. The four properties of a system via P. orderly behavior of a system c. V w 1/T d. For a constant volume process a. V w1/P b. dS> 0 d. more than d. dS = 0 b. less than b. dS = constant 45. occupy volumes««« that of the ideal gas a. disorder of a system b. minimum temperature attainable b. the temperature of the heat reservoir to which a Carnot engine rejects no heat d. dU ± dW ± TdS = 0 d. Absolute zero temperature signifies a.T. dU = C pdT c. PV/T = constant 41. TdS ± dW ± dU > 0 b. Fill up the blank from among the following: Near their critical temperature all gases. dU ± dW = TdS d. TdS = UdW = 0 c. dW = pdV b. TdS ± dT + dW < 0 . Gibbs-Duhem equation b.39. dW ± dU = TdS 48. half 40. dS = 0 b.

A = H + TS b. A = U ± TS d. direction of energy transfer d. ( ˜U/˜P)v 50. TdS = dU ± PdV 52. calorific value b. For an exothermic reaction a. energy transfer c. dQ = Cv dT + PdV c.49. both ¨H and ¨U are negative d. single phase fluid of varying composition b. heat of reaction d. open as well as closed systems d. heat of combustion 56. If different processes are used to bring about the same chemical reaction. none of these . Lavoisier and Laplace law d. dU = TdS ± PdV b. The equation TdS = dU ± PdV applies to a. the value of absolute entropy b. ( ˜U/˜V)T d. a. the enthalpy change is same for all of them. (˜V/ ˜T)P 51. none of these b. heat of formation c. Third law of thermodynamics is concerned with a. Which of the following equation is obtained on combining 1sT and 2nd law of thermodynamics. increase in entropy c. Cv is given by a. none of these b. for a system of constant mass? a. decrease in entropy d. constant entropy 57. enthalpy change is zero 54. none of these 55. Melting of wax is accompanied with a. Change of heat content when one mole of the compound is burnt in oxygen at constant pressure is called a. A = H ± TS c. both b and c 53. only internal energy change (¨U) is negative c. ( ˜U/ ˜T)v c. Kirchhoff¶s law c. dQ = Cp dT + Vdp d. single phase fluid of constant composition c. only enthalpy change (¨H)is negative b. Hess¶s law b. Helmholtz free energy is defined as a.

Pick out the correct equation relating G and A a. negative d. three times faster than Y . p=0 d. v > 0 62. both G and A increases 66. Clapeyron equation deals with the a. dP/dT = ¨HVAP/ T¨VVAP b. (dG)T. none of these 64.58. Gibbs-Helmholtz equation is a. It implies that X is a. effect of an inert gas on vapor pressure c. G = A + TS 63. (dG)T. In any spontaneous process a. dP/dT = ¨ H/T ¨V b. (dG)T. G = H + TS 59. p=0 d. Free energy charges for two reaction mechanism X and Y are respectively ± 15 and 5 units. Gibbs free energy (G) is defined as a. none of these 67. (dG)T. both G and A decreases b.¨H/ RT + constant c. Pick out the Claussius-Clayperon equation from the following: a.TS d. G = A + PV b. p>0 c. ¨G = ¨H ± T¨T c. G = A ± TS d.V <0 d. three times slower than Y d. zero b. A chemical reaction will occur spontaneously at constant pressure and temperature. (dA)T. positive c. faster than Y c. calculation of G for spontaneous phase change d. (dG)T. temperature dependence of least of phase transition 65. G = U± TS c. only A decreases d. For an irreversible process involving only pressure volume work a. (dG)T. slower than Y b. if free energy is a. p<0 b. ¨G = ¨H + T[ ˜ ( ¨G)/˜T]P d. G = U+ TS 60. p<0 b. only G decreases c. v > 0 61. For a reversible process involving only pressure volume work a. (dA)T. p>0 c. ¨G = ¨H + T[ ˜( ¨G)/ ˜T]P b. ln P = . rate of change of vapor pressure with temperature b. d(U ±TS)T . G = H . G = U + A c.

The activity of an ideal gas is numerically a. more than it pressure b. Chemical potential of its component of a system is given by a. not related to 71. Fugacity and pressure are numerically equal when the gas is a. Which of the following is not affected by temperature changes a. none of these 75. ideal solutions c. at low temperature d. a force which derives the chemical system to equilibrium d. more than b. The relation connecting the fugacities of various components in a solution with one another and to composition at constant temperature and pressure is called a. chemical potentials of all components should be same in a particular phase c.ni b. The chemical potential for a pure substance «. in standard state b. Partial molal quantities are important in the study of a. in ideal state 73. Margules equation 74. equal to its pressure d. Qi = ( xG/xni)T. less than its pressure c.ni c.P d. an intensive property c.68. Gibbs-Helmholtz equation d. Chemical potential is a. less than c. sum of the chemical potentials of any given component in all the phases should be the same d. Fill up the blanks from among the following alternatives. free energy d.. activity co-efficient c. both b and c 69. an extensive property b. its partial molal free energy a. The necessary condition for phase equilibrium in a multiphase system of N components is the a. at high temperature c. a pure component 72.P. fugacity b. Qi = ( xG/xni)T. non-ideal mixtures d. chemical potential of all components should be equal in all phases b. Qi = ( xA/xni)T. ideal gases b. none of these 76. Gibbs-Duhem equation b. data insufficient can¶t be predicted .P 70. Van Laar equation c.P. equal to d. Qi = ( xA/xni)T.

77. critical point b. The point at which both liquid and gas phases are identical is called a. enthalpy does not remain constant b. Equilibrium constant a. ternary solution c. 1 c. azeotropic mixture only d. freezing point d. <1 d. pressure c. the entire apparatus is exposed to surroundings c. decreases as the temperature decreases for an exothermic reaction c. In Joule-Thomson porous plug experiment a. involves transfer of heat from low temperature to high temperature c. both a and b d. temperature remains constant d. adiabatic work c. decreasing c. violates second law of thermodynamics b. activity c. decreases as the temperature increases for an exothermic reaction b. Refrigeration cycle a. triple point c. will decrease with increasing temperature for a exothermic reaction d. none of these . temperature d. Maximum work that could be secured by expanding the gas over a given pressure range is the a. >1 81. the value of activity coefficient is a. pressure d. initial concentration of the reactant b. mole fraction b. not changed b. 0 b. binary solution b. none of these 84. none of these 80. boiling point 79. none of these 83. none of these 78. data insufficient can¶t be predicted 86. increasing d. For an ideal solution. Equilibrium constant of a reaction varies with a. none of these 85. Van Laar equation deals with activity coefficients in a. isothermal work b. As the entropy of the universe is increasing day by day the work producing capacity of a heat engine is a. activity coefficient 82. Fugacity coefficient of a substance is the ratio of its fugacity to a. isentropic work d.

Coefficient of Performance (COP) of a refrigerator is the ratio of a. air refrigeration cycle 93. same as Carnot b. vapor compression process with a reversible expansion engine d. zeroth law of thermodynamics b. 200 BTU/hr c. both a and b d. Heat pump a. c. An ideal refrigerant should a. 200 BTU/day 92. reverse Carnot cycle b. higher to lower temperature 90. work on Carnot cycle . lower to higher temperature d. dependent on refrigerant properties b. not have a subatmosphere vapor pressure at the temperature in the refrigerator coils b. accomplishes both a and b d. 0 b. work required to refrigeration obtained b. the least efficient of all refrigeration processes 88. <0 c. accomplishes only space cooling in summer c. ordinary vapor compression cycle c. >1 91. second law of thermodynamics d. 50 k cal/hr b.87. not have unduly high vapor pressure at the condenser temp. Ideal refrigeration cycle is a. Which of the following have minimum value of COP for a given refrigeration effect? a. In a working refrigerator value of COP is always a. One ton of refrigeration capacity is equivalent to a. first law of thermodynamics c. <1 d. same as reverse Carnot cycle c. third law of thermodynamics 89. 200 BTU/minute d. none of these 94. accomplishes only space heating in winter b. refrigeration obtained to the work required c. Fundamental principle of refrigeration is based on a.

solid helium d. Carnot refrigeration cycle b. Calorific value as determined by bomb calorimeter is (a) higher calorific value at constant volume (b) gross calorific value at constant pressure (c) lower calorific value at constant pressure (d) net calorific value at constant volume 3. Dry ice is a. requires relatively quantities of air to achieve a significant amount of refrigeration d. carbon dioxide 96. In flue gas analysis by Orsat¶s apparatus. T2 /(T1 . Coefficient to performance for a reversed Carnot cycle working between temperatures T1 and T2 (T1> T2) is a. ethylene c. Vapor ejection refrigeration 97. T1 /(T1 ± T2) c. CO2 98. none of these CHEMICAL ENGINEERING CALCULATIONS 1. Incomplete combustion of a fuel is characterized by (a) smoke formation (b) high gas temperature (c) high percentage of oxygen in flue gas (d) high carbon monoxide content in flue gas . Which of the following is not a common refrigerant a. (T2 ± T1) / T1 d. both b and c 99. is most efficient of all refrigeration b. has very low efficiency c. Refrigerants commonly used for domestic refrigerations are a. A refrigeration cycle c.T2) b. propane d. ethyl chloride b. moisture free ice c. Domestic refrigerator usually works on a. carbon monoxide is absorbed by (b) potassium hydroxide (a) cuprous chloride (c) alkaline pyrogallol solution (d) none of these 2.95. Air refrigeration cycle a. freon 12 b. solid carbon dioxide b. freon 12 c. Absorption refrigeration cycle d. ammonia d. (T1 ± T2) /T2 100.

the calorific value of stored coal (a) decreases (b) increases (c) remains unaltered (d) may increase or decrease (depends on the method of storage) 9. As time passes.4. its height should be (a) 200 meters (b) infinitely long (c) more than 105. Oxygen percentage (by weight) in atmospheric air is (b) 21 (a) 19 (c) 23 (d) 29 6. A particular coal is said to be free burning when it (a) burns completely (b) gives smokeless burning (c) shows little or no fusing action (d) none of these 8. For maximum discharge through a chimney. it is called (a) carbonization of coal (b) oxidation of coal (c) coalification (d) gasification of coal . When steam is passed over coal resulting in the endothermic reaction (C + H2O ----CO + H2). Use of pulverized coal in boiler furnace provides (a) high calorific value (b) better combustion (c) smokeless burning (d) pulverized coal 11.7 meters (d) equal to the height of the hot gas column producing draught 5. Which of the following accounts for maximum energy loss in a boiler (a) flue gases (b) ash content in the fuel (c) incomplete combustion (d) unburnt carbon in flue gases 13. Which of the following fuels is best for burning on chain grate smoker? (a) non caking coal (b) caking coal (c) coking coal (d) pulverized coal 12. Emission of dense white smoke out of chimney of a thermal power plant is an indication of the use of (a) less air for combustion (b) correct amount of air for combustion (c) too much air for combustion (d) pulverized coal in boilers 10. Stack (chimney) height in a big thermal power plant is dictated by (a) pollution control aspect (b) draught to be created (c) limitation of constructional facilities (d) none of these 7. ³Over-fire burning´ in a furnace is a phenomenon characterized by (a) supply of excess fuel (b) supply of excess air (c) burning carbon monoxide and other incombustible in upper zone of furnace by supplying more air (d) none of these 14.

The advantage of firing pulverized coal in the furnace lies in the fact that if (a) permits the use of high ash content of coal (b) permits the use of low fusion point ash coal (c) accelerates the burning rate and economizes on fuel combustion (d) all of the above 20. depends on the type of fuel 23. Commercial production of petrol from coal (as practiced in a factory at Sasol in South Africa) is done by (a) hydrogenation of coal (b) gasification of coal (c) carbonization of coal (d) none of these 17. the secondary air serves the main purpose of (a) transportation of coal (b) drying of coal (c) combustion of coal by supplying in around the burner (d) pre-heating the primary air 18. Adiabatic flame temperature of a fuel is dependant on the initial temperature of (a) the fuel (b) the air (c) both fuel and the air (d) neither fuel nor the air . In case pulverized coal from steam boiler. Pick out the wrong statement (a) Theoretical flame temperature is temperature attained by the products of combustion when the fuel is burned without loss or gain of heat (b) Burning the fuel with theoretically required amount of pure oxygen results in attainment of maximum adiabatic flame temperature (c) Burning the fuel with excess pure oxygen results in maximum theoretical flame temperature (d) Adiabatic flame temperatures of actual combustions are always less than maximum values 22. The maximum adiabatic flame temperature in air compared to that in pure oxygen is (a) much lower (b) much higher (c) same (d) either lower or higher.15. The main function of primary air in pulverized coal fired burner is to (a) burn CO to CO2 (b) dry transport of the coal (c) have proper combustion by supplying it around the burner (d) pre-heat the tertiary air used for complete combustion of CO to CO2 19. Fischer-Tropsch method aims at (a) gasification of coal (b) synthesis of gasoline (from water gas) (c) hydrogenation of coal to produce gasoline (d) none of these 16. Orsat apparatus is meant for (a) gravimetric analysis of flue gas (b) finding out combustion efficiency (c) direct determination of nitrogen in flue gas by absorbing it in ammoniacal cuprous chloride (d) none of these 21.

A coal containing high amount of volatile matter will have (a) low ignition temperature (b) very little content (c) high fusion point of its ash (d) low adiabatic flame temperature .24. Grindability index of a coal is 100. Its gross calorific value as compared to the net calorific value will be (a) more (b) less (c) same (d) data insufficient. the adiabatic flame temperature will be (a) low (b) high (c) very high if fuel is of low calorific value (d) none of these 31. can¶t be predicted 27. Calorific value (kcal/kg) of dry wood may be around (b) 50 (a) 5 (c) 500 (d) 5000 32. Preheating of (a) the gaseous fuel before combustion decreases the flame temperature (b) Combustion air decreases the flame temperature (c) either the fuel or the air or both increases the flame temperature (d) either the fuel or the air does not affect the flame temperature 25. depends on the quantity of products of combustion 29. If the specific heat of gaseous products of combustion of a fuel is high. Removal of hydrogen from coke oven gas (a) increases its calorific value (b) decreases its calorific value (c) does not alter its calorific value (d) is not possible on commercial scale 28. their adiabatic flame temperatures (a) increase (b) decrease (c) remain unchanged (d) may increase or decrease. With increase in calorific value of fuels. A fuel containing carbon and carbon monoxide (but containing the hydrogen or its compounds) is burnt in pure oxygen at constant pressure. It implies that the (a) coal can be pulverized with great difficulty (b) coal can¶t be pulverized (c) coal can easily be pulverized (d) power consumption in grinding the coal will be very high 30. The fuel ratio of a coal is (a) the ratio of its percentage of fixed carbon to that of volatile matter (b) helpful in estimation of its rank (c) both (a) and (b) (d) neither (a) nor (b) 26.

During combustion of gaseous fuel deficiency of air (a) lengthens the flame (c) does not affect the flame length (a) heat losses (b) long flame (c) condensation of water vapor from the flue gas (d) none of these 37. Use of excess of combustion air in the combustion of fuels results in 38. cleanliness and relatively low distribution cost (due to its low specific gravity) (b) adiabatic flame temperature (c) heat release rate (thus requiring smaller combustion chamber) (d) all of the above .Which of the following is called ³blue gas´? (a) coke oven gas (b) water gas (c) natural gas (d) producer gas (produced using Kopper Totzek gasifier).33. A gaseous fuel in order to develop luminosity on burning.000 Nm3 40. Preheating of gaseous fuel results in increased 39. Steam is intermittently admitted in to the fuel bed during the production of producer gas to (a) convert CO to CO2 (b) increase in combustion rate (c) increase the gas production rate (d) minimize the chances of clinker formation 34. 35. must contain (a) carbon monoxide (c) hydrogen (a) flame length (c) quantum of flue gas (b) hydrocarbons (d) oxygen (b) flame temperature (d) ignition temperature (b) tends to shorten the flame (d) increases the flame temperature 36. Quantity of coke oven gas produced by high temperature carbonization of one ton of dry coal may be around (a) 30 Nm3 (c) 3000 Nm3 (b) 300 Nm3 (d) 30. Coke oven gas is a better fuel than blast furnace gas because of its higher (a) calorific value.

Combustion of pulverized coal as compared to that of lump coal 43. Which of the following constituents of fuel does not contribute to its calorific value on combustion (a) hydrogen (c) carbon (a) develops a non-luminous flame (c) can be done with less excess air (b) sulfur (d) none of these (b) develops a low temperature flame (d) provides a lower rate of heat release 42.87 ft3 47. (b). Dry air required to burn one lb of carbon completely may be around 46. Which of the following is the most important deterrents to an extended use of pulverized coal in boiler firing? (a) ash disposal problem (b) excessive fly-ash discharge from the stack (c) high power consumption in its transportation (d) erosion of induced draft fan blades 44.4 ft3 45.67 lb (d) none of these (b) 1.41.75 ft3 (d) 11. High excess air in combustion of fuels results in .4 ft3 (c) 0. and (c) 48. Most of coking coals are (a) anthracite coal (c) lignite (a) increased fuel consumption (c) smoky flame (b) bituminous coal (d) none of these (b) incomplete combustion (d) none of these (b) coke oven gas (d) oil refinery gas (b) high fusion point of its ash (d) lower ash constant (b) 2. Washing of coal (a) reduces its sulfur and ash content (b) controls its ash fusibility and increases its calorific value (c) improves its coking properties (d) all (a). Dry air requirement for burning 1 ft3 of CO to CO2 may be around 50. Which of the following has the highest gross calorific value? (a) blast furnace gas (c) carburetted water gas 49. Pulverized coal used in boiler firing need have (a) less moisture content (c) high bulk density (a) 11.5 lb (c) 16 lb (a) 2.

Fusion of point coal ash increases in its (a) iron sulfate content (c) lime and magnesia content (b) iron silicate content (d) all (a). Out of the following fuels. (b) and (c) .5 (c) 3 (a) 0. Ash content in the coke produced from a coking coal having 20% ash may be around 54. For every 10% increase in the excess air. Rate of temperature oxidation of coal due to bad storage conditions (a) decrease with increase in surface area (b) does not vary with increase in surface area (c) is more for low volatile coal compared to high volatile coal (d) is accelerated by storage in large heaps with small surface to volume ratio 59. Low temperature oxidation of coal resulting from bad storage conditions does not decrease its (a) caking power (c) hydrogen content (a) low preheat of air (c) high excess air (b) calorific value (d) oxygen content (b) fine grinding (d) all (a). the difference between the net and gross calorific value is maximum in case of (a) pitch (c) blast furnace gas (b) fuel oil (d) bituminous gas 55.1% (c) 5% (a) 5% (c)17% (b) 2 (d) 5 (b) 2% (d) 10% (b) 2% (d) 25% 52. Efficient burning of anthracite coal requires 58. Atomizing steam to fuel oil ratio in a burner should be around (a) 0. (b) and (c) 56. Spontaneous combustion of coal on storage results due to (a) inadequate ventilation (b) low temperature oxidation (c) storage in large heaps with small surface to volume ratio (d) all (a). (b) and (c) 57. the fuel consumption increases by 53.51.

Higher percentage of ash in coal meant for the production of metallurgical grade coke (a) increases the hardness of coke (b) increases the abrasion resistance of coke (c) causes brittleness in steel (d) none of these (b) bitumen (d) none of these . Which of the following is not a binder for coal briquetting? (a) coal tar (c) molasses 65. Which of the following can be made into briquettes without the use of a binder (a) lignite (c) anthracite coal (b) bituminous coal (d) none of these 63. Highly caking coals (a) produce weak coke (b) produce strong coke (c) may damage the coke oven walls during carbonization (d) both (b) and (c) 66. A coal having high ratio of volatile matter to fixed carbon as compared to a coal having low ratio of volatile matter to fixed carbon (a) is less liable to spontaneous combustion on storage (b) is more difficult to ignite and produces a shorter flame (c) requires smaller combustion space and less secondary air (d) none of these 62. Which of the following accentuates clinkering trouble on furnace grate burning coal (a) low density of carbonized residue containing high proportions of iron and sulfur (b) low forced draught and fuel bed temperature (c) thick fire and preheated primary air (d) all (a). (b) and (c) 61.g.60. Presence of free moisture in coal is most disadvantageous during (a) its pulverization (as it requires more power) (b) combustion of fine slacks on the grates (c) handling (e. when emptying wagons) (d) none of these 64. Presence of free moisture in coal during its high temperature carbonization (a) reduces the coking time (b) protects the volatile products from pyrolysis (cracking) in the presence of hot coke and hot oven walls (c) increases the loss of fine coal dust from the ovens when charging (d) none of these 67.

g. the «««. in Lurgi gasifier) (d) atmospheric pressure gasification of coal (e. Lurgi gasifier (high pressure gasifier) as compared to Kopper-Totzek gasifier (atmospheric pressure gasifier) produces (a) higher amount of methane (b) lower amount of hydrogen (c) both (a) and (b) (d) higher amount of both methane and hydrogen 75. With the increase in carbonization temperature (a) gas yield increases (b) tar yield increases (c) hydrogen percentage in the coke oven gas decreases (d) methane percentage in the coke oven gas increases 71. Fill up the blank With increase in time of carbonization at a particular temperature (say 1000rC ).. High sulfur content in a fuel (a) increases the dew point of the flue gases (b) decreases the dew point of the flue gases (c) reduces combustion efficiency by limiting the permissible temperature reduction of the flue gases (d) both (a) and (c) 70. (b) and (c) 72.g. in Kopper-Totzek gasifier) 73. Which of the following constituents of coal is most important in the production of coke (a) moisture (c) volatiles (b) ash (d) carbon . Producer gas containing least amount of tar is produced by (a) partial combustion of coal (b) partial combustion of large size (<50mm) (c) high pressure gasification of coal (e. High temperature in gasification of coal favors (a) high production of CO2 (b) low production of CO2 (c) high production of CO (d) both (b) and (c) 74. percentage in coke oven gas increases (a) hydrogen (c) unsaturates (b) methane (d) all (a). Increases in ash content of blast furnace coke (a) reduces its consumption in the furnace (b) increases its consumption in the furnace (c) does not affect its consumption in the furnace (d) decreases its hardness and abrasion resistance 69.68.

Percentage of hydrogen in coke oven gas may be around 84. Percentage of carbon monoxide in blast furnace gas may be around 83. Coke oven gas compared to blast furnace gas is . Purity of coke means that it is high in carbon and low in 79. Percentage of methane in coke oven gas may be around 85. A coal that softens and fuses on heating in 78.76. (b) and (c) 77. Blast furnace gas is a very poisonous gas because of its predominantly high 82. Calorific value (kcal/Nm3) of blast furnace gas is around 81.5 (c) 20 (a) 1 (c) 20 (a) 1 (c) 25 (a) more explosive and inflammable (c) lighter (b) low temperature coke (d) sub-bituminous coal (b) carbonized (d) non-caking (b) ash (d) moisture (b) 4500 (d) 2000 (b) 1800 (d) 6500 (b) CO2 content (d) CH4 content (b) 5 (d) 55 (b) 5 (d) 50 (b) 10 (d) 55 (b) less poisonous (d) all (a). Which of the following is most reactive (as regards the formation of CO + H2 from C + H2O)? (a) blast furnace coke (c) anthracite coal (a) classified (c) caking (a) volatiles (c) iron (a) 900 (c) 7500 (a) 900 (c) 4500 (a) H2S content (c) CO content (a) 0. Calorific value (kcal/Nm3) of coke oven furnace gas is around 80.

Which is the heaviest fuel gas out of the following? 89. O2. CO (b) sub-bituminous coal (d) peat (b) ammonia (d) coke oven gas 88.86. Which of the following has the highest calorific value? 95. CO2 (d) O2. CO2. Which of the following will generate maximum volume of product of complete combustion (Nm3/Nm3 of fuel)? (a) carburetted water gas (c) natural gas (a) blast furnace gas (c) water gas (a) combustion (c) nuclear fusion (a) Nickel (c) Alumina (a) potassium hydroxide (c) alkaline pyrogallol solution (a) potassium hydroxide (c) cuprous chloride (a) CO2. Which of the following gases will require maximum amount of air for combustion of 1 Nm3 gas? (a) blast furnace gas (c) producer gas (b) natural gas (d) water gas 87. In the flue gas analysis by Orsat¶s apparatus. µFuel can be defined as a substance which produces heat by 90. (b) and (c) (b) Zinc oxide (d) Thorium oxide (b) cuprous chloride (d) none of these (b) dilute potassium carbonate (d) alkaline pyrogallol solution (b) CO. CO (c) CO2. In flue gas analysis by Orsat¶s apparatus. The main product of high temperature carbonization is . O2 (a) lignite (c) anthracite (a) coke (c) tar (b) blast furnace gas (d) producers gas (b) coke oven gas (d) carburetted water gas (b) nuclear fission (d) all (a). O2. carbon dioxide is absorbed by 93. CO. Catalyst used in Fisher-Tropsch process is 91. oxygen is absorbed by 92. The sequence of absorption in flue gas analysis by Orsat¶s apparatus is respectively 94.

volatile matter. In contact process. nitrogen. sulfur. ash. nitrogen. ash. volatile matter (b) moisture. volatile matter.96. sulfur. ash. hydrogen. fixed carbon (c) moisture. SO3 is absorbed in 97% H2SO4 and not in water because (a) SO3 gas is sparingly soluble in water (b) water forms an acid mist which is difficult to absorb (c) the purity of acid is affected (d) scale formation in absorber is to be avoided . nitrogen carbon. Proximate analysis of determines (a) moisture. volatile matter. Low temperature carbonization takes place at 99. Catalysts used in the manufacture of sulfuric acid by chamber and contact processes are respectively (a) V2O5 and Cr2O3 (b) Oxides of nitrogen and Cr2O3 (c) V2O5 on a porous carrier and oxides of nitrogen (d) oxides of nitrogen and V2O5 on a porous carrier 2. High temperature carbonization produces (a) inferior coke compared to low temperature carbonization (b) less of gases compared to liquid products (c) large quantity of tar compared to low temperature carbonization (d) none of these 97. ash carbon. High temperature carbonization takes place at (a) 2000rC (c) 1100 rC (a) 300 rC (c) 500-650 rC (b) 600 rC (d) 1600 rC (b) 1100 rC (d) 150 rC 98. ash. sulfur. moisture CHEMICAL PROCESS INDUSTRIES 1. sulfur. Ultimate analysis of coal determines (a) (b) (c) (d) carbon. sulfur carbon. fixed carbon (d) none of these 100.

there are 20 lb. MgO. Producer gas consists mainly of (a) CO. Fe2O3 (d) CaO. Oxygen is produced by fraction of air using (a) Linde's process (b) Claude's process (c) both Linde's and Claude's process (d) Bayer's process 7. H2 (c) H2. Cement mainly contains (a)CaO. Economics of 'Solvay Process" depends upon the efficiency of (a) carbonating tower (b) ammonia recovery (c) ammonia recovery and size of plant (d) ammoniation of salt solution 9. SiO2.ammonia and coke oven gas (b) ammonia. Al2O3 (b) MgO. N2. Mercury cells for caustic soda manufacture compared to diaphragm cells (a) require lower initial investment (b) require more power (c) produce lower concentration of NaOH (d) none of these 10. K2O . H2 6.. K2O (c) Al2O3. 20% Oleum means that in 100 lb.3. SiO2. MgO. CO2. CO2. Raw materials for 'Solvay Process' for manufacture of the soda ash are (a) salt. Contact process (a) yields acid of higher concentration than chamber process (b) yields acids of lower concentration than chamber process (c) is obsolete (d) eliminates absorber 4. CH4 (d) C2H2. of (a) SO3 and 80 lb of H2SO4 (b) H2SO4 and 80 lb SO3 (c) SO3 for each 100 lb of H2SO4 (d) H2SO4 and 80 lb SO3 5. H2 (b) CO. limestone . salt and limestone (c) ammonia. limestone and coke (d) ammonia and coke oven gas 8.

Gypsum is (a) calcium chloride (b) potassium sulfate (c) sodium sulfate (d) calcium sulfate 12. Wax is (a) a mixture of glycerides (b) a mixture of esters of polyhydric alcohols except glycerin (c) liquid at room temperature (d) a mixture of glycerides of fatty acids . Trinitro-toluene is (a) used in glycerin manufacture (b) an explosive (c) used in dye manufacture (d) used in paint manufacture 17. Hydrazine is largely used (a) as a starting material for 'hypo' (b) in photographic industry (c) as rocket fuel (d) in printing industry 16. Oil is (a) a mixture of glycerides (b)a mixture of glycerides of fatty acids (c) solid at normal temperature (d) ester of alcohols other than glycerin 18.11. Widely used method for conditioning of boiler feed water is (a) cold lime process (b) coagulation (c) hot-lime soda process (d) sequestration 15. Permanent hardness of water is due to the presence of calcium and magnesium (a) bi-carbonates (b)sulfates and chlorides (c) carbonate (d) chlorides 14. Glauber's salt is (a) calcium sulfate (b) potassium sulfate (c) potassium chlorate (d)sodium sulfate decahydrate 13.

Rancidity of oil can be reduced by (a) decoloration (b) hydrogenation (c) oxidation (d) purification 21. Catalyst used in hydrogenation of oil is (a) nickel (b) platinum (c) iron (d) alumina 25. Unsaturated oils compared to saturated oils have (a) lower melting point and higher reactivity to oxygen (b) higher melting point and higher reactivity to oxygen (c) lower melting point and lower reactivity to oxygen (d) higher melting point and lower reactivity to oxygen 20. Soaps remove dirt by (a) increasing the surface tension (b) decreasing wettability (c) supplying hydrophilic group (d) none of these 26. Metallic soap is (a) sodium salt of fatty acids (b) potassium salt of fatty acids (c) both sodium and potassium salt of fatty acids (d) aluminum or calcium salt of fatty acids . Hydrogenation of oil does not (a) remove double bonds (b) rise in melting point (c) improve its resistance oxidation (d) none of these 24. Solvent extracted oil (a) has low free fatty acid-content (b) is odorless (c) has more of unsaturated oil (d) none of these 23. Solvent used for extraction of oil is (a) hexane (b) methyl ethyl ketone (c) furfural (d) benzene 22.19.

27. Fat splitting catalyst is (a) CaCO3 (b) ZnO (c) alumina (d) iron 28. Essential oils are usually obtained using (a) steam distillation (b) extractive distillation (c) solvent extraction (d) leaching . Soap cannot be used with hard water because (a) hard water contains sulfate (b) they form insoluble calcium soaps which precipitate (c) they attract back the removed dirt (d) they increase the surface tension 30. using (a) activated carbon (b) diatomaceous earth (c) bauxite (d) bentonite 34. Yellow glycerin is made into white. Free alkali in toilet soap is (a) less than that in a laundry soap (b) more than that in a laundry soap (c) same as that in a laundry soap (d) not present in laundry soap 29. Bio-degradable detergents (a) can be readily oxidized (b) pose problem in sewerage plant (c) have an isoparaffinic structure (d) should not be used as it spoils the cloth 32. Builders are added in soap to (a) boost cleaning power (b) act as anti-redeposition agent (c) act as corrosion inhibitor (d) acts as fabric brightener 31. Which of the following is a detergent? (a) fatty alcohol (b) alkyl benzene sulfonate (c) fatty acids (d) methyl chloride 33.

Plasticizers are added to paints to (a) make it corrosion resistant (b) make glossy surface (c) give elasticity and prevent cracking of the film (d) increase atmospheric oxidation 36. Function of thinner in a paint is to (a) accelerate the oxidation of oil (b) prevent gelling of the paint (c) suspend pigments and dissolve film-forming materials (d) form a protective film 38. Which oil is preferred for paint manufacture? (a) drying oil (b) non-drying oil (c) semi-drying oil (d) saturated oil 37.35. The ideal pulp for the manufacture of paper should have high (a) cellulose content (b) lignin content (c) both (a) and (b) (d) neither (a) nor (b) . SO2 is bubbled through hot sugar-cane juice to (a) act as an acidifying agent (b) increase its concentration (c) increase the amount of molasses (d) increase the crystal size 41. Enamels (a) give good glossy finish (b) are same as varnish (c) are prepared from non-drying oil (d) do not contain pigment 40. Molasses is the starting material for (a) alcohol (b) essential oil (c) fatty acids (d) ether 42. Varnish does not contain (a) pigment (b) thinner (c) dryer (d) anti-skinning agent 39.

we find that (a) both temperature and pressure in former is less than that in the latter (b) both temperature and pressure in former is more than that in the latter (c) temperature is more in former whereas pressure is more in the latter (d) pressure is more in the former whereas temperature is less in the latter 45. Sizing material is incorporated in paper to (a) impart resistance to penetration by liquids (b) increase its thickness (c) increase its flexibility and opacity (d) increase its brightness 50.43. white cooking liquor consists of caustic soda (a) sodium sulfide. In Kraft process of paper manufacture. Which is a high-grade pulp? (a) rag pulp (b) mechanical pulp (c) sulfate pulp (d) sulfite pulp 47. Viscose rayon is (a) cellulose nitrate (b) regenerated cellulose nitrate (c) regenerated cellulose acetate (d)regenerated cellulose fiber . Comparing sulfate process with sulfite process. Cooking liquor in case of sulfite process is (a) sodium sulfite and sodium bisulfite (b) magnesium sulfite and free SO2 in acid medium (c) magnesium sulfate and magnesium bicarbonate (d) sodium bisulfite 46. sodium sulfide (d) and sodium carbonate 44. sodium carbonate (c) sodium sulfite. sodium carbonate (b) sodium sulfite. Bleaching of paper pulp is done with (a) activated clay (b) bromine (c) chlorine or chlorine dioxide (d) magnesium sulfite 49. Which of the following paper does not require a filler during manufacture? (a) bond paper (b) writing paper (c) blotting paper (d) colored paper 48.

sulfur (b) carbon. fixed carbon (d) carbon. Ultimate analysis of coal determines (a) moisture. hydrogen. ash (d) carbon. nitrogen. ash. ash. moisture 58. volatile matter (b) moisture. hydrogen. ash. sulfur.5000ºF (b) 950ºF (c) > 1650ºF (d) < 1000ºF 55. Proximate analysis of coal determines (a) moisture.1100ºF (d) 2500 F 56. sulfur. High temperature carbonization takes place at (a) 4000 . Low temperature carbonization takes place at (a) 500ºF (b) 1300ºF (c) 750 . ash 57. sulfur. nitrogen. sulfur. volatile matter (c) moisture.volatile matter. Washing of coal is done to (a) remove the inherent impurities (b) remove the adhering impurities (c) reduce the ash content (d) both b and c . High temperature carbonization produces (a) inferior coke compared to low temperature carbonization (b) less of gases compared to liquid products (c) larger quantity of tar compared to low temperature carbonization (d) relatively low tar and yields of gaseous products are larger than the yield of liquid products 54.nitrogen (c) carbon.51. volatile matter. The main product of high temperature carbonization is (a) Coke (b) Ammonia (c) Tar (d) Phenol 53. Which of the following coal has the highest calorific value? (a) Lignite (b) Sub-bituminous (c) Anthracite (d) Peat 52.

A good quality coal should have (a) low fusion point of ash (b) high ash content (c) high sulfur content (d) none of these 60. CO (d) CH4. The catalyst used in shift converter is (a) nickel (b) vanadium (c) silica gel (d) alumina 64. CO2 (c) H2. The gasification reaction C + H2O (a) exothermic (b)endothermic (c) catalytic (d) autocatalytic 65. In Lurgi gasifier (a) cooking coals cannot be used (b) low carbon conversion efficiency is achieved (c) entrainment of solids is higher (d) large quantity of coal can be processed 63. The combustion reaction C + O2 (a) exothermic (b) endothermic (c) autocatalytic (d) catalytic 66. Coke oven gas consists mainly of (a) H2.59. CO 61. Lurgi coal gasifier is a pressurized (a) moving bed reactor (b) fixed bed reactor (c) fluidized bed reactor (d) entrained bed reactor 62. CH4 (b) CO. Kopper-Totzek coal gasifier (a) can give ammonia synthesis gas (b) is a moving bed reactor (c) cannot use cooking coal (d) operate at very high pressure CO + H2 is CO2 is .

Which is the most suitable dye for synthetic fibers? (a) acid dye (b) azoic dye (c) pigment dye (d) mordant dye 73. Phthalic anhydride is made by (a) Oxidation of naphthalene (b) Oxidation of benzene (c) Dehydrogenation of ethyl benzene (d) Oxidation of toluene 71. Trinitrotoluene (TNT). The major use of butadiene is (a) as a plasticizer for unsaturated polyester (b) in the manufacture of synthetic rubber (c) as an anti-skinning agent in paint (d) as corrosion inhibitor 69. Fumigant insecticides (a) kill insects when they eat it (b) emit poisonous vapor (c) are absorbed throughout the plant (d) are stomach poisons 74. Phenol is mainly used (a) to produce benzene (b) to produce phenol formaldehyde (c) to produce polyester resin (d) as a plasticizer for unsaturated polyester 70. an explosive. is made by nitration of (a) nitrobenzene (b) toluene (c) nitrotoluene (d) benzene 72. Acrylonitrile is mainly used in (a) polymer industry (b) printing industry (c) dyeing industry (d) photographic industry 68. Systemics insecticides (a) are absorbed throughout the plant (b) kill insects following external bodily contact (c) are stomach poisons (d) emit poisonous vapor .67.

Molecular weights of polymers are in the range of (a) 10 .1000 (b) 105 .75.107 (d) 105 . Antibiotic (a) prohibits/destroys the growth of micro-organism (b) is used as pain reliever (c) is an anti-malaria (d) is an anaesthetic 79. Penicillin is made employing (a) continuous fermentation process (b)aerobic batch fermentation (c) anaerobic batch fermentation (d) aerobic or anaerobic batch fermentation 80.109 (c) 103 . Analgesic drugs are (a) pain relievers (b) antibiotics (c) used in the treatment of TB (d) used in the treatment of typhoid 78.107 82. Which of the following is not an antibiotic? (a) penicillin (b) streptomycin (c) tetracyclin (d)quinine 81. BHC (Benzene hexa-chloride) is made by chlorination of benzene (a) which is an addition reaction (b) which is a substitution reaction (c) in absolute dark (d) in presence of sunlight 77. DDT stands (a) diethyl-diphenyl-trichloromethane (b) dichloro-diphenyl-trichloromethane (c) diphenyl-dichloro-trichloromethane (d)dichloro-diphenyl-trichloroethane 76. Zeigler process (a) produces high density polyethylene (b) produces low density polyethylene (c) uses no catalyst (d) employs very high pressure .

Most commonly used rubber vulcanizing agent is (a) sulfur (b) bromine (c) platinum (d) alumina 88. Nylon 6-6 is manufactured from (a) hexamethylene diamine adipic acid (b) hexamethylene diamine and maleic anhydride (c) caprolactam (d) dimethyl terephthalate and ethylene glycol . Epoxy resin (a) is a good adhesive (b) is an elastomer (c) cannot be used on surface coatings (d) is a polyester 86. Styrene butadiene rubber (SBR) is (a) a natural rubber (b)a synthetic polymer (c) a synthetic monomer (d) another name for silicon rubber 89. Phenol formaldehyde (a) employs addition polymerization (b)employs condensation polymerization (c) is a monomer (d) is an abrasive material 85. Vulcanization of rubber (a) decreases its tensile strength (b) increases its ozone and oxygen reactivity (c) increases its oil and solvent resistant (d)converts its plasticity into elasticity 87. Nylon-6 is manufactured from (a) caprolactam (b) hexamethylene diamine and adipic acid (c) hexamethylene diamine and maleic anhydride (d) hexamethylene diamine and sebacic acid 90.83. Poly-Vinyl Chloride (PVC) is (a) thermosetting (b) thermoplastic (c) a fibrous material (d) chemically active 84.

Thermosetting materials (a) are capable of becoming permanently rigid when heated or cured (b) soften on application of heat (c) are solvent insoluble (d) are heavily branched molecules 95. Thermoplastic materials (a) do not soften on application of heat (b) are heavily branched molecules (c) are solvent insoluble (d)are capable of softening or fusing when heated and of hardening again when cooled 94.91. Dacron is (a) a polyester (b) an unsaturated polyester (c) a polyamide (d) an inorganic polymer 92. Silicon carbide is (a) an adhesive (b) an abrasive (c) a type of glass (d)brittle 97. Celluloid is (a) cellulose acetate (b) regenerated cellulose (c) cellulose nitrate (d) cellulose acetate butyrate 93. Cumene (Isopropyl benzene) is made by (a) oxidation of naphthalene (b) propylene alkylation of benzene (c) polymerization of a mixture of benzene and propylene (d) polymerization of propylene .4500ºC 98. The temperature in the calcium carbide furnace is (a) 200 .850ºC (c) 2000 -2200ºC (d) 4000 . Type of glass used in optical work is (a) soda-lime glass (b) fiber glass (c) lead glass (d) borosilicate glass 96.300ºC (b) 700 .

Cumene is the starting material for the production of (a) benzoic acid (b) phenol and acetone (c) isoprene (d) styrene 101. Lime and soda ash are added to water to remove (a) bicarbonates and sulfates of calcium and magnesium (b) undesirable taste and odor (c) bacteria (d) its corrosiveness 105. Zeolite used in water softening process (cation exchange) is regenerated by washing with (a) brine (b) chloramines (c) sodium bisulfite (d) liquid chlorines 103. Chloramines are used in water treatment for (a) disinfection and control of taste and odor (b) corrosion control (c) removing turbidity (d) control of bacteria 106. Glycerin can be obtained from (a) fat (b) naphthalene (c) cumene (d) sucrose 100. Presence of H2S in raw water (to be chlorinated) results in (a) reduced softening capacity of zeolite (b) increase dosage of chlorine to provide a disinfecting residual in the water (c) easy removal of its hardness (d) residual turbidity 104. Which of the following is not responsible for causing permanent hardness of water? (a) Ca(HCO3)2 (b) CaCl2 (c) MgCl2 (d) NaCl 102. Deaeration of water in its treatment is necessary as it (a) minimizes its turbidity (b) helps in controlling its taste and odor (c) minimizes its corrosiveness (d) controls bacteria .99.

the turbidity is removed by adding a coagulant prior to sedimentation . combats the corrosiveness of water due to presence of O2 and CO2 (c) is to adjust the pH value (d) all a. The main used of the activated carbon in water treatment is to control (a) bacterial growth (b) taste and odor (c) turbidity (d) corrosion 110. b and c 112. b and c 111. reduces the bacterial load on filters (e) after filtration.107. Dechlorination of treated water is necessary to (a) remove residual turbidity (b) reduce the bacterial load on filter (c) control taste and odor (d) remove chlorinous taste 109. Use of hydrated lime in water treatment (a) before filtration. Sodium Bisulfate is used for (a) deaeration of water (b) dechlorination of water (c) both a and b (d) neither a nor b 108. b and c 113. Pick out the true statement pertaining to water treatment (a) Slow sand filters can remove color completely (b) Activated carbon can be used for taste and odor control without subsequent filtration (c) Application of activated carbon reduces the temporary hardness of water (d) Normally. The purpose of adding Na2CO3 to water of low alkalinity is to (a) permit the use of alum as a coagulant (b) increase the softening capacity of zeolite (c) facilitate the easy regeneration of zeolite (d) all a. Alum [Al2(SO4)3] is used as a coagulant in water treatment to remove (a) color (b) turbidity (c) bacteria (d) all a.

Salt is added in the kettle during soap manufacture to separate (a) soap from lye (b) glycerin from lye (c) the metallic soap (d) the unsaponified fat from soap 118. Pick out the wrong statement pertaining to solvent extraction of oil Rate of extraction . Hydrazine (N2H4) is used mainly as (a) explosive (b) rocket fuel (c) an additive in detergent (d) catalyst 119. is acidic 115. Fats as compared to oils have (a) more unsaturated glycerides of fatty acids (b) less unsaturated glycerides of fatty acids (c) much higher reactivity to oxygen (d) lower melting point 117. Oils are partially hydrogenated (not fully) to manufacture vanaspati. (a) decreases with decrease of thickness of the flakes (b) increases with the increasing flake size keeping the flake thickness constant (c) increases considerably with the rise of temperature (d) decreases as the moisture content of flakes increases 116. because fully saturated solidified oils (a) cause cholesterol build up and blood clotting (b) are prone to rancid oxidation (c) always contain some amount of nickel (as their complete removal is very difficult) (d) have affinity to retain harmful sulfur compounds 120.114. Pick out the false statement pertaining to water treatment (a) Aeration of water is effective in CO2 removal (b) The zeolite water softening process reduces the hardness of water by not more than 50% (c) Sodium sulfate or sodium carbonates do not cause hardness in water (d) Water with pH value less than 7. Hydrogenation of oil takes place in (a) an autothermal reactor (b) a trickle bed reactor (c) a plug flow reactor (d) backmix reactor .

Glycerin is not used in the (a) manufacture of explosive (b) conditioning and humidification of tobacco (c) manufacture of pharmaceuticals (d) manufacture of caustic soda . Temperature during hydrogenation of oil should not be more than 200ºC. Glycerin is recovered from lye by (a) evaporation followed by vacuum distillation (b) liquid extraction technique (c) extractive distillation technique (d) steam distllation 125. b and c 122. otherwise it will result in (a) pyrolysis of oil (b) sintering of porous catalyst (c) hydrogen embrittlement (d)all a. Transparent soaps (e. Pears) are (a) usually soft soaps (made from coconut oil) in which cane sugar and alcohol are added and finally washed with methylate spirit to achieve transparency (b) metallic soaps with frothing agent and free stearic acid to achieve transparency (c) metallic soaps with frothing agent from which glycerin has not been recovered (d) high free alkali soaps having excess of cane sugar and alcohol 124.g.121. Shaving soaps are (a) soft potassium soaps (potassium salt of fatty acid) with free stearic acid to give lather a lasting property (b) metallic soaps compounded with frothing agents (c) high free alkali soaps having excess of cane sugar and alcohol (d) usually soap soaps 123.

c. A fluid is one which (a) cannot remain at rest under the action of shear force (b) continuously expands till it fills any container (c) is incompressible (d) permanently resists distortion 2.) (c) multiplying with specific gravity (d) dividing with specific gravity .) (b) dividing with density (gm/c. Potential flow is characterized by (a) irrotational and frictionless flow (b) irrotational and frictional flow (c) one in which dissipation of mechanical energy into heat occurs (d) the formation of eddies within the stream 5.c. Dimension of viscosity is (a) ML-1T-1 (c) MLT-1T (b) MLT-1 (d) MLT 7. Newton¶s law of viscosity relates (a) shear stress and velocity (b) velocity gradient and pressure intensity (c) shear stress and rate of angular deformation in a fluid (d) pressure gradient and rate of angular deformation 6. Potential flow is the flow of (a) compressible fluids with shear (b) compressible fluids with no shear (c) incompressible fluids with shear (d) incompressible fluids with no shear 4. In an incompressible fluid density (a) is greatly affected by moderate changes in pressure (b) is greatly affected only by moderate changes in temperature (c) remains unaffected with moderate change in temperature and pressure (d) is sensible to changes in both temperature and pressure 3.FLOW OF FLUIDS 1. Poise is converted into stoke by (a) multiplying with density (gm/c.

83 inches of Hg. The center of pressure is (a) always below the centroid of the area (b) always above the centroid of the area (c) a point on the line of action of the resultant force (d) at the centroid of the submerge area 15.3 inches of Hg. The surface inclination is 300 with the horizontal.3 inches of Hg.8). Dimension of kinematic viscosity is (a) ML-2 (b) L2T-1 (c) L2T (d) L2T2 9. (d) 10 psi. the pressure intensity varies as the (a) square of the radial distance (b) radial distance linearly (c) averse of the radial distance (d) elevation along vertical direction 14. of water. With increase in the temperature viscosity of a liquid (a) increase (b) decreases (c) remains constant (d) first decreases and then increases 10. 0. 10 ft.6y (c) 49.7 ft. For water.2y (b) 48y (d) 58y . 19. when the pressure increases the viscosity (a) also increases (b) decreases (c) remains constant (d) first decreases and then increases 11. has the lower 3 edge horizontal and 6¶ below a free oil surface (sp.33 psi. 23.7 ft of water. 8. For a fluid rotating at constant angular velocity about vertical axis as a rigid body. gr. of water. 13. 5.8. 19. 10 ft.7 inches of Hg. 20. A rectangular surface 3¶x4¶. The force in one side of the surface is :(y = specific weight of water) (a) 39. (b) 4. (c) 10 psi. The pressure intensity is the same in all direction at a point in a fluid (a) only when the fluid is frictionless (b) only when the fluid is at rest having zero velocity (c) when there is no motion of one fluid layer relative to an adjacent layer (d) regardless of the motion of one fluid layer relative to an adjacent layer 12.33 psi. of water. Choose the set of pressure intensities that are equivalent (a) 4.

Turbulant flow generally occurs for cases involving (a) highly viscous fluid (c) very slow motion (b) very narrow passages (d) none of these 20.Steady flow occurs when (a) conditions change steadily with time (b) conditions are the same at the adjacent points at any instant (c) conditions do not change with time at any point (d) rate of change of velocity is constant 22. II.22 (d) 125.36 (c) 48. III (b) II. Fill up the blanks A stream tube is that which has ««« cross-section entirely bounded by stream lines. V (c) I. V 23. Which of the following must be followed by the flow of fluid (real or ideal)? (i) Newton¶s law of viscosity (ii) Newton¶s second law of motion (iii) the continuity equation (iv) velocity of boundary must be zero relative to boundary (v) fluid cannot penetrate a boundary (a) I. II. An ideal fluid is (a) frictionless and incompressible (b) one which obeys Newton¶s law of viscosity (c) highly viscous (d) none of these 21. V (d) II. Mass velocity is the independent of temperature and pressure when the flow is (a) unsteady through uncharged cross-section (b) steady through changing cross-section (c) steady and the cross-section is unchanged (d) unsteady ant the cross-section is changed 18. In turbulent flow (a) the fluid particles move in an orderly manner (b) momentum transfer is on molecular scale only (c) shear stress is caused more effectively by cohesion than momentum transfer (d) shear stresses are generally larger than in a similar laminar flow 19.16. III.6 . III. (a) a circular (b) any convenient (c) a small (d) a large 17.65 (b) 32. Discharge (ft3/sec) from a 24 inch pipe of water at 10 ft/sec will be (a) 7.

000 (d) none of these 31.f/sec 25. The momentum correction factor for the velocity distribution of laminar flow is (a) 1. The loss due to sudden expansion is (a) V12 ± V22 (b) (V1 ± V2)3 2gc 2gC (c) V1 ± V2 (d) none of these 2gc 29.66 (c) 1 (d) 2 27.24. Shear stress in a fluid flowing in a round pipe (a) varies parabolically across the cross-section (b) remains constant over the cross-section (c) is zero at the center and varies linearly with the radius (d) is zero at the wall and increase linearly to the center .5 (d) none of these 28.m (b) ft-lb/ft3 (d) ft-lb. The value of critical Reynolds number for pipe flow is (b) 10.3 (b) 1. Bernoulli¶s equation describes (a) mechanical energy balance in potential flow (b) kinetic energy balance in laminar flow (c) mechanical energy balance in turbulent flow (d) mechanical energy balance in boundary layer 26.66 (c) 2.000 (a) 1300 (c) 100. The loss due to sudden contraction is proportional to (a) velocity (b) velocity head (c) turbulence (d) none of these 30. The kinetic energy correction factor for velocity distribution of laminar flow is (a) 0. Reynolds number flow of water at room temperature through 2 cm diameter pipe at average velocity of 5 cm/sec is around (a) 2000 (b) 10 (c) 100 (d) 1000 32.5 (b) 1. The unit velocity head is (a) ft-lb/sec (c) ft-lbf/lb.

Boundary layer separation is caused by (a) reduction of pressure below vapor pressure (b) reduction of pressure gradient to zero (c) an adverse pressure gradient (d) reduction of boundary layer thickness to zero 35. Hydraulic radius of 6´ x 12´ c/s is (b) 0.5´ (a) 2´ (c) 1.33. Mach. Discharge in laminar flow through a pipe varies (a) as the square of the radius (b) inversely as the pressure drop (c) inversely as the velocity (d) as the square of the diameter 34. in hydraulically smooth pipe. Hydraulic radius is the ratio of (a) wetted perimeter to flow area (b) flow area to wetted perimeter (c) flow area to square of wetted perimeter (d) square root of flow area to wetted perimeter 38.5´ (d) none of these 39. For a given Reynolds number. Reynolds number is the ratio of (a) viscous forces to gravity forces (b) inertial forces to viscous forces (c) viscous forces to inertial forces (d) inertial forces to gravity forces 40. The friction factor for turbulent flow in a hydraulically smooth pipe (a) depends only on Reynolds number (b) does not depend on Reynolds number (c) depends on the roughness (d) none of these 36. further smoothing (a) brings about no further reduction of friction factor (b) increases the friction factor (c) decreases the friction factor (d) none of these 37. number is the ratio of the speed of the (a) fluid of that of the light (b) light to that of the fluid (c) fluid to that of thesound (d) sound to that of the fluid .

41. Pick out the correct statement. Power loss in an orifice meter is (a) less than that in a venturi meter (b) same as that in a venturi meter (c) more than that in a venturi meter (d) data insufficient. f = 16/NRe is valid for (a) turbulent flow (b) laminar flow through an open channel (c) steady flow (d) none of these 45. The friction factor for rough pipe is f1 and that for smooth pipe is f2. Consider two pipes of same length and diameter through which water is passed at the same velocity. continuous flow states that (a) total pressure at all sections is same (b) total energy at all section is same (c) velocity head at all section is same (d) none of these 48.5 Vav (d) Vav = 2 Vmax 44. Drag is defined as the force exerted by the (a) fluid on the solid in a direction opposite to flow (b) the fluid on the solid in the direction of flow (c) the solid on the fluid (d) none of these . cannot be predicted 42. Isotropic turbulence occurs (a) where there is no velocity gradient (b) at higher temperatures (c) only in newtonion fluid (d) none of these 46. (a) f1 = f2 (b) f1 < f2 (d) data not sufficient to relate f1 and f2 (c) f1 > f2 47. Bernoulli¶s equation for steady frictionless. For laminar flow through a closed conduit (b) Vmax = Vav (a) Vmax = 2 Vav (c) Vmax = 1. The velocity profile for turbulent flow through a closed conduit is (b) parabolic (a) logarithmic (c) hyperbolic (d) linear 43.

p 52.079 Re.p (c) CD = 18. Drag co-efficient for flow past immersed body is the ratio of (a) shear stress to the product of velocity head density (b) shear force to the product of velocity head and density (c) average drag per unit projected area to the product of velocity head and density (d) none of these 50.49.4 (d) CD = 0. For flow of fluid through packed bed. Drag co-efficient CD is given by (in Stoke¶s law range) (a) CD = 16 (b) CD = 24 Re. At low Reynolds number (a) viscous forces are unimportant (b) viscous forces control (c) viscous forces control and inertial forces are unimportant (d) gravity forces control 53. Pressure drop in a packed bed for turbulent flow is given by (a) Kozeny-Carman equation (b) Blake-Plummer equation (c) Leva¶s equation (d) none of these . At high Reynolds number (a) inertial forces control and viscous forces are unimportant (b) viscous forces predominate (c) inertial forces are unimportant and viscous forces control (d) none of these 54.p Re. Stoke¶s law is valid when the particle Reynolds number is (a) < 1 (b) > 1 (d) none of these (c) < 5 51. the superficial velocity is (a) less than the average velocity through channels (b) more than the average velocity through channels (c) dependent on the pressure drop across the bed (d) same as the average velocity through channels 55. Pressure drop in a packed bed for laminar flow is given by (a) Kozeny-Carman equation (b) Blake-Plummer equation (c) Leva¶s equation (d) none of these 56.p Re.

Force acting on a particle settling in fluid are (a) gravitational and bouyant forces (b) centrifugal and drag forces (c) gravitational or centrifugal.5 62.57. the slope of CD ± log NRe. drag and viscous forces 58. Drag co-efficient in hindered settling is (a) lesser than in free settling (b) equal to that in free settling (c) not necessarily greater than in free settling (d) greater than free settling 61. In continuous fluidization (a) solids are completely entrained (b) the pressure drop less than that for batch fluidisation (c) there is no entrainment of solids (d) velocity of the fluid is very small 63. bouyant and drag forces (d) external. Terminal velocity is (a) a constant velocity with no acceleration (b) a fluctuating velocity (c) attained after moving one-haft of total distance (d) none of these 59.5 (d) ±0. In hindered settling. Pressure drop in fluidized bed reactor is (a) less than that in a similar packed bed reactor (b) more than that in a similar packed bed reactor (c) same as that in a similar packed bed reactor (d) none of these . plot is (a) 1 (b) ±1 (c) 0. particles are (a) placed farther from wall (b) not affected by other particles and the wall (d) none of these (c) near each other 60. For the free settling of a spherical particle through a fluid.

Minimum porosity for fluidization is (a) that corresponding to static bed (b) that corresponding to completely fluidized bed (c) the porosity of the bed when true fluidization begins (d) less than that of the static bed 66. Priming needed in a (a) reciprocating pump (c) centrifugal pump (b) gear pump (d) diaphragm pump 71. Cavitation occurs in a centrifugal pump when (a) the suction pressure < vapour pressure of the liquid at that temperature (b) the suction pressure > vapour pressure of the liquid at that temperature (c) the suction pressure = vapour pressure (d) the suction pressure = developed head 69. Slugging in a fluidized bed can be avoided by (a) using tall narrow vessel (b) using deep bed solids (c) the proper choice of particle size and by using shallow beds of solids (d) using very large particles 65. The maximum depth from which a centrifugal pump can draw water (a) dependent on the speed N of the pump (b) dependent on the power of the pump (d) 150 feet (c) 34 feet . In a fluidized bed reactor (a) temperature gradients are very high (b) temperature is more or less uniform (c) hot spot formed (d) segregation of the solids occurs 67. Lower BWG means (a) lower thickness tube (b) lower cross-section of tube (c) outer diameter of tube (d) inner diameter of tube 68. Cavitation can be prevented by (a) suitably designing the pump (b) maintaining the suction head sufficiently greater than the vapour pressure (c) maintaining suction head = developed head (d) maintaining suction head lower than the vapour pressure 70.64.

72. Boiler feed pump is usually a (a) reciprocating pump (c) multisatge centrifugal pump 73. Plunger pumps are used for (a) higher pressure (c) viscous mass

(b) gear pump (d) diaphragm pump (b) slurries (d) none of these

74. Molten soap mass is transported by a (a) diaphragm pump (b) reciprocating pump (d) centrifugal pump (c) gear pump 75. To handle smaller quantity of fluid at high discharge pressure use (b) centrifugal pump (a) reciprocating pump (c) volute pump (d) rotary vacuum pump 76. The head developed by a centrifugal pump is largely determined by the (a) power of the pump (b) nature of the liquid being pumped (c) angle of the vanes and the speed of the tip of the impeller (d) vapour pressure of the liquid 77. The maximum head that can be developed with a single impeller is (a) 25 ft. (b) 1000 ft. (d) 1000 ft. (c) 250 ± 300 ft. 78. A fluid jet discharging from a 2´ diameter orifice has a diameter of 1.75´ at its venacontracta. The co-efficient of contraction is (a) 1.3 (b) 0.766 (c) 0.87 (d) none of these 79. The discharge through a V-notch weir varies as (a) H3/2 (b) H1/2 (d) none of these (c) H5/2 80. The discharge through a rectangular weir varies as (a) H1/2 (b) H3/2 2/5 (c) H (d) none of these 81. Propellers are (b) low speed impeller (a) axial flow mixers (c) used for mixing liquids of high viscosity (d) radial flow mixers

82. Turbine impeller (a) produces only radial current (b) produces only tangential current (c) is effective over wide range of viscosities (d) does not produce tangential current 83. With increase in pump speed, its NPSH requirement (a) decreases (b) increases (c) remains unaltered (d) can either increase or decrease, depends on other factors 84. One dimensional flow implies (a) Flow in the straight line (b) steady uniform flow (c) unsteady uniform flow (d) a flow which does not account changes in transverse direction 85. In case of centrifugal fan or blower, the gas capacity varies as (b) (speed) (a) spect speed (c) (speed)3 (d) none of these 86. The continuity equation (a) relates mass flow rate along a stream tube (b) relates work and energy (c) stipulates that Newton¶s second law of motion must be satisfied at every point in the fluid (d) none of these 87. For a specific centrifugal air blower operating at constant speed and capacity the power requirement and pressure vary (a) directly as squares of gas density (b) directly as gas density (c) directly as square root of density (d) inversely as gas density 88. Foot valves are provided in the suction line of a centrifugal pump to (a) avoid priming every time we start the pump (b) remove the contaminant present in the liquid (c) minimize the fluctuation in dischrarge (d) control the liquid discharge 89. Differential manometer measures (a) atmospheric pressure (b) sub-atmospheric pressure (c) pressure difference between two points (d) none of these

90. Velocity distribution for flow between the fixed parallel plates (a) varies parabolically across the section (b) is constant over the entire cross section (c) is zero at the plates and increases linearly to the midplane (d) none of these 91. While starting a centrifugal pump, its delivery valve should be kept (a) opened (b) closed (c) either opened or closed; it does not make any difference (d) either opened or closed; depending on the fluid viscosity 92. Path followed by water jet issuing from the bottom of a water tank will be a (a) parabola (vertex being at the opening) (b) hyperbolic (c) horizontal straight line (d) zig-zag path (which is geometrically undefined) 93. A centrifugal pump loses prime after starting. The reason of this trouble may be (a) incomplete priming (b) too high a suction lift (c) low available NPSH and air leaks in the suction pipe (d) all µa¶, µb¶, and µc¶ 94. Capacity of a rotary gear pump can be varied by (a) changing the speed of rotation (b) bleeding air into suction (c) bypassing liquid from the suction or discharge line (d) all µa¶, µb¶, and µc¶ 95. For liquid flow through a packed bed, the superficial velocity as compared to average velocity through the channel in the bed is (a) more (b) less (c) equal (d) independent of porosity 96. Reciprocating pumps compared to centrifugal pumps (a) deliver liquid at uniform pressure (b) can handle slurries more efficiently (c) are not subject to air binding (d) can be operated with delivery valve closed 97. A tube is specified by its (a) thickness only (c) thickness and outer diameter both (b) outer diameter (d) inner diameter

Which of the following factors does not contribute to the pressure drop in a pipeline? (a) velocity of liquid (b) size of pipe (c) length of pipe and number of bends (d) none of these 102. The most economical valve for use with large diameter pipes is (b) globe valve (a) butterfly valve (c) needle valve (d) none of these 101. If more than two branches of pipes are to be connected at the same point. Erosion and pits formation on the impeller of a centrifugal pump may be due to (b) low speed of impeller (a) cavitation (c) its operation with delivery valve closed for considerable time after starting the pump (d) off centering of pump with motor 104.98. While starting on axial flow pump. the connector used should be a (b) tee (a) union (c) reduce¶s (d) elbow 99. then use (a) elbow (b) union (d) none of these (c) tee 100. Which of the following can be used to create a flow of gas where no significant compression is required? (a) reciprocating compressor (b) blower (c) axial flow compressor (d) centrifugal compressor 103. For pipes that must be broken at intervals for maintenance. its delivery valve should be kept (b) closed (a) open (c) either open or closed (d) none of these 106. Identification of pipelines carrying different liquids and gases is done by (a) diameter of the pipe (b) color of the pipe (c) the altitude of at which pipe is located (d) none of these . Which of the following valves will incur maximum pressure drop for the same discharge of water? (a) globe valve (b) gate valve (d) butterfly valve (c) needle valve 105.

P..P. 107.P. 109.5 m 108. (c) 1000 liter/min (d) 750 liter/min 110. the power consumed now will be (b) 2 H. Speed ± 800 rpm Head ± 8 meters. (d) 1 H. A centrifugal pump has the following specifications: Power ± 4 H.P. 107. Surge tanks are provided in high pressure water pipelines to (a) store a definite quantity of water all the time (b) reduce water hammer (c) facilities easy dismantling of pipeline for cleaning and maintenance (d) none of these 112. In question No.P. (a) 0.107. then the new head will be (b) 4 m (a) 2 m (c) 8 m (d) 5. Interstage coolers are provided in a multistage compressor to (a) save power in compressing a given volume to a given pressure (b) cool the delivered air (c) achieve the exact delivery (d) none of these 111. In question No.5 H. Disc compensators are provided in large diameter gas carrying pipelines to (a) keep the pipe in proper orientation (b) make the pipe joint leak-proof (c) account for contraction/ expansion of pipe due to temperature changes of the surroundings (d) account for pressure variation inside the pipelines 114. (c) 4 H. Flow ± 1000 liters/minutes If its speed is halved . the new discharge will be (b) 200 liter/min (a) 500 liters/min. Pipes having diameter 14 inches or more are designated by their (a) outside diameter (b) inside diameter (d) none of these (c) schedule number 113. Nominal Pipe Size (NPS) of a pipe less than 12 inches in diameter indicates its (a) inner diameter (b) outer diameter (c) thickness (d) neither inner or outer .

Volute type of casing is provided in a centrifugal pump to (a) convert velocity head to pressure head (b) convert pressure head to velocity head (c) reduce the discharge fluctuation (d) increase the discharge 121. This may be set right by (a) decreasing the size of the inlet pipe (b) increasing the size of the inlet pipe (c) lowering the pump position (d) both µb¶ and µc¶ 122. Delivery of insufficient quantity of liquid by a pump may be caused by (a) air leak in the inlet (b) low rpm (c) too high a lift (d) all µa¶. Centrifugal pump can¶t be used to pump (a) molten sodium (used as a coolant in Fast Breeder Reactor) (b) moderately vegetable oil used in soap industry (c) thick molten soap at 80rC (d) none of the above 120. µb¶ and µc¶ . Multistage centrifugal pumps are generally used for (b) low head but high discharged (a) high head (c) highly viscous liquid (d) slurries of high solid concentration 119. When the water is warm. A pump operating under specific conditions delivers insufficient quantity of liquid. the height to which it can be lifted by a pump (a) decreases due to reduced velocity (b) decreases due to reduced vapor pressure (c) increases due to increased vapor pressure (d) decreases due to increased frictional resistance 118. The most important factor which determines the maximum height to which water can be lifted by a pump at standard temperature (62rF) is (b) speed of the impeller (a) barometric pressure (c) diameter of the impeller (d) both µb¶ and µc¶ 116.115. Bear pump (a) is a positive displacement pump (b) is a centrifugal pump (c) is a non-positive displacement pump (d) can be started with delivery valve closed 117.

Horsepower requirement for given pump capacity depends upon the (a) specific gravity of the liquid (b) suction lift (c) discharge head (d) all µa¶. fittings and passages (d) all µa¶. Actual lift of pump always less than the theoretical lift and is limited by (a) specific gravity and temperature of the liquid (b) leakage and pressure decreasing at higher elevations (c) frictional resistance through pipes. and c 2. Fill up the blank Nominal size of the discharge pipe of a pump is usually ««« the nominal size of the inlet pipe (b) larger than (a) smaller than (c) same as (d) twice 125. µb¶ and µc¶ 124.123. To remove all the moisture from a wet solid requires exposure to a) perfectly dry air b) highly humid air c) air at high temperature d) none of these 3. b. µb¶ and µc¶ DRYING 1. Equilibrium-moisture curves of different solids a) are different b) are same c) depend on the humidity of the gas d) none of these . Milk is dried usually in a a) freeze dryer b) spray dryer c) tray dryer d) rotary dryer 4. The vapor pressure exerted by the moisture contained in a wet solid depends upon the a) nature of the moisture b) temperature c) nature of the solid d) all a.

If moisture content of a solid on dry basis is X then the same on wet basis is a) X €€€ b) c) d) X+1 X €€€ 1-X 1+X €€€ X 1 X €€ X 7. paper is dried in a) tunnel dryer b) heated cylinder dryer c) conveyor dryer d) festoon dryer 8. Moisture content of a substance when at equilibrium with a given partial pressure of the vapor is called a) free moisture b) unbound moisture c) equilibrium moisture d) bound moisture 9.5. Detergent solution is dried to a powder in a a) spray dryer b) spouted bed dryer c) tunnel dryer d) pan open to atmosphere. 6. Calcium ammonium nitrate (a fertilizer) is dried in a a) rotary dryer b) vacuum dryer c) tunnel dryer d) none of these . In paper industry.

Refractory bricks are usually dried in a a) tray dryer b) tunnel dryer c) conveyor dryer d) festoon dryer 14. Heat sensitive materials like certain pharmaceuticals and food stuff can be dried a) in indirect tray dryer b) in spray dryer c) by freeze drying d) none of these 15. Moisture in a solid exerting an equilibrium vapor pressure equal to that of the pure liquid at the same temperature is a) unbound moisture b) critical moisture c) free moisture d) bound moisture 13.10. Moisture in a substance exerting an equilibrium vapor pressure less than that of pure liquid at at the same temperature is a) bound moisture b) unbound moisture c) critical moisture d) none of these 11. Moisture contained by a substance in excess of the equilibrium moisture is called a) unbound moisture b) free moisture c) critical moisture d) bound moisture . Rotary dryer cannot handle a) free flowing materials b) dry materials c) sticky materials d) granular materials 12.

A solid material shows case hardening properties while drying.16. The falling rate period in the drying of a solid is characterized by a) increase in rate of drying b) increasing temperatures both on the surface and within the solid c) decreasing temperatures d) none of these 19. Drying of a solid involves a) only heat transfer b) only mass transfer c) both heat and mass transfer d) none of these 22. Which of the following should be controlled to control the drying process? a) flow rate of inlet air b) relative humidity of outlet air c) humidity of inlet air d) temperature of the solid . Sticky material can be dried in a a) tray dryer b) rotary dryer c) fluidized bed dryer d) none of these 21. Dryer widely used in a textile industry is a) cylinder dryer b) conveyor dryer c) tunnel dryer d) festoon dryer 20. Flights in a rotary dryer are provided to a) lift and shower the solids thus exposing it thoroughly to the drying action of the gas b) reduce the residence time of solid c) increase the residence time of the solid d) none of these 17. In the constant rate period of the rate of drying curve for batch drying a) cracks develop on the surface of the solid b) rate of drying decreases abruptly c) surface evaporation of unbound moisture occurs d) none of these 18.

A slurry is to be dried to produce flaky solid.p. the rate of drying decreases with a) decrease in air temperature b) increased air humidity c) both a and b d) neither a nor b . Which dryer would you recommend? a) spray dryer b) drum dryer c) rotary dryer d) dielectric dryer 27. Capacity of a rotary dryer depends on a) its r. During constant rate period. The new dew point decreases increases depends on the extent of heating remains unchanged 25. All a) b) c) d) moisture in a non-hygroscopic material is free equilibrium unbound bound moisture 29.m b) its inclination with ground surface c) both a and b d) neither a nor b 24. the dryer used is a) tunnel b) tray c) rotary d) none of these 28. For continuous drying of granular or crystalline material. The critical moisture content in case of drying indicates a) beginning of falling rate period b) beginning of constant rate period c) end of falling rate period d) none of these 26.23. Air a) b) c) d) at a particular humidity is heated in a furnace.

dryers 32.dryer 33. Humidification involves mass transfer between a pure liquid phase and a fixed gas which is: a) insoluble in the liquid b) soluble in the liquid c) non-ideal in nature d) at a fixed temperature 2.. Sand is dried in foundaries in a a) rotary b) fluidized bed c) vacuum d) spray .. humidity depends only on the a) partial pressure of vapor in the mixture b) heat capacity of the vapor c) density of the vapor d) none of these .30. Paper industry employs a) cylinder b) rotary c) spray d) fluidized bed . At a fixed total pressure. Free flowing granular materials can be best dried in a a) rotary dryer b) cylinder dryer c) drum dryer d) freeze dryer HUMIDIFICATION 1. Which is the controlling factor for a drum dryer? a) diffusion b) heat transfer c) both a and b d) neither a nor b 31.

The temperature to which a vapor gas mixture must be cooled (at varying humidity) to become saturated is a) dew point b) wet bulb temperature c) dry bulb temperature d) none of these . Humid volume is the total volume in cubic feet of 1 lb. and gas temperature 8. In saturated gas. and gas temperature d) vapor laden gas at 1 atm. the a) vapor is in equilibrium with the liquid at the gas temperature b) vapor is in equilibrium with the liquid at the room temperature c) partial pressure of vapor equals the vapor pressure of the liquid at room temperature d) none of these 4. Relative humidity is the ratio of the a) partial pressure of the vapor to the vapor pressure of the liquid at room temperature b) partial pressure of the vapor to the vapor pressure of the liquid at gas temperature c) actual humidity to saturation humidity d) none of these 5. of gas and its accompanying vapor by 1o F is called the a) latent heat b) humid heat c) specific heat d) sensible heat 7. of a) vapor laden gas at 1 atm. The percentage humidity is less than the relative humidity only at a) zero percentage humidity b) hundred percent humidity c) both zero or hundred percent humidity d) none of these 6. And room temperature b) gas plus its accompanying vapor at 1 atm. Heat is BTU necessary to increase the temperature of 1 lb.3. and room temperature c) gas plus its accompanying vapor at 1 atm.

9. When the temperature and humidity of air is low we usually use a) natural draft cooling tower b) forced draft cooling tower c) induced draft cooling tower d) none of these 14. Steady state temperature reached by a small amount of liquid evaporating into a large amount of unsaturated vapor-gas mixture is a) dry-bulb temperature b) wet bulb temperature c) dew point d) adiabatic saturation temperature 11. The equipment frequently used for adiabatic humidification-cooling operation with recirculating liquid is a) natural draft cooling tower b) induced draft cooling tower c) spray chamber d) none of these . The dew point of a saturated gas phase equals the a) gas temperature b) room temperature c) wet bulb temperature d) none of these 10. The difference of wet bulb temperature and adiabatic saturation temperature of unsaturated mixture of any system is a) positive b) negative c) zero d) none of these 13. Dry bulb temperature of the gas is a) less than the wet-bulb temperature b) greater than the wet-bulb temperature c) equal to the wet-bulb temperature d) none of these 12.

Wet bulb and dry bulb temperatures become identical at a) 100% saturation curve b) 50% saturation curve c) 78% saturation curve d) none of these 21. Which of the following remains constant during sensible cooling process? a) specific humidity b) partial pressure of vapor c) both a and b d) neither a nor b . Which of the following processes is followed by unsaturated air (with dry bulb temperature 12oC and relative humidity 47%) passing through water spray washer (temperature of water being constant at 40oC)? a) humidification only b) heating only c) both heating and humidification d) evaporative cooling 22.15. Critical humidity of a solid salt means the humidity a) above which it will always become damp b) below which it will always stay dry c) both a and b d) above which it will always become dry and below which it will always stay damp. The most efficient cooling tower out of the following is a) induced draft b) forced draft c) natural draft d) atmospheric 16. 19.. 20. Percentage saturation is a) always smaller than b) always greater than c) not related to d) none of these .the relative saturation.

A mixture of 10% C6H6 vapor in air at 25oC and 750 mm Hg has a dew point of 20oC.3oC d) 18. Which of the following decreases during evaporative cooling process with recirculated water supply? a) wet bulb temperature b) relative humidity c) partial pressure of vapor d) none of these 28. During sensible cooling process a) relative humidity decreases b) relative humidity increases c) wet bulb temperature increases d) both b and c 24.7oC b) 20oC c) 27. Which of the following remains constant during evaporative cooling process with recirculated water supply? a) relative humidity b) partial pressure of vapor c) wet bulb temperature d) none of these 26. Its dew point at 30oC and 700 mm Hg will be around a) 21.23. Which of the following increases during evaporative cooling process with recirculated water supply? a) wet bulb temperature b) relative humidity c) partial pressure of vapor d) both b and c . Dew point of a gas-vapor mixture a) increases with temperature rise b) decreases with temperature rise c) decreases with increases in pressure d) increases with increases in pressure 27.7oC 25.

The air will be a) cooled b) humidified c) both a and b d) dehumidified 32. The air will be a) cooled and humidified b) cooled and dehumidified with increase in wet bulb temperature c) cooled at the same relative humidity d) cooled and dehumidified with decrease in wet bulb temperature 34.29. In case of unsaturated air a) dew point wet bulb temperature b) wet bulb temperature dry bulb temperature c) both a and b d) neither a nor b 33. Which of the following parameters remains almost constant during adiabatic saturation of unsaturated air? a) dry bulb temperature b) dew point c) wet bulb temperature d) none of these . The relative saturation of a partially saturated mixture of vapor and gas can be increased by a) reducing the total pressure of the mixture b) increasing the total pressure of the mixture c) reducing the temperature of the mixture d) both b and c 30. Unsaturated air (with dry and wet bulb temperatures being 35oC and 25oC respectively) is passed through water spray chamber maintained at 35oC. Condensation of a vapor-gas mixture just begin when a) p = P b) p " P c) p P d) p>= P where: p = partial pressure of the vapor P = vapor pressure of the liquid 31. Unsaturated air (with dry bulb temperature and dew point being 35oC and 18oC respectively) is passed through a water spray chamber maintained at 15oC.

) Diffusivity increases with increase in molecular weight c.5 c.5 4.) D w 1 P0.) None of these 6. The unit of volumetric diffusivity is a.) Co-efficient = Flux / concentration difference c.) Flux = concentration difference / co-efficient d.) D w T3 3.) D w T b.) cm3/sec d. The diffusivity (D) in a binary gas mixture is related to the pressure (P) as a.) cm3/sec3 2. Unsaturated air (with dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures being 45oC and 25oC respectively) is passed through a water spray chamber maintained at 23oC.35.) D w 1 d.) D w T d. Pick out the correct statement a.) Diffusivity decreases with increase in temperature b. Molecular diffusion is caused by a.5 1.) Flux = (Co-efficient) / (concentration difference) b.5 c.) D w T0.) potential energy of the molecules 5. Mass transfer co-efficient is defined as a.) thermal energy of the molecules c.) cm/sec c.) Diffusivity increases with the size of the individual molecule d. The air will be a) cooled and humidified with wet bulb temperature decreasing b) cooled and humidified at constant wet bulb temperature c) cooled and dehumidified d) none of these Diffusion 1.) D w 1 P P1.) activation energy of the molecules d.) None of these . The diffusivity (D) in a binary gas mixture is related to the temperature (T) as a.) D w T1.) cm2/ec b.5 b.) transfer of molecules from low concentration to high concentration region b.

5 c. the dimensionless group in mass transfer.) K w D b. Lewis number (Le) is a. Mass transfer co-efficient (K) and diffusivity (D) are related according to film theory as a.) Sc x Pr b.) Q VDAB b. In physical terms. Corresponding to Nusselt number in heat transfer.) K w ˜D c. the dimensionless group in mass transfer is a.) K w D2 9.) Scherwood number b.) Re / Pe 11.) Pr x Sc d.) Sc x Pr c.) Peclet number d.) Sherwood number c.) St x Sh .7. Schmidt number means a.) Sh x Pe b.) thermal diffusivity / mass diffusivity b. Penetration theory relates average mass transfer co-efficient (K) with diffusivity (D) as a.) Stanton number 10.) Schmidt number c. is a.) mass diffusivity / thermal diffusivity 12.) Peclet number d.) affected much by less temperature than that for gases c. Corresponding to Prandtl number in heat transfer.) affected more by temperature than that for gases b. Schmidt number is a.) K w D2 8.5 d.) K w D b. Mass transfer coefficient of liquid is a.) Re.) K w D1.) not affected by temperature d.Pe d.) K w ½D 1.) momentum diffusivity / mass diffusivity d.) Schmidt number b.) Stanton number 13.) thermal diffusivity / momentum diffuisivity c.) K w D d.) none of these 14.

) 1 b. diffusivity of one constituent into another is not dependent on a.) moles transferred ( time)(area)(pressure) c.) absorption of NH4 from air by water c. Which of the following has the same dimension as mass diffusivity? a.) momentum flux b.) moles transferred (time)(area)(mole fraction) b.) nature of the constituents d.) none of these 17.) 600. Diffusivity in concentrated solutions differs from that in dilute solutions because of changes in a.) temperature and pressure b.) thermal diffusivity d.) all liquid-solid diffusion systems 18.) 3.) separation of a binary mixture by distillation b. Which of the following is not a unit of mass transfer coeffiecient? a.) 0.) concentration c.) none of these 16.) mass transferred (time)(area)(mass A / mass B) d.) viscocity with concentration b.) degree of ideality of the solution c. Steady state equimolal counter diffusion is encountered in a.) kinematic viscosity c.97 d. In case liquid-liquid binary diffusion .) both a and b d.) both b and c 19.) all liquid-liquid diffusion systems d.24 c. The value of Lewis number Le = Sc for air-water vapour system is around Pr a.15.) neither a nor b 20. .

) Low tray efficiency c.) liquid side coefficient should be increased c.) more than the flooding velocity .) bubble the gas through liquid b.) in towers packed randomly with crushed solids c.) both (a) and (b) d.) none of these 3.) in towers packed with stacked packing b.) gas side coefficient should be increased b. Channeling is most severe a.) Good contact between the fluids 7.) High tray efficiency b.) mass transfer coefficient b. Operating velocity in a packed tower is usually a. Flooding results in a.) none of these 4.) volumetric coefficient d.) in dumped packing of regular units d.) spray the liquid on gas stream c.) at very high liquid flow rate 6. Stacked packing compared to dumped packing a. the a.) twice the flooding velocity c. Wetted wall tower experiment determines a.) half the flooding velocity b.) provides poorer contact between the fluids b.) gas side coefficient should be decreased d.) equal to flooding velocity d.) gives higher drop 5.) either a or b will suffice d.) gives lower pressure drop c.) molal diffusivity c. For contacting a highly soluble gas with a liquid a.GAS ABSORPTION 1. For absorbing a sparingly soluble gas in a liquid.) High gas velocity d.) liquid side coefficient should be decreased 2.

) for H2SO4 d. Flooding in a column results due to a.) line can be either above or below the equilibrium curve d.) of slope = 1 b.) tangential to the equilibrium curve d.) partial pressure d. The operating line for an absorbed is curved when plotted in terms of a.) mass fractions 12. the pressure drop in a packed tower being irrigated with liquid a.) the operating line always lies above the equilibrium curve b.) line always lies above the equilibrium curve b.) none of these . The minimum liquid rate to be used in an absorber corresponds to an operating line a.) concentrated solution and non-isothermal operation b.) is same as that in drying packing d. the operating a.) for SO2 c. At the same gas flow rate. both equilibrium and operating line will be straight for a.) for alkalis b.) low pressure drop d.) cannot be predicted as data are insufficient 9. Berl saddle made of carbon cannot be used a.) is lower than that in drying packing c.) dilute solution and non-isothermal operation c. For an absorber.) the operating line always lies below the equilibrium line c.) dilute solution and isothermal operation d.) of slope = '1 c.) temperature always increases 15.) mole ratios c.8.) is greater than that in dry packed b.) high pressure drop c.) concentrated solution and isothermal operation 14.) velocity is more than the loading velocity 13. In case of an absorber.) high temperature 11.) low velocity of the liquid b.) in oxidizing atmosphere 10. In case of desorber (stipper) a.) line always lies below the equilibrium curve c.) mole fractions b.) temperature remains unaffected d.

Raschig ring made of porcelain cannot be used for treating a.) increased efficiency b.VI d. If G = insoluble gas in gas stream and L = non-volatile solvent in liquid stream.16.) vacuum gas soil 18. which combination II. high gas solubility VII.) concentrated sulfuric acid 20. Absorption factor is defined as a.) I. high vapour pressure V.IV.slope of the equilibrium curve d.) decreased efficiency c. then the slope of the operating line for the absorber is a.) always < 1 d.) low velocity c.) HCL d.VII .) slope of the operating line slope of the equilibrium curve c.) better gas liquid contact 21.) low vapour pressure b.) I.) alkalis d.) low freezing point d. Low vapour pressure VI. high pressure drop results in a.) slope of the equilibrium curve slope of the operating line b. Which of the following is an undesirable property for an absorbing solvent? a.IV.) slope of the operating line .) none of these 19. Low viscosity IV.) concentrated nitric acid c.VI for absorption.) ethanolamine b.) concentrated hydrochloric acid b. High freezing point b.V. low freezing point Choose from the following combinations: a.) slope of the operating linexslope of the equilibrium curve 17. H2S present in naphtha reformed gas is removed by absorbing with a.) none of these 22.) high operating cost d.V. Out of the following properties of a solvent of properties provides a good solvent? I.) L/G b. For absorbers.) K2CO2 c.VII c.) II.IV.V.IV.) II.V. high viscosity III.) G/L c.

) decrease or increase depends on the type of liquid 30. Very tall packed towers are divided into series of beds to a.) large free cross-section c.) and equilibrium lines are parallel d.) composition of the entering liquid c.) large surface per unit volume b. In an absorber.) none of these 26.) flow rate of liquid c. the slope of the operating line is a. When both the fluids flow concurrently in an absorber.) negative b.) lies below the equilibrium line b.) lies above the equilibrium line c.) increase b.) is far from the equilibrium line .) large weight of liquid retained 28. the tower height will a. HETP does not vary with a.) reduce liquid hold-up d.) positive c. Which of the following is not fixed by process requirements in the design of absorbers? a. Which of the following is an undesirable property in a low-packing a.) flow rate of gas d.) type and size of packing b.) low weight per unit volume d. if the same liquid used in an absorber is decreased.) caustic solution b.) decrease c.) terminal concentration of gas stream d.) avoid channeling c.23.) reduce the over-all pressure drop b.) ethanolamine 25. For the same system.) dilute HCl d.) flow rate of the entering gas b.) none of these 27.) dilute ammoniacal liquor c.) avoid flooding 29.) remain unaffected d.) 1 d. Ammonia present in the coke oven gas is removed by washing with a. HETP is numerically equal to HTU only when operating line a.) -1 24.

) decrease in equilibrium solubility d.) to decrease the pressure drop c.) none of these 33.) gravity sand filter b. we use a. Diameter of raschig rings used in packed tower in industry is normally around a.) 8" c. Filter aid is used a.) to increase the rate of filtration b.) rotary vacuum filter 2.) 1 b.) 12" d. Absorption accompanied by heat evolution results in a. Channeling in a packed tower results from a.5 32. Desirable value of absorption factor in an absorber is a.) removal of lines from liquid pressure c.) to increase the porosity of the cake d.) a mixture 34.) increase in equilibrium solubility c.) as a support base for the septum .) liquids of very high viscosity b.) 0.31.) high pressure drop b. Co-current absorbers are usually used when the gas to be dissolved in the liquid is a.) liquid having high vapour d.) both b and c 35.) >1 d.) non-uniformity of packing d.) increased capacity of the absorber b.) 18" FILTRATION 1.) highly soluble c.) <1 c.) none of these 3.) sparingly soluble b.) plate and frame filter c.) maldistribution of liquid c.) 2" b.) vacuum leaf filter d.) a pure substance d. Vacuum filter is most suitable for a. For a classification of potable water.

) 1 c. The specific cake resistance is a.) cm / gm-1 8.) cm / gm2 7.) sparkler filter b. For separation of sugar solution from settled out mud we use a. During the washing of cake a.) silica gel .) filtration time only d.) minimum at the filter medium face c.) plate and frame c.) the cake thickness b.) gm / gm.) gm -1 9.) both pressure drop and flow rate d.) sodium carbonate b.) cm / gm d.) same throughout the b.) square root of the velocity b.) centrifugal filter d.) gm / cm2 c.) all resistance are constant increases c. The medium resistance is controlled by a. The porosity of a compressible cake is a. b. The unit of filter medium resistance is a.) square root of the viscosity c.) diatomaceous earth c.) rotary drum vacuum filter 12.) none of these 10.) minimum at the upstream d.) cm-1 c.) maximum at the filter medium thickness 6.) calcium silicate d.) the pressure drop along b.4.) the flow rate alone c. Compressibility coefficient for an absolutely compressible cake is a.) gm / cm-1 d. The most common filter aid is a.) 0 to 1 d.) filter medium resistance 5.) washing time only 11.) change resistance decreases b.) 0 b.) filter medium resistance d. In continuous filtration (at a constant pressure drop) filtrate flow rate varies inversely as the a.

) vacuum filter 19.) Hagen-Poiseu equation c.) vacuum leaf filter d. Moore filter is a a.) 4 b.) sparkler filter 15.) none of these 14.) centrifugal filter d.) 1/2 20.) 500 16. For laminar of flow of filtrate through the cake deposited on septum which of the following with the valid? a. The speed of a rotary drum vacuum filter (in rpm) may be a.) sand filter b.) batch backed centrifuge d.) none of these 18.) Fanning's equation d.) open sand filter b.) Clack-Plummer equation d.) 100 d.) vacuum leaf filter d.) plate and frame filter c.13. Flow of filtrate through cake in a plate and frame filter press is best described by a.) plate and frame filter c.) Kremser equation .) plate and frame filter b. Removal of activated carbon from glycerine is done by a.) sparkler filter b.) 1 b.) leaf filter c.) precost filter 17. Which of the following may prove unsuitable for filtering volatile liquids? a. Filtration of water in a paper mill is done by a.) explosive c. In washing type plate and frame filter press the ratio of washing rate to the final filtrate rate is a.) filter medium b.) Leva's equation c.) Kozency-Carman Equation b.) pressure filter b.) rotary filter 21.) filter aid d. Diatomaceous earth is a. Gelatinous solid (which plug the septum) can be filtered by a.) gravity filter c.) rotary vacuum filter c.) 50 c.) Kozency-Carman equation b.) 1 d.) filter press d.) none of these 22.) 1/4 c.

) plate and frame filter c.) filter medium c.) incompressible cake and turbulent flow of filtrate 24.) cake c. Percentage of drum submerged in slurry in case of rotary drum filter is a.) increase the compressibility coefficient c. filtration a.) decreases c.) 25% 25.) rate b. The controlling resistance in a rotary drum vacuum filter is the a. the filtration rate a. A straight line is obtained on plotting reciprocal of filtration rate vs the volume of filtrate a..) is not affected 27.) 85% d.) parabola b. Addition of filter aid to the slurry before filtration is done to a.) pressure c.) remains constant d. of the coke 29.) compressible cakes and laminar flow of filtrate b. in a rotary drum filter.) increases b.) decreases d.) compressible cake and turbulent flow of filtrate d.) decrease the compressibility coefficient 30.) increases linearly c. Which is a continuous filter? a. The inlet pressure in a constant rate filtration a.) none of these 28. The cake resistance increases steadily with the time of filtration in a plate and frame filter employing constant . With increase in drum speed.) exponential curve 26.)shell and leaf filter b.) none of these .) 3% b.) increases continuously b.) cartridge filter d..) hyperbola d. Which of the following represents the plot of filtrate cvolume versus time for constant pressure filtration? a.) incompressible cakes and laminar flow of filtrate c. Resistance .) neither a nor b 31.) piping b.) both a and b d.) straight line c.) 30% c.) none of these .) increase the porosity b.23.) decrease the porosity d.

same as that obtained by adsorption d. Rate of adsorption increases as the a. When adsorption hysteresis is observed. an irreversible phenomenon b. a gas of a. also called activated adsorption d. Which of the following adsorbent is used to decolorize yellow glycerine? a. equal to the heat of wetting c. both b and c 2. accompanied by evolution of heat d. Fuller¶s earth b. Chemisorption (chemical adsorption) is a. over a small concentrated range b. dilute solutions. alumina d. Pick out the wrong statement Generally for physical adsorption. dependent on the system can be either lower or higher than that obtained by adsorption 5. none of these 3. low volatility is adsorbed in preference to a gas of high volatility d. temperature decreases c. the desorption equilibrium pressure is a. none of these 7. equal to the heat of formation of surface compound b. the difference between heat of adsorption and heat of normal condensation is a. Physical adsorption is a. zero d. higher molecular weight is adsorbed in preference to a gas of low molecular weight b. always lower than that obtained by adsorption b. a reversible phenomenon c. temperature increases b. same as ³Van der Waals´ adsorption b. silica gel c.ADSORPTION 1. called integral heat of adsorption 8. high critical temperature is adsorbed in preference to a gas of low critical temperature c. concentrated solutions d. Freundlich equation applies to adsorption of solute from a. activated carbon 6. In case of physical adsorption. pressure decreases d. gaseous solutions at high pressure c. both b and c . always higher than that obtained by adsorption c. size of adsorbent increases 4. characterized by adsorption of heat c.

heat of normal condensation c. CO2 can be adsorbed by a. integral heat of adsorption d. adsorption d. decreases c. Moisture can be removed from lubricating oil using a. With increase in concentration of the adsorbate the integral heat of adsorption a. clarifier d. alumina CENTRIFUGATION 1. For separation of sugar solution from settled out mud we use a. zero b. tubular centrifuge c. The change in enthalpy per unit weight of adsorbed gas when adsorbed on gas free or ³outgassed´ adsorbent to form a definite concentration of adsorbate is called its a. heat of normal condensation 10. heat of normal condensation b. sparkler filter c. heat of wetting c. sparkler filter b. differential heat of adsorption c. heat of wetting 12. The change in enthalpy when a unit quantity of gas is adsorbed by a relatively large quantity of adsorbent (on which a definite concentration of the adsorbed gas already exists) is termed as the a. remains unchanged d. heated charcoal c. integral heat of adsorption d. may increase or decrease. Ion exchange process is similar to a. disc-bowl centrifuge b. plate & frame filter d. extraction 14. differential heat of adsorption d. none of these 13. Which of the following can be most effectively used for clarification of tube oil and printing ink? a. sparkler filter c. Cold Ca (OH)2 d. centrifugal filter b. vacuum leaf filter 3. As complete saturation of an adsorbent is approached. leaching c. hot cupric oxide b. depends on type of adsorbate 11. the differential heat of adsorption approaches a. increases b.9. rotary drum vacuum filter 2. sharpless supercentrifuge . absorption b. precoat filter d. integral heat of adsorption b.

promoter 3. If the radius of a basket centrifuge is halved and the rpm is doubled. capacity of centrifuge is increased 5. dissolving pharmaceutical products from bark or roots c. dissolving gold from ores b. Which of the following is the most suitable for cleaning of fine coal dust (< 0. activator 4.5 m)? a. modifier d. metal ores 2. quartz b. linear speed of the basket is doubled b. dissolving sugar from the cells of the best d. sparkler filter b. then a. the most suitable separator is c. absorption d. centrifugal force is doubled d. removing nicotine from its water solution by kerosene 2. frother b. modifier b. collector c. Froth Flotation is most suitable for treating a. collector c. batch basket centrifuge a.4. sharpless supercentrifuge FLOTATION 1. iron ores c. adsorption . liquid-liquid extraction b. linear speed of the basket is halved c. Which of the following operations does not involve leaching? a. In Froth Flotation. Pine oil used in forth flotation technique acts as a a. chemical agent added to cause air adherence is called a. Baum Jig Washer d. Spiral separator b. Through washer c. sulfide ores d. frother d. leaching c. Tea percolation employs a. Where the difference in density of the two liquid phases to be separated is very small (as in milk cream separator). Froth Flotation LEACHING 1. disc bond centrifuge d.

none of these 3. absorption c.3. none of these LIQUID LIQUID EXTRACTION 1. With increase in temperature. agitation b. results in low interfacial tension d. decreased liquid viscosity c. evaporation d. time of contact between the solid and the solution b. distillation 2. employs two solvents c. Rate of leaching increases with increasing a. dilute H2SO4 b. liquid extraction b. both a and b b. rate of diffusion of the solute through the solid and into the liquid c. hot water c. Fractional solvent extraction a. steam distillation 6. increased diffusivity d. hexane d. Choose the best combination or properties for a good solvent for extraction out of the following (i) high selectivity (ii) low selectivity (iii) high viscosity (iv) low viscosity (v) large distribution coefficient (vi) small distribution coefficient . employs only one solvent b. Leaching rate is independent of the a. pressure d. Heats sensitive materials with very high latent heat of vaporization may be economically separated using a. neither a nor b 8. leaching d. the leaching rate increases due to a. extractive distillation b. size of the solid 4. liquid-liquid extraction c. particle size c. Stage efficiency in a leaching process depends on the a. Extraction of coffee from its seed is done by a. lime water 7. viscosity of solvent c. vapor pressure of the solution 5. both a and b d. temperature b. temperature d. Leaching of sugar from sugar beets is done by a.

a ternary mixture b. then a.(vii) (viii) high interfacial tension low interfacial tension c. decreases c. no separation will occur c. large quantity of solvent is required to extract the solute d. solvent flow rate should be very low 6. The apex of an equilateral triangular coordinate (internary liquid system) represents a. ( vii ) d. ( ii ). ( v ). Which of the following is the most suitable for extraction in a system having very low density difference? a. remains unchanged b. depends on the pressure of the system 11. an insoluble binary system 10. if selectivity is unity. pulsed extractor b. it will decompose while recovering by distillation . decreases d. < 1 d. ( vii ) a. none of these 9. ( i ). In extraction. solvent of low latent heat of vaporization should be used b. The solvent used in liquid extraction should not have high latent heat of vaporization because a. ( iv ). a pure component c. ( v ). its recovery cost by distillation may be prohibitively high d. the extraction efficiency a. ( vi ) 4. > 1 b. In a countercurrent extractor as the axial mixing increases. packed extraction tower 8. When the solvent dissolves very little of solute then a. ( i ). ( iii ). it cannot be recovered by distillation c. very small quantity of solute is required 7. 0 5. ( iv ). increases d. ( v ). the area of heterogeneity (area covered by binodal curve) a. separation of the constituent is most effective b. amount of solvent required will be minimum d. Selectivity of solvent used in extraction should be a. ( iii ). ( i ). ( vii ) b. a binary mixture d. 1 c. increases c. as the temperature increases. the pressure drops and hence the pumping cost will be very high b. solvent of low freezing point should be used c. ( i ). remains unchanged b. In liquid extraction. mixer-settler extractor c. centrifugal extractor d.

both liquids can have any desired flow rate c. belt conveyor c. belt conveyor c. increase c. belt conveyor b. Dry powdery solid material are transported by a a. continuous distillation d. Which of the following cannot be recommended for transportation of abrasive materials? a. remain unchanged b. bucket elevator 4. pneumatic conveyor 2. solvent extraction c. can either increase or decrease. If one is the cross section of the load. apron conveyor c. absorption MATERIALS HANDLING 1. screw conveyor d. screw conveyor d. depends on the system 15. bucket elevator . As the reflux ratio. flight conveyor d. length of the belt d. screw conveyor d. speed of the belt c. Which is most suitable for transportation of sticky material? a.12. a binary mixture 14. apron conveyor c. apron conveyor b. liquid¶s flow rate depends upon the temperature and pressure 13. a pure component d. Sides of equilateral triangular coordinates (on which ternary liquid system is plotted) represent c. In a countercurrent liquid extractor a. Acetic acid will be most economically separated from a dilute solution of acetic acid in water by a. the other is the a. belt conveyor b. For transporting pastry material. only one of the liquids may be pumped at any desired rate d. partially miscible ternary system b. The capacity of a belt conveyor depends upon two factors. chain conveyor 3. thickness of the belt b. one will use a. both liquids flow at fixed rate b. belt conveyor b. in a continuous counter current extraction is increased. a ternary mixture a. evaporation b. material to be transported 5. the number of stages a. decrease d.

0074 mm c. Cumulative Analysis for determining surface is more precise than differential analysis because of the a. 2 b. assumption that all particles in single fraction are equal in size b. screening becomes progressively easier c. As particle size is reduced a. 2 2. increases the screen effectiveness 6. transporting powdered materials SCREENING 1. The ratio of the actual mesh dimension of Taylor series to that of the next smaller screen is c.0047 mm 3. 0. its capacity is abruptly increased 9. 0. oversizes are present in undersize fraction b. Increasing the capacity of screen a. small loads. Screen efficiency is a. heavy loads and long runs d. recovery c. screen size d. assumption that all particles in a single fraction are equal in size is not needed d. none of these c. micron b. none of these a. fact that screening is more effective c.6. undersizes are retained in oversize fraction c.0047 cm d. screening becomes progressively more difficult b.0074 cm b. surface area per unit mass . Size measurement of ultrafine particles can be best expressed in terms of a. 2 4. rejection d. heavy loads and short runs b. none of these 7. decreases the screen effectiveness b. 1. A screen is said to be blinded when a. 1. none of these 5. none of these a. 1 c. The opening of 200 mesh screen (Taylor series) is a. 0.5 b. the screen is plugged with solid particles d. Apron conveyors are used for a. recovery rejection b. The ratio of the area of opening in one screen (Taylor series) to that of openings in the next smaller screen is d. capacity and effectiveness of the screen is increased d. 0. long runs c. none of these 8.5 d. centimeter c. does not affect the screen effectiveness d.

notation + 5 mm/ -10 mm means passing through a.33 ± 0. neither 5 mm nor 10 mm screens 18. tons/h b.5 ± 2. Mesh number indicates the number of holes per a. both a and b 12. 100 to 250 21.5 16. NE D D 1 b.33 ± 1. Vibrating screens have capacity (tons/ft2 ± hr ± mm mesh size) in the range of c. remains unchanged c. Trommels separate a mixture of particles depending on their a. 200 openings/inch2 d.8 b.10. 10 mm screen and retained on 5 mm screen b. vibrating screen 14. linear inch 15. tons/h-ft2 17. linear foot b. NE c.45 b. Screen capacity is expressed in terms of a.45 d. electrical and magnetic 11. trommels d. 200 mesh screens means a. plus material b. both 5 mm and 13 mm screens d. With increase in the capacity of screens. The material passing one screening surface and retained on a subsequent surface is called a. the screen effectiveness a.5 ± 2 a. In screen analysis. square inch c. intermediate material c. decreases exponentially 20. 200 openings/cm2 b. the most suitable equipment is a a. NE D 19. 0. For sizing of fine materials. 200 openings/inch c. grizzly d. tons/ft2 c. 1. 5 to 25 d. grizzlies c. 200 openings/cm d. trommel c. 0. wet ability d. none of the above . Optimum ratio of operating speed to critical speed of a trommel is c. The critical speed of a trommel (n) is related to its diameter (D) 1 a. vibrating screen 13. 1. 5 mm screen and retained on 10 mm screen c. screen size b. NE D d. shaking screen b. 50 to 100 a. decreases b. shaking screen b. 0. size c. increases d. Which of the following screens has the maximum capacity? a. square foot d.2 to 0. minus d.

The drag force exerted on the sphere increases during it descent through the second section. b. The sphere reaches its terminal velocity while falling through the first section d.SEDIMENTATION Questions 1 and 2 are based on the following information and illustration In an experiment. a sphere of density V1 and radius r is dropped in a tank of oil of viscosity Q1 and density V 2 . . The drag force exerted on the sphere decreases during the descent through the second section 2. The drag force exerted on the sphere during its descent through the second section is ¨d ¸ 4 3 4 a. The time of descent for the sphere through the first section of height d is recorded as t1 and through the second section of the same height as t2. Which of the following is true for the experiment a. 0 < t2 ± t1 << 1. The sphere never reaches its terminal velocity while falling through both sections c. Sphere d d V (V1) V2 1.

none of these 5. none of these 4. none of these . shear force to the product of velocity head and density c. Drag is defined as the force exerted by the a. 3 3 ª t2 º b. <5 d. Drag coefficient for flow of past immersed body is the ratio of a. ¨d ¸ 4 3 T r V1 g  6TQ1r © ¹ 3 ª t2 º 3. >1 b. the solid on the fluid d. fluid on the solid in a direction opposite to flow b. shear stress to the product of velocity head and density b. the fluid on the solid in the direction of flow c.V1  V 2 g T r 3 T r V1 g  6TQ1r © ¹ c. 4 V1 g T r 3 3 d. average drag per unit projected area to the product of the velocity head and density d. Stoke¶s law is valid when the particle Reynolds number is a. <1 c.

6. Drag coefficient CD is given by (in Stoke¶s law range) 16 a. C D ! c. C D ! ep 18.4 b. C D ! d. C D ! ep

24 ep 0.079 e p 0.23

7. At low Reynolds number a. viscous forces are unimportant b. viscous forces control c. viscous forces control and inertial forces are unimportant d. gravity forces control 8. At high Reynolds number a. inertial forces control and viscous forces are unimportant b. viscous forces predominate c. inertial forces are unimportant and viscous forces control d. none of these 9. Forces acting on a particle settling in fluid are a. gravitational and buoyant forces b. centrifugal and drag forces c. gravitational or centrifugal, buoyant and drag forces d. external, drag and viscous forces 10. Terminal velocity is a. constant velocity with no acceleration b. a fluctuating velocity c. attained after moving one-half of total distance d. none of these 11. In hindered settling, particles are a. placed farther from the wall b. not affected by other particles and the wall 12. Drag coefficient in hindered settling is a. less than in free settling b. equal to that in free settling c. not necessarily quarter than in free settling d. greater than in free settling 13. For the free settling of a spherical particle through a fluid, the slope of CD vs log NRe plot is a. 1 c. ± 1 b. 0.5 d. ± 0.5 14. The terminal velocity of a small sphere settling in a viscous fluid varies as the a. first power of its diameter b. inverse of the fluid viscosity c. inverse square of the diameter d. square of the difference in specific weights of solid and fluid c. near each other d. none of these

15. Buoyant force a. for non symmetrical bodies is not vertical b. depends on the depth of the submergence of the floating body c. depends on the weight of the floating body d. none of these 16. Center of pressure in an immersed body is _______ the center of gravity a. above b. below c. at d. either above or below; depends on the liquid density 17. The line of action of the buoyant force passes through the center of gravity of the a. submerged body b. displaced volume of the fluid c. volume of fluid vertically above the body d. horizontal projection of the body 18. Drag is the force component exerted on an immersed object a. passing the centroid of the body at 60° to the direction of motion b. the component being parallel to the flow direction c. the component being normal to the flow direction d. none of these 19. Sphericity of raschig ring (whose length and diameter are equal) is a. >1 c. <2 b. 1 d. 2 20. Sphericity of pulverized coal is a. 1 b. >1 c. <1 d. g

21. Sedimentation on commercial scale occurs in a. classifiers c. thickeners b. rotary drum filters d. cyclones 22. For non spherical particle, the sphericity a. is defined as the ratio of surface area of a sphere having the same volume as the particle to the actual surface area of the particle b. has a dimension of length c. is always less than 1 d. is the ratio of volume of a sphere having the same surface area as the particle to the actual volume of the particle 23. Sphericity of a cubical particle when its equivalent diameter is taken as the height of the tube is a.0.5 c. 2 b.1 d. 3

24. For raschig rings, the sphericity is a. 0.5 b. 1

c. < 1 d. 3

25. Sphericity for a non-spherical particle is given by 6V DS a. c. DS V V V d. b. 6 DS DS where: V and S are volume and surface area respectively of one particle D = equivalent diameter of particles

SIZE REDUCTION
1. Shape factor for a cylinder whose length equals its diameter is a. 1.5 b. 0.5 c. 1 d. 0 2. Equivalent diameter of a particle is the diameter of the sphere having the same a. ratio of surface to volume as the actual volume b. ratio of volume to surface as the particle c. volume as the particle d. none of these 3. For coarse reduction of hard solids, use a. impact b. attrition c. compression d. cutting d. none of these

4. Soft and non abrasive materials can be made into fines by a. attrition b. compression c. cutting

5. Crushing efficiency is the ratio of a. surface energy created by the crushing to the energy absorbed by the solid b. the energy absorbed by the solid to that fed to the machine c. the energy fed to the machine to the surface energy created by the crushing d. the energy absorbed by the solid to the surface energy created by the crushing. 6. Rittinger¶s crushing law states that a. work required to form a particle of any size is proportional to the square of the surface to volume ratio of the product. b. work required to form a particle of a particular size is proportional to the square root of the surface to volume ratio of the product c. work required in crushing is proportional to the new surface created d. for a given machine and feed, crushing efficiency is dependent on the sizes of feed and product

much more than the critical speed 10. Bond crushing law a. Roll crusher b. Wet grinding in a revolving mill a. attrition b. gyratory crusher c. increases d. Cement clinker is reduced to fine size a. we use a. Hammer mill 13. gross energy (Kwh/ton of feed) needed to reduce very large feed to such a size that 80% of the product passes a 100 micron screen b. impact d. is same as for coarser grinding b. Work index is defined as the a. As the product becomes finer. Squirrel-cage disintegrator 14. Roll crusher c. cutting action . complicates handling of the product compared to dry grinding 12. cutting b. less than the critical speed b. energy needed to crush one ton of feed to 200 microns c. the energy required for grinding a. A fluid energy mill is used for a. states that the work required for the crushing is proportion 8. grinding c. states that the work required to form particle of any size from very large feed is proportional to the square root of the volume to surface ratio of the product d. For the preliminary breaking of hard rock. is 1. Tube mill b. is less realistic in estimating the power requirements of commercial crushes c. ultragrinding d. energy needed to crush one ton of feed to 100 microns 9. crushing 11. energy (Kwh/ton of feed) needed to crush small feed to such a size that 80% of product passes a 200 mesh screen d. gives less wear on chamber walls than dry grinding b. The operating speed of a ball mill should be a. increases capacity compared to dry grinding d.7. Ball mill d. none of these 15. requires more energy than for dry grinding c. Fibrous material is broken by a. Ball mill d.5 times than for coarser grinding 16. none of these c. Ultrafine grinders operate principally by a. decreases c. Ball mill d. Squirrel-cage disintegrator c. calls for relatively less energy for the smaller product particle than does the Rittinger law b. Tube mill b. slow compression c. at least equal to the critical speed d.

operating speed 27. Grinding efficiency of a ball mill is of the order of a. ball mill d. fluid energy mill 23. all a. roller crusher c. To get ultra fine particles. results in increased capacity c. its speed c. wet grinding compared to dry grinding a. requires more energy c. the equipment used is a. gyratory crusher 25. ball mills. The main differentiation factor between tube mill and ball mill is the a. must be operated c. b and c 18. none of these 20. has less capacity d. with minimum possible small balls 22.17. cutting 24. at a speed equal to critical speed a. crushing b. the density of the material being ground b. impact c. consumes more power b. 40 ± 50% d. complicates handling and classification of the product b. For efficient grinding. rod mill d. In case of a revolving mill. none of these . energy consumption b. jaw crusher b. the equipment used is a. final product size b. both a and c 21. Kick¶s law relates to a. coarse grinding c. length to diameter ratio c. 90 ± 95% 19. size of the grinding media d. consumes less power d. final particle size c. The material is crushed in a gyratory crusher by the action of a. hammer crusher b. To get fine talc powder from its granules. at a speed less than critical speed b. fine grinding d. attrition d. ball mill c. its ball load d. Choke crushing (in case of a jaw crusher) compared to free crushing a. attrition 26. 75 ± 80% b. The energy consumed by a ball mill depends on a. feed size d. compression b. 1 ± 5% c. Ball mill is used for a. at a speed more than critical speed d.

cutting b. cutting machine b. none of these 30. Crushing efficiency of a machine ranges between a. Grinder c.1 to 2 % c. compression d. Df/Dp c. 0. Dp ± Df 35. compression c. cutting c. Which of the following gives the crushing energy required to create new surface? a. cutting b. pyrite d. Rittinger¶s law b. Feed size of • 25 cm can be accepted by a. rod mill c. 20 to 25 % b. Maximum size reduction in a fluid energy mill is achieved by a. 5 ± 10 b. Pick out the material having minimum Rittinger¶s number a. 20 ± 40 c. galena 38. attrition c. 50 to 70 % . cutting 33. Df ± Dp b. impact 31. galena 39. crusher d. attrition d. Size reduction mechanism used in Jaw crushers is a. Taggart¶s rule c. compression d. Maximum size reduction in a ball mill is done by a. ball mill b. fluid energy mill d. The main size reduction operation in ultra fine grinders is a. as high as 100 36. quartz b. impact 37. Dp/Df d. impact 34. impact b. The reduction ratio for grinders is defined as a. pyrite d. Calcite c. ultrafine grinder 29. compression b. attrition c. 5 to 10 % d. jaw crusher 32. interparticle attrition d. Fluid energy mill comes in the category of a.28. 10 ± 20 d. Fick¶s Law d. Pick out the material having maximum Rittinger¶s number a. calcite c. The reduction ratio for fine grinders is a. quartz b.

40. According to Bond crushing law. the work required to form particle of size µD¶ from very large feed is a. H .

S / V p c. H .

H .S / V p b.

S / V p
2

d. and

H

S / V f

when

S / V p

large horizontal vessels c. saddles 2. Wind load consideration in the design of a support can be neglected when the vessel is a. brackets b. thick walled small vertical vessels 4. Skirt support is most suitable for a. tall vertical vessels c. horizontal vessels c. 0.8 c. 0. tall but empty vessels c. skirts c. Leg support is meant for a.30 b.65 c.0.85 c. 0.g.1 b. thick walled tall vessels 7. outside diameter d. 0. tall vertical vessels d.85 d. 0.2 d. horizontal cylindrical vessels b. all (a).15-0. (b) and (c) c. 1 b. In the design of a paddle agitator the ratio paddle diameter to tank diameter is normally taken as: a. The ratio propeller agitator diameter to tank diameter is normally taken as a. Vertical valves are not supported by a.5-0.S / V f are surface to volume ratio of the product and feed respectively PROCESS EQUIPMENT DESIGN 1. thick walled vertical vessels b. Joint efficiency for a seamless pipe is a. Hortonsphere) d. large horizontal cylindrical vessels b. small vessels d. shape b.60-0.1. thick spherical vessels 5. Bracket supports are most suitable for a. 0. 0. thick walled vertical vessels d. small horizontal vessels b.25 d. tall but empty c. Saddle supports are used for supporting a.75-0.5 9. The force due to wind load acting on a tall vessels depends upon its a.90 . tall (say 30 meters) but is full of liquid b. short (<2 m) and housed indoor d.5 10. column d.0. none of these 3. thin spherical vessel (e. none of these 6. height 8. 0.

The minimum baffle height should be a. (b) and (c) 15. is always less than arithmetic mean value but more than geometric mean value d.2-0. its slope and length c. both (b) and (c) 18.45 tank diameter 12. 0.4-0. Rate of filtrate delivery is inversely proportional to the a. viscosity of filtrate c. 0. low viscosity liquids (<200 poise) b. Baffles may be eliminated for a. D2 . size of agitator and the tank d. cake and filter medium resistance d.5 tank diameter c.1-0. all (a). high viscosity (>600 poise) c. of inner and outer pipes respectively) . (b) and (c) 17. large diameter tank d. filtering the area and the pressure difference driving force b. less than that for fluid flow c. all (a). Power required for agitation depends upon the a.45-0. equal to the impeller diameter b.D. none of these 14.11. twice the diameter d. pressure drop across the cake and filter medium b. height and properties of the liquid b. the logarithmic mean temperature difference a. more than that for fluid flow d. all (a). In the case of a shell and the tube heat exchanger. may be either more or less than geometric mean and arithmetic mean value depending upon whether the flow of stream is co-current or countercurrent 19. is always less than arithmetic average value b. 0. is always more than arithmetic mean value but more than geometric mean value c.12 tank diameter b. 0. twice the impeller diameter c. same as that for fluid flow b. cake and filter medium resistance c. 3/4 of the tank height 13. agitator type and speed of agitation c.6 tank diameter d.D1 (D1 and D2 are I. Filtration rate is affected by a. (b) and (c) 16. the hydraulic radius for heat transfer (for a fluid flowing through the annulus) would be a. its rpm b. Baffle width is normally taken as a. area of filtering surface and viscosity of filtrate d. the arrangement of flights d. The retention time of material in rotary dryer depends upon a. In a double pipe (concentric) heat exchanger.

height is 75% of the I. counter-current heat transfer systems 23.D. one-fourth of the tube diameter 26. the tube pitch is generally a. more in case of triangular pitch as compared to square pitch of tube layout d. cases where temperature difference between the shell and the tubes is more (>50 C) c. all (a).5 times the tube diameter d. spacing is 75% of its height d. containing suspended solids flows at low velocity b.20. facilitates comparatively easier external cleaning because of larger clearance c. is highly viscous d. containing suspended solids flows at high velocity c. permits the use of less tubes in given shell diameter b. both (b) and (c) 27. In a shell and tube heat exchanger. 2. (b) and (c) 22.50 times the tube diameter c.25 -1. called tube pitch b. shortest center to center distance between adjacent tubes is a. Fouling factor must be included in the calculation of over all design heat transfer co-efficient when the liquid a. Floating head heat exchangers are used for a. Shortest distance between two tubes is a.D. height is 25% of the I. called tube pitch b. velocity process fluid containing suspended solids c. In most of the shell and tube heat exchanger. Twenty five percent cut segmental baffle means that the baffle a. The value of fouling factor depends upon the a. none of these 24. co-current heat transfer systems d. of the shell b. always less than the diameter of the tube d. characteristics of process fluid b. none of these 25. heat transfer between corrosive fluids b. of the shell c. permits the use of more tubes in a given shell diameter d. suspended solids in the fluid d. is of high specific gravity 21. called tube clearance c. width is 25% of its height . Triangular pitch tube layout as compared to square pitch in a shell and tube heat exchanger a. less than the diameter of the tube b. 1. called tube clearance c.

shell side for smaller total pressure drop c. fix the tubes in position c. Which of the following is the most common baffle used in industrial shell and tube heat exchange? a. of the shell c. High pressure fluid in a shell and tube heat exchanger should preferably be routed through the a. of the shell b. may increase or decrease depending upon whether the fluid is Newtonian or non-Newtonian . In shell and tube heat exchangers. none of these 32. 35.D. orifice baffle d. more than the I. are easier to clean b. decreases b.28.D. both (b) and (c) 30. disk and doughnut baffle 31. not less than one fifth of the I. 25% cut segmental baffle c.D. smaller diameter tubes are favored as compared to larger diameter ones because smaller diameter tubes.For a given fluid as the pipe diameter increases. shell side if the flow is counter-current and tube side if the flow is cocurrent d. of the shell d. the clearance of the tube is generally a. In a shell and tube heat exchanger for given heat transfer surface area. can be fitted into a smaller shell diameter hence the cost of the heat exchanger would be less d. hold baffle in space b. flow outside the tube when the flow is counter-current and inside the tube when the flow is co-current 34. are less prone to fouling c. increases c. not less than one-fourth of the tube diameter or 3/16 b. shell side for larger overall heat transfer co-efficient 33. none of these 29. a. straight tie rods are used to a. more than the tube diameter c. Baffle spacing is generally a. preferably flow outside the tube c. more in case of triangular pitch as compared to the square pitch tube layout. flow at very slow velocity d. 75% cut segmental baffle b. it should a. the pumping cost a. tubes to avoid the expense of high pressure shell construction b. not greater than the I. equal to the tube diameter d. remains unaffected d. preferably flow inside the tube for its easier internal cleaning b. account for thermal strain d. In a shell and tube heat exchanger. When one of the fluids is highly corrosive and has fouling tendency.

entering run) b. 45 and 75 c. all (a). greater cost for the reboiler heat supply c. 37. Le/D for 90r elbow (medium radius) and 90r square elbow would be respectively around a. Friction factor turbulent flow in new pipe is given by d. 200 d. 250 and 600 42.22NRE0. density of the fluid c. Le/D for couplings and unions would be a. 300 and 500 41. 350 43. 5 and 10 b. In case of continuous distillation column. Le/D for a Tee (used as elbow. 200 c.5 b. both (b) and (c) 44. 350 d.16 c. f = 0. more than that for Tee (used as elbow. 3 and 5 c. entering run) would be around a. around 90 d. less than that for Tee (used as elbow. Optimum economic pipe diameter for fluid flow is determined by the a. total cost considerations (pumping cost plus fixed cost of the pipe) d. increase in the reflux ratio may result a. maximum permissible vapor velocity b. lower fixed charges for the column b.04/(NRE)0. 25 and 60 b. f = 16/NRE b. entering branch) would be a. Le/D for a Tee (used as elbow. entering run) c. The value of Le /D (dimensionless) for 45r elbow and 180r close return bends would be respectively around a.5 25/NRE 38. viscosity of the fluid b. none of these. 100 and 250 d.36. f = 0. total cost consideration (fixed cost of the column plus the cooling water and steam cost) d. 180 and 300 d. 60 c. 60 b. negligible . greater cost for the condenser coolant d. none of these 40. f = a. Optimum reflux ratio in a continuous distillation column is determined by the a. Pressure drop due to pipe fittings can be estimated by p/V = 4f (Le/D) (V2/2gc) where Le = equivalent length of straight pipeline which will incur the same frictional loss as the fitting and D = diameter of the fitting. (b) and (c) 39. flooding limit of the column c.

6" diameter cap with 4" diameter riser c. 8" diameter cap with 1" diameter riser d.49 V 0.487 Qc 0. Diopt ! q f 0. the optimum inside pipe diameter is given by a. much less (say 2% than that for fully open globe valve) c.13 0. ft3/sec V = fluid density.9 q f 0.45 0. The most common standard size of bubble caps used in industrial operation is a. the optimum inside pipe diameter is given by a.025 0. 25 c. Le/D for fully open globe valve may be around a.364 Qc 0.14 0.45 Qc 0.95 c. a.5" diameter riser b. Le/D for fully open gate valves would be a.45.182 49. inches 48. not for absorption c.18 Qc 0. a. 10 b. operating pressure and welding / joint efficiency c. 1" diameter cap with 0. centipoise Diopt = optimum inside pipe diameter. Bubble cap plate column is a. much more than that for fully open globe valve b.18 d. 75 d. Diopt ! 4.9 q f Diopt ! 3. The necessary wall thickness for a metallic storage vessel is a function of the a. a differential stage contactor d. For laminar flow (NRe < 2100) in steel pipe.28 c. a finite stage contactor b. For turbulent flow (NRe>2100) of low viscosity fluid (Q<20 cp) in steel pipes. a continuous contactor 51. all (a).7 q f d. Diopt ! 3. around 7 d.45 V 0. 4" diameter cap with 8" diameter riser . Diopt ! q f 0. used only for distillation.36 Qc 0. ultimate tensile strength (or yield point) of the material and operating temperature b.6 q f Diopt ! 3 q f 0. Diopt ! 3. Diopt ! 3 q f 0. diameter of the vessel d. 300 47. lb/ft3 Q c = fluid viscosity. both (b) and (c) 46. (b) and (c) 50.36 Qc where q f = fluid flow rate.

5 is recommended to prevent plugging of the slots by residue build up.0. 3. For a given design of bubble cap. the ratio of the total riser area to the tower cross sectional area (for bubble cap towers of diameter more than 3 ft) is around a. Weep holes provided in the plates of a distillation column a.5 d. are normally located near the overflow weir so that any delivery of liquid during operation follow approximately the same path as the overflow fluid c. the gas may pass through the skirt clearance d. Maximum and minimum linear slot velocities (in the distillation column design) as recommended by Davies are respectively a. c. 0.6 b. plate spacing c. drain the liquid from the tray when the unit is not in operation.2 d. b.5 c. must be large enough (usually 1/4 inch to 5/8 inch diameter) to prevent plugging but should not deliver excessive amount of fluid during operation d.5 55. 0. .4/ 0. allowable gas velocity through the slots b. a skirt clearance of 0.1 . 3. guard against foaming and entrainment by dumping anti-forming agent through it.0. all (a). 0. maintenance and installation c.52.3. allow for thermal expansion and facilitate installation c.5 to 1. The function of manholes provided in the shell of a distillation column is to a.0. 0. all (a). If sufficient slot area is not provided.4/ Q0.55 .5 and 12/ 0.4/ 0. diameter of the column d.5 and 12/ Q0.0.4 . all (a). (b) and (c) 54. Normally.5 b.75 c. the number of bubble caps to be used per tray is set by the a. none of these 57. An adequate clearance between the tray and the shell wall of a distillation column is provided to a. Pick out the wrong statement pertaining to the design of the distillation column a.5 and 3. The purpose of the slot is to disperse the gas into the liquid in the form of small bubbles. b. 12/ Q0. (b) and (c) 58.5 and 12/ Q0. Generally. give access to the individual trays for cleaning. keep a check on the liquid gradient over the plate by direct visual observation b. (b) and (c).35 . avoid back-trapping d. none of these 53. facilitate draining out liquid from a tray when the unit is not in operation b. d.85 56.4/ 0.

2"-3. maldistribution of gas b. 6" b. b.vapor velocity in the volume between the plates d. 34" . Excessive liquid gradient on a tray may result in a. results in higher pressure drop per tray c.5" . The minimum plate spacing in most of the petroleum refinery distillation columns (of diameter 73 ft) is normally a. Which of the following factors determine the amount of entrainment in a distillation column? a.59. large reflux ratio 62. Larger depth of liquid on the trays of a distillation column a. c. 6" b. (b) and (c) 60. back trapping c. (b) and (c). Liquid gradient over a tray can be minimized by a. large plate spacing d. 63. lead to high tray efficiency b. low gas velocity c. Liquid gradient over the tray results due to a. 34" 66. using split flow. depth of liquid above the bubble cap slots c. the resistance offered to flow of liquids by caps and risers and the flow of gas. all (a). 18" c. both (a) and (b) d. 12" c.25" b.5" c. 0. 18" d. (b) and (c) 64. gas blowing beneath cap skirt d.1. providing a higher skirt clearance or a higher weir b. The maximum liquid gradient over a tray must not exceed a. all (a). 24" d. decreasing the number of rows of caps through which the liquid flows or by decreasing the velocity of liquid flow past the caps or by reducing the distance along the tray through which the liquid must flow. half the tray spacing 61. The minimum tray spacing in distillation column of diameter than 3 ft is normally a. neither (a) nor (b) 65. plate spacing b. d. 5" d. all (a). radial flow or cascade flow for column diameter larger than 4 ft.

2 ft irrespective of column diameter (for column 73 ft diameter) 70.1 2. excessive liquid gradient over the tray d. The liquid head in the downcomer should not be greater than one half the plate spacing to avoid flooding. The transfer function of the first order system is (a) __1 (b) _1_ Ts + 1 Ts (d) 1/s (c) ___s__ Ts + 1 3. 69. A calming section below the liquid flows into the downcomer is provided to a.8 times the column diameter b.0. it may entrain some vapor. The length of straight rectangular weir used on cross-flow trays is generally a. b. c. low gas velocity b.67. reduce the discharge fluctuation c.1 s² . ensure better vapor liquid contract d. 0.6 . equal to the column diameter c. twice the column diameter d. Pick out the first order system from among the following (a) damped vibrator (b) mercury in glass thermometer kept in boiling water (c) interacting system of two tanks in series (d) non-interacting system of two tanks in series . Back-trapping in a distillation column results due to a. high gas velocity c. d. cool the liquid before it flows down. What is the Laplace transform of sin t ? (a) __1__ (b) __s_____ s² + 1 1 + s² (c) __1 (d) __s_____ s² . none of these INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL 1.If sufficient residence time (around 8 seconds) is not provided to the downcoming liquid in the downcomer. low reflux ratio 68. The discharge end of the downcomer must project far enough into the tray liquid so that no gas bubbles can enter the open end and bypass the bubble caps. permit release of entrained vapor in the liquid b. Pick out the wrong statement a.

f and log Ø vs. The frequency at which maximum amplitude ratio is attained is called (a) corner frequency (b) resonant frequency (c) cross-over frequency (d) natural frequency 11. f (c)AR vs. Degree to which an instrument indicates the changes in measured variable without dynamic error is called (a) speed of response (b) reproducibility of instrument (c) fidelity (d) its static characteristics .5 (d) Decibel = log10 (AR) 8. Bode diagram is a plot of (a) log (AR) vs. log (f) (b) log (AR) vs.7 and < 30º 10. Response of a system to a sinusoidal input called (a) impulse response (b) unit step response (c) frequency response (d) step response 5.7 and > 30º (c) < 1. Typical specifications for design stipulates the gain margin and phase margin to be respectively (a) > 1. For measuring the temperature of a furnace.log (f) and Ø vs.4. which is the most suitable instrument? (a) Platinum resistance thermometer (b) Thermocouple (c) Optical pyrometer (d) Bimetallic thermometer 14.7 and < 30º (d) >1. log (f) and Ø vs. Phase lag of the sinusoidal response of a first order system is (a) 120º (b) 30º (c) 180º (d) 90º 7. log f 13. A control system is unstable if the open loop frequency response exhibits an amplitude ratio exceeding unity at the cross-over frequency.7 and > 30º (b) < 1. Conversion formula for converting amplitude ratio (AR) into decibels is (a) Decibel=20 log10 (AR) (b) Decibel=20 log e(AR) (c) Decibel=20 log10 (AR)0. log (f) (d) log (AR) vs. A negative gain margin expressed in decibels means (a) a stable system (b) unstable system (c) critically damped system (d) both a and c 12. What is the ratio of output amplitude to input amplitude for a sinusoidal forcing function in a first order system ? (a) 1 (b) > 1 (c) < 1 (d) none of these 6. This is (a) Bode stability criterion (b) Nyquist criterion (c) Routh stability criterion (d) both b and c 9.

Which of the following relates the absorption and evolution of heat at the junctions of a thermocouple to the current flow in the circuit? (a) Seebeck effect (b) Peltier effect (c) Joule heating effect (d) Thomson effect 20. Optimal activity of a solution can be determined using a (a) polarimeter (b) polarograph (c) dilatometer (d) refractometer . Which of the following is a desirable characteristic of an instrument? (a) high drift (b) high fidelity (c) high temperature lag (d) poor reproducibility 16. (a) mercury thermometer (b) bimetallic thermometer (c) radiation pyrometer (d) radiation pyrometer 18.15. Pick out the most suitable instrument for measuring temperature in the range of -40 to 800ºF. Psychrometer determines (a) humidity of gases (b) moisture content of solids (c) water of crystallization (d) hygroscopic nature of solids 23. Which of the following shows maximum dip affect (indicating reverse direction of temperature change)? (a) mercury thermometer (b) radiation pyrometer (c) bimetallic thermometer (d) thermocouple 17. Gas analysis is commonly done using (a) thermal conductivity cell (b) X-ray diffraction (c) mass spectrometer (d) emission spectrometer 22. Continuous measurement of moisture content of paper in paper industry is done by measuring (a) thermal conductivity through the paper (b) electrical resistance through the paper (c) magnetic susceptibility (d) both b and c 24. Thermocouple is suitable for measuring (a) liquid temperatures only (b) very high temperatures only (c) very low temperatures only (d) both high and low temperatures 19. Thermal wells are used in temperature measurement to (a) guard against corrosive and oxidizing action on thermocouple materials (b) reduce measuring lag (c) increase the fidelity (d) increase the sensitivity 21.

Pick out the symbol for locally mounted instrument in instrumentation diagram (a) (b) _ (c) (d) 35. Pirani gauge is used for (a) measurement of very high pressure (b) measurement of high vacuum (c) liquid level under pressure (d) liquid level at atmospheric pressure 27. Continuous measurement of flow rates of dry granular fertilizer is done using (a) velocity meters (b) area-meters (c) weighing meters (d) anemometer 34. Continuous measurement of specific gravity of a liquid is done by (a) hydrometer (b) contact-type electric indicators (c) displacement meter (d) both a and c 30. Which of the following flow-metering instruments is an area meter? (a) venturi meter (b) rotameter (c) pitot tube (d) hot wire anemometer 33. Flow rate through an orifice is (a) proportional to the pressure differential (b) inversely proportional to the square root of pressure differential (c) proportional to the square root of pressure differential (d) inversely proportional to the square root of pressure differential 32. The level of a liquid under pressure can be determined using (a) bubbler system (b) differential pressure manometer (c) diaphragm box system (d) air-trap system 29.25. Hot wire anemometer is used for the measurement of (a) flow rates of fluid (b) flow rates of granular solids (c) very high temperature (d) thermal conductivity of gases 31. A simple pitot tube measures (a) average velocity (b) maximum velocity (c) point velocity (d) static pressure 26. A barometer measures (a) absolute pressure (b) gauge pressure (c) both absolute and gauge pressure (d) dynamic pressure 28. Which is the symbol for pneumatic control valve (a) (b) (c) (d) none of these 36. The symbol for capillary line in instrumentation diagram is .

Stalagmometer is used for the measurement of (a) kinematic viscosity (b) surface tension (c) refractive index (d) optical activity 40. Phase margin is equal to (a) 180º . Bode stability method uses (a) open loop transfer function (b) closed loop transfer function (c) either a or b (d) neither a nor b 46.90º 44.180º (c) phase lag + 180º (d) phase lag . Stroboscope is used for the measurement of (a) rpm of a flywheel (b) frequency of light (c) depression of freezing point (d) liquid level under pressure 41. Dilatometer is used to measure (a) stress (b) strain (c) deflection (d) contraction/expansion due to changes in temperature 39.phase lag (b) phase lag . Routh stability method uses (a) open loop transfer function (b) closed loop transfer function (c) either a or b (d) neither a nor b 47. A system with a transfer function __2s _ is of 4s + 1 (a) zero order (b) 1st order (c) 2nd order (d) 3rd order 45.(a) ___ ___ _ ___ _ ___ (c) _________________ (b) (d) 37. Nichel s chart deals with . Gain margin is equal to the (a) amplitude ratio (b) reciprocal of amplitude ratio (c) gain in P controller (d) gain in P-I controller 43. Instrumentation in a plant offers the advantage of (a) greater safety of operation (b) better quality of product (c) greater operation economy (d) all a. b and c 38. Minute depression of freezing point of a liquid solvent or addition of a solid solute can be best measured by (a) Beckman thermometer (b) dilatometer (c) mercury thermometer (d) bimetallic thermometer 42.

In an exothermic chemical reactor.R. Cascade control means . 51. Resistance of a gas in a vessel is (a) __V__ (b) nRT nRT V (c) nRT (d) __P_ P nRT Where: P =pressure V= volume of the vessel n= number of moles of the gas R= gas constant 52. 50. the manipulated variable is the flow rate of (a) coolant (b) reactant (c) product (d) hot fluid 53.R. vs. open loop value (d) frequency response values of controllers The fluid used in hydraulic controller is (a) water (b) steam (c) air (d) oil Number of poles in a system with transfer function ________1______ is s² + 2s² + 1 (a) 2 (b) 5 (c) 3 (d) 1 Which of the following controllers has maximum offset? (a) P-controller (b) P-I controller (d) P-I-D controller (c) P-D controller Process degrees of freedom (a) indicates the maximum number of controller to be used (b) indicates the minimum number of controller to be used (c) determines both maximum and minimum number of controllers to be used (d) gives no idea of controllers 52. phase lag of second order (c) closed loop values vs. Which of the following error integral is considered as the best criterion in controller settings? (a) œ’ | e | dt (b) œ’ | e | dt 0 0 (c) œ’ 0 e 2 dt (d) both a and b 55. 49. phase lag of first order (b) A.48. (a) A. Use of I-control along with P-control facilitates (a) elimination of offset (b) reduction of offset (c) reduction of stability time (d) both b and c 54. vs.

Wheatstone s bridge circuit Pressure of 0. 62. 60.f. 58. 66. 65. 63. 67.01 psi (absolute) can be measured by (a) Ionization gauge (b) Pirani gauge (c) Mcleoid gauge (d) Bourdon gauge Continuous measurement of moisture in paper is done by (a) sling psychrometer (b) hair-hygrometer (c) weighing (d) high resistance.0001 absolute psi can be measured by (a) Meloid gauge (b) Pirani gauge (c) Thermocouple gauge (d) Bourdon gauge E. 61.m. 64. 59. generated by thermocouples is of the order of (a) millivolts (b) microvolts (c) volts (d) bi-metallic thermometer Measurement of sub-zero Celsius temperature in industry is done by (a) thermocouples (b) resistance thermometers (c) gas thermometer (d) bi-metallic thermometer Starting temperature of optical radiation pyrometer is (a) 800ºC (b) 400ºC (c) 1200ºC (d) 1500ºC Which thermocouple can be used to measure temperature around 1400ºC? (a) copper-constantan (b) aluminum-chromel (c) platinum-platinum+rhodium (d) copper-aluminum pH meter has (a) one cell (b) two cells (c) three cells (d) no cell Maximum differential pressure in liquid manometer is (a) 20 psi (b) 30 psi (c) 40 psi (d) 50 psi Interfacial level in pressure vessel is measured by (a) float (b) manometers of float type (c) U-tube manometer (d) Bourdon gauge 68. 57.56. (a) feed forward control (b) more than one feed-back loop (c) on-off control (d) one feed-back loop Which of the following controllers has the least maximum deviation? (a) P-controller (b) P-I controller (c) P-I-D controller (d) P-D controller Measurement of pressure in ammonia reactor is done by (a) Bourdon gauge (b) U-tube manometer (c) Inclined tube manometer (d) Pirani gauge Pressure of 0. Flow rate of sludge is measured by .

(a) V-notch (b) rectangular notch (c) circular pipe (d) Kennison nozzle Composition of natural gas can be determined by (a) chromatograph (b) orsat apparatus (c) spectrometer (d) photometer Bellows are made of (a) leather (b) paper (c) plastic (d) thin copper Flapper nozzle is a (a) pneumatic controller (b) hydraulic controller (c) electronic controller (d) both a and b Weir valve is used for (a) slurries (b) acids (c) neutral solutions (d) bases Valve used to supply oil to burner is (a) gate valve (b) butterfly valve (c) rotary plug valve (d) both a and b Mode used for transmitting signal for one kilometer distance is (a) hydraulic (b) pneumatic (c) electronic (d) all a. 77. 76. 75. b and c Use of pilot in transmission (pneumatic) is to (a) speed up signal (b) change the flow of air (c) adjust the signal (d) all a. 70. 72. 80. b and c Final control element is a (a) valve (b) switch (c) signal (d) both a and b Example of a second order instrument is a (a) mercury-glass thermometer with covering (b) bare mercury-glass thermometer (c) pressure gauge (d) Bourdon gauge Offset (a) varies with time (b) varies exponentially with time (c) does not vary with time (d) varies as square of the time Regulator problem means that (a) set point is constant (b) load is constant (c) both set point and load are constant (d) neither set point nor load is constant Servo problem means that (a) set point is constant (b) load is constant (c) both a and b (d) neither a nor b 81. 71. 78. 73. 74.69. Critically damped system means that the damping coefficient is . 79.

P-I controller as compared to P-controller has a (a) higher maximum deviation (b) longer response time (d) all a.8% of the final value when a step change of input is made is called (b) settling time (a) time constant (c) rise time (d) derivative time 91. Steady state deviation resulting from a change in the value of the load variable is called (a) offset (b) error ratio (c) deviation (d) static ratio 90. A controller action in which there is a continuous linear relation between value of the controlled variable and rate of change of controlled output signal is called (a) proportional action (b) integral action (c) derivative action (d) proportional-integral action . b and c (c) longer period of oscillation 87. amplitude ratio at 180º should be (a) 1 (b) < 1 (c) > 1 (d) 0 83. Laplace transform method is used for (a) linear behavior (b) non-linear behavior (c) both a and b (d) neither a nor b 85. The time difference by which the output of a P-D controller leads the input when the input changes linearly with time is called (a) error ratio (b) derivative time (c) proportional sensitivity (d) gain 89. Difference at any instant between the value of controlled variable and the set point is called (a) deviation (b) derivative time (c) error ratio (d) differential gap 88.(a) 1 (b) < 1 (c) > 1 (d) 0 82. Phase lag of first order system is (a) tan-1 ( T) (b) tan-1 ( T) (c) T/2 (d) 0 86. In Bode stability criterion. Time required for the output of a first order system to change from a given value to within 36. Phase plane method is used for (a) linear-behavior (b) non-linear behavior (c) both a and b (d) neither a nor b 84.

Thermistor is a (a) semiconductor whose resistance decreases with temperature rise (b) metal whose resistance increases linearly with temperature rise (c) metal whose resistance does not vary with temperature (d) device for measuring nuclear radiation 96. Which of the following is suitable for measuring the temperature of a red hot moving object (e. Selection of material for thermocouple depends on the (a) depth of immersion in the hot fluid (b) minimum and maximum temperature (c) pressure and velocity condition of the fluid whose temperature is to be measured (d) both a and b . Steady state ratio of the change of proportional controller output variable and the change in actuating signal is called (a) proportional sensitivity (b) reset rate (c) rangeability (d) integral action 94. A controller action in which there is a continuous relation between value of the controlled variable and the value of the output signal of the controller is called (a) proportional action (b) derivative action (c) integral action (d) proportional-derivative action 93. Which of the following factors does not influence measurement accuracy? (a) static and dynamic error (b) reproducibility (c) dead zone (d) none of these 97. Thermocouples (a) have very slow speed of response (b) can t be connected to the measuring instrument remotely located (c) need cold junction compensation (d) are much less accurate compared to bimetallic or vapor pressure thermometer 99. the pressure difference signal is proportional to (a) Q² (b) Q 3 (c) Q (d) 1 / Q where Q= volumetric flow rate 95. In case of flow measurement by an orifice. steel ingots on roller table) ? (a) thermocouple (b) radiation pyrometer (c) thermistor (d) radiograph 98.92.g.

100. Orifice plates for flow measurement (a) incurs very low permanent pressure loss (b) has poor accuracy on high orifice ratios (above 0. Pitot tube is used (a) for highly accurate flow measurement (b) when the fluid contains lot of suspended material (c) when the line is large and the velocity is high (d) both a and c 106. A rotameter (a) incurs constant and small permanent pressure drop (b) incurs constant but very large permanent pressure drop (c) is inaccurate for low flow rates (d) need not be mounted always vertically . V-notch is used to measure flow rate of a liquid in (a) an open channel (b) a non-circular cross-section closed channel (c) vertical pipeline (d) horizontal pipeline 102. Radiation pyrometers (a) have very low speed of response (b) need not see the temperature source. rotameter). sand) can be best measured by (a) pitot tube (b) concentric orifice (c) eccentric orifice (d) rotameter 104. In an area meter (e.75) (c) can t be easily interchanged (d) is best for very large liquid flows and big pipelines 105.g. b and c 107.g. Flow rate of a liquid containing heavy solids (e. the flow rate is (a) proportional to the square root of the differential pressure (b) inferred from the change in area of an orifice in the flow line across which the pressure differential is constant zero (c) inferred from change in flow cross-section across which the pressure differential is zero (d) all a. Which of the following is not a head flowmeter? (a) segmental orifice plate (b) pitot tube (c) rotameter (d) flow nozzle 103. it is measuring (c) can t measure temperature of objects without making physical contact (d) none of these 101.

gypsum c. Floating control action (a) moves the final control element at constant speed in either direction in response to an error signal (b) changes the position of the final control element from on to off (c) is used to counteract rapid load changes (d) both b and c 110. rubber d.e. moist ferric hydroxide) b. carbon free iron d. wrought iron c. high carbon steel d. b. pig iron b. b and c MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION 1. Bog iron is used for adsorption of H2S from coke oven gas is a. Cascade control is (a) the continuous adjustment of the set point index of an automatic control loop by a primary (master) controller (b) used when changes in process conditions cause serious upsets in controlled variable (c) useful to control flow from temperature (d) all a.108. talc b. Iron alloyed with carbon up to 2% is called a. none of these 2. an intimate mixture of saw dust and iron dust (i. none of these . On-off control (a) fully opens the final control element when the measured variable is below the set point (b) fully closes the final control element when the measured variable is above the set point (c) is a two position (fully open or fully closed) control adequate to control a process with slow reaction rate and minimum dead time or transfer lag (d) all a. none of these 3. iron impregnated with resin (usually bakelite) c. and c 109. The softest material in Mho s scale (for measuring hardness) is a.

high silica cast iron c. 4 6% c.aluminum. lead. aluminum. aluminum and nickel d. none of these 9. 8% carbon 10. 0 11. Karbate is a. nickel and chromium c. White metal is an alloy of a.2% carbon b. tin and cadmium b. For storing water and acid free benzol. molybdenum and tungsten 7. copper and lead d. Presence of cobalt in steel improve its a. corrosion resistance c. 0. monel b. karbate c. cast iron d. Duralumin is an alloy of a. both (b) and (c). none of these 8. none of these 13. nickel and silicon c.1 2% b. 0. Brine (15% concentration) can be stored in a vessel made of a. copper and manganese b . 5. use a. 5. monel d. karbate vessel c. 2% carbon c. The impure iron (Pig iron) that is taped out from blast furnace contains about a. steel vessel b. 4% carbon d. tin and zinc c. stainless steel vessel d. monel c. none of these 6. . lead and vanadium d. Corrosion resistance of steel is increased by the addition of a. Carbon content in steel is a. phosphorus and tungsten b. An ideal material of construction for the storage of 50% caustic soda solution would be a. tensile strength d. none of these 14. karbate d. aluminum or chromium alloys (Cr > 18% for cold acid). acid resistant material d. Karbate b. cutting ability b. copper. carbon impregnated with resin (usually bakelite) c.10% d. a mixture of iron dust and saw dust b. cast iron b. none of these 12. Most suitable material of construction for the storage of concentrated nitric acid is a.4.

and 8 10% nickel c. lead lined steel 24. cast iron b.15. Brass is an alloy of b. 22% nickel and 2 4% molybdenum d. 10 14% nickel and 2 3% molybdenum b. fire clay bricks d. nickel. phosphorus and nickel d. karbate d. nickel d. karbate d. gun metal drums 22. cast iron b. 2 4% chromium. stainless steel or glass lined vessel c. none of these 21. copper and aluminum 16. 20 22% chromium. brass drums d. PVC 18. Most common stainless steel type 316. stainless steel b. The carbonating tower used in Solvay Process of soda ash manufacture is made of a. which it highly resistant to corrosion contains a. Polymerization reactor used for the production of styrenebutadiene rubber (SBR) is made of a. stainless steel c. mild steel d. lead or glass c. Babbit metal (used for making bearings) comprises a. tin and zinc c. vessel b. Chlorination of benzene is done to produce benzene hexachloride (a pesticide) in a photochemical reactor lined with a. karbate b. Gun metal is an alloy of a. karbate 20. The material of construction of pressure mills used for squeezing out the juice from sugar cane is a. Caustic soda can be stored in a. tin and copper b. copper and zinc a. steel drums b. steel c. zinc and aluminum d. cast iron c. mainly tin (85%) and lead b. nickel and zinc 23. saw dust and iron dust mixture c. Which of the following is the most suitable material of construction for evaporator and its tubes for concentrating NaOH solution to 70%? a. phosphorus and nickel . 17. tin and lead d. cast iron drums c. wrought iron 19. nickel and tin c. 16 13% chromium. monel. copper. copper. manganese. copper.

stainless steel c. chromium and molybdenum b. Stainless steel contains a. zinc and aluminum d. cast iron c. copper c. wrought iron 29. nickel d. nickel and zinc b. silica c. In the Kraft (sulfate) process for the paper manufacture the digester is made of a. Bronze is an alloy of a. stainless steel 31. nickel and chromium c. graphite and moving mercury c. Dry chlorine can be handled in a vessel made of a.25. copper and tin c. brass 30. Marcy ball mills are usually made of a. nickel and copper d. moving mercury and crimped steel wire 33. German silver is an alloy of a. nickel and zinc 35. molybdenum and nickel d. karbate carbon d. high alumina and high magnesia bricks 28. copper and zinc 27. Tank furnace used for melting of glass is made of a. silver. chromium and aluminum . lead and copper b. vanadium 32. molybdenum and nickel b. Rotary kilns in cement industry are lined with a. aluminum d. Caustic soda is reduced in a mercury cell having anode and cathode made respectively of a. steel b. copper. PVC c. lead d. stainless steel d. chromium and nickelb. copper. molybdenum and aluminum d. Chromel (Nichrome) is an alloy of a. moving mercury and carbon d. cast iron c. cast iron b. aluminum and silver c. moving mercury and graphite b. fire clay b. iron or steel b. refractory blocks d. bronze 26. mild steel b. nickel and copper c. molybdenum and zinc 34. silver. Monel metal is an alloy of a.

Valves in pipe sizes of 2 and under are normally made of a. lead lined steel 37. SO3 is absorbed using H2SO4 in a. cannot be heated c. calcium silicate d. packing material used is of a. packed steel tower lined with acid proof bricks d. karbate d. is broken by small temperature changes d. stainless steel vessel c. is lined with rubber d. chemical stoneware c. is lined with acid-proof bricks 38. Hydrochloric acid absorber is made of a. mild steel c. cast iron vessel lined with acid-proof masonry brick d. none of these 42. metallic silver 40. (b) and (c) . mildly 45. not d. Fill up the blanks from among the following alternatives: Hydrochloric acid is _______ corrosive to common metals a. acidic refractory b. brass c. Hydrochloric acid is stored in a. silver halide c. Acid proof stoneware a. Steel tower used for storage of oleum a. stainless steel plate tower c. cast iron vessel 39. silver nitrate b. Aqueous nitric acid is stored in a. stainless steel d. mild steel 46. refractory blocks c. monel 47. rubber-lined steel vessel c. Photographic plates are coated in a. cast iron b. Sulfuric acid is mixed with ground phosphate rock (to produce phosphoric acid) in a steel digester lined with a. steel drum b. stainless steel vessel d. cast iron b. highly c.36. cast iron b. karbate d. lead lined steel vessel b. lead or acid-proof bricks 44. karbate d. is lined with lead b. wrought iron b. cast iron vessel 41. In SO3 absorber (Contact Process). stainless steel 43. Urea autoclave is made of a. has very low strength b. cast iron packed tower b. rubber c. need not be lined c. least b. all (a). bronze d.

copper and nickel d. zinc and tin 54. resilience d. karbate 51. chromium and carbon . Wrought iron is a. high silicon iron c. copper and tin c. (b) and (c) 50. tin. Hastelloy comprises a. especially resistant to solutions containing H2SO4 b. creep b. erosion c. by melting to adjacent pieces with a torch) c. all (a). hooks and couplings d. all (a). high carbon steel b. having very low elastic limit resulting in permanent deformation from either mechanical or thermal strain d. toughness a. copper and zinc b. aluminum d. nickel and chromium c. hence used for chain links. corrosion resistance b.48. all (a). The most resistant material to alkaline corrosion is a. zinc and nickel b. wrought iron c. usually joined by burning (e. resilience 57. copper and nickel d. iron. (b) and (c) 49.g.malleable and ductile. Slow and progressive deformation of a material with time under constant stress is called a. Bell metal is an alloy of a. (b) and (c) 52. prone to breakage due to thermal expansion because of very high coefficient of thermal expansion. copper and tin b. Lead pipe is a. creep d. Inconel is an alloy of a. An alloy of iron containing 4% carbon is called a. highly resistance to acid corrosion c . ductility c. acid resistant. d. Ability of a material to absorb energy in deformation in the plastic range is characterized as its b. mild steel d. none of these 53. wear resistance d. high carbon iron b. copper and nickel c. brittle and very hard b. an alloy of iron. Presence of nickel in steel improves its a. zinc and tin 55. cutting ability c. lead and tin 56. Duriron is a. molybdenum and nickel d. nickel c. none of these 58. duriron b.

mild steel. cutting ability c. H2SO4 (95% concentration) d. Out of the following. aqua regia b.3% carbon) b. wet chlorine b.59. elasticity and creep resistance 62. bromine b. synthetic detergent solution c. hydrochloric acid (10%) d. aqueous ammonia b. phosphoric acid (95%) and sulfuric acid (95% and fuming) 67. silicon b. dry chlorine and dry fluorine c. Gun metal and bronze are not corroded by the action of a. phosphorus c. Freon b. Brass container is suitable for storing a.5 1. highly resistance to corrosion (as much as stainless steel) c. copper vessels are most suitable for the storage of a. none of these 64. a low carbon steel (0. H2SO4 (95%) at room temperature c. glass. phosphoric acid (95%) 65. ferrous sulfate c. stainless steel. very poor in strength and ductility 61. Aluminum storage vessel can be used to store a. H2SO4 (<50% concentration) is corrosive to a. rubber (butyl and hard) silicon rubber and teflon d. Cast iron vessels are not suitable for the storage of a. hydrochloric acid (10%) d. sulfur d. concrete and tin b. beer c. cast iron and high silicon iron (14% Si) c. aluminum. a high carbon steel (0. Presence of manganese in alloy steel improves its a. H2SO4 (fuming) d. nitric acid (<25%) . abrasion resistance and toughness d. corrosion resistance b.05 0. porcelain and stoneware 63. Which of the following constituents of cast iron is mainly responsible for imparting it an anti-corrosive property? a. graphite. nitric acid (95% and fuming) d. Wet SO2 66.5% carbon) d. none of these 60. Mild steel is a. copper.

anhydrous ammonia b. sulfuric acid (25%) 71.68. sulfuric acid (10%) d. 18% chromium and 8% molybdenum c. both (b) and (c) 78. Silicon rubber is not resistant to the corrosive action of a. an alloy of lead and tin d. aromatic solvents c. acetic acid b. hydrochloric acid (95%) c. anhydrous ammonia b. Stainless steel is not corroded by a. caustic soda solution b. aqua regia b. all (a). Platinum and silver are corroded by a. 18-8 stainless steel means that it contains a. sulfuric acid (10%) d. aluminum foil clad with bakelite 79. benzoic and boric acids c. chloroform c. Teflon is corroded by a. Mild steel storage vessels are suitable for the storage of a. sulfuric acid up to 60 C d. (b) and (c) 70. nitric acid and hydrochloric acid (concentrated) d. saturated brine 75. all (a). Perspex is nothing but a. hydrochloric acid (95%) d. (b) and (c) 77. hydrochloric acid (10%) b. milk and its products and caustic soda solution c. Tin vessels are corroded by a. 18% molybdenum and 8% chromium 74. ether d. sulfuric acid d. nitric acid (10%) c. Lead lined equipments and vessels are suitable for handling a. phosphoric acid c. hydrochloric acid (concentrated) 69. sulfuric acid (concentrated) 72. fatty acids c. sulfuric acid (10%) b. 18% nickel and 8% chromium d. 18% chromium and 8% nickel b. sulfuric acid (95%) d. none of these 76. fruit juices. sulfuric acid (95%) c. ammonia (both aqueous and anhydrous) b. none of these . Rubber lined vessels are corroded by the action of a. acrylic sheet b. synthetic detergent solution d. hydrochloric acid (10%) b. phosphoric acid (95%) and sulfuric acid (95%) d. none of these 73. Nickel made clad equipments are suitable for handling a. Containers made of high silicon cast iron (14% Si) are not suitable for the storage of a. nitric acid c. hydrochloric acid (10%) b. an elastomer c.

Carbon tetrachloride can be stored in a storage vessel made of a. reinforced concrete lined with lead d. mild steel c. The 'bomb' in the bomb calorimeter is made of a. mild steel d. fluorine (dry or wet) b. The most commonly used resin for making reinforced plastic is a. Graphite is corroded by a. stainless steel c. 18-8 stainless steel c. tin lined with refractory bricks . all (a). unsaturated polyester b. hypochlorous acid 91. any of these 81. dilute H2SO4 at room temperature d. sulfuric acid (10%) b. polyurethane d. Most suitable material for high pressure vessel operating at 500 atm and 500ºC is a. brine 90. alkaline solutions c. molybdenum stainless steel b. high silicon iron (14% Si) d. high silicon iron (14%) b. Rubber lined pumps can be used to pump a. hydrochloric acid d. chlorinated brine d. Centrifugal pump made of pyrex or glass can't be used to pump a. wood b. saturated brine 84. high silicon iron (14% Si) 92.80. mild and fruit juices b. phosphoric acid d. polyproplylene c. all (a). Rotary dryers are generally made of a. all (a). hydrochloric acid b. Glass is corroded by a. Polythene (low or high density) containers are not corroded by a. nitric acid (95%) at room temperature c. molybdenum stainless steel b. caustic soda b. sea Water b. none these 85. Wood is corroded by a. Concrete tank can be used to store a. nylon 6 82. (b) and (c) 83. alum b. (b) and (c) c. (b) and (c) 87. sulfuric water c. sulfuric acid (10%) at room temperature b. high silicon iron (14% Si) d. cast iron b. Copper is dissolved from its ore by H2SO4 in percolation tanks made of a. sulfuric acid d. tin c. sulfur trioxide at 60 C d. chlorine (dry or wet) d. sulfuric acid c. SO2 (dry or wet) c. stainless steel d. high silicon iron (14% Si) 89. mild steel c. none of these 86. copper 88.

Which of the following materials may prove unsuitable for handling acetic (glacial and anhydrous) at 40ºC? a. having excellent chemical and high temperature resistance (up to 200ºC) c. tin and wood d. nickel and monel 99. Copper. high silicon iron d. Which of the following would not be a suitable material of construction for handling aqueous hydrofluoric acid (HF) at 100ºC? a.93. brass. Kel-F is a. iron and chromium b. aluminum. monel. High silicon iron. an elastomer d. teflon. copper. Kel-F and teflon b. tin. Specify the materials of construction suitable for handling concentrated HNO3 at 100ºC. Which of the following material of construction may be recommended by a chemical engineer for handling a gaseous chlorine (dry or wet) stream in a fluid flow system? a. a. silicone rubber. cast iron and aluminum c. Kel-F and Teflon b. tin and rubber d. none of these 95. tin and aluminum d. none b. glass and porcelain . stainless steel 97. cast iron and high silicon iron b. aluminum. silicon rubber c. all (a). Kel-F and Teflon 96. stainless steel c. 100% H2SO4 at 30ºC can't be used and stored in a vessel made/ lined with a. graphite d. nickel. Concentrated HCl at 30ºC can be stored in a vessel made of a. silicone rubber. mild steel and stainless steel c. mild steel and tin 100. high silicon iron. Cast iron. PTFE and porcelain b. nothing but polycholorotrifluroethylene b. nickel. stainless steel and high silicon cast iron d. (b) and (c) 94. teflon. stainless steel and graphite c. cast iron. and copper d. copper. Zircaloy used as a fuel cladding material in a nuclear reactor (thermal) is an alloy of zirconium a. and graphite c. porcelain and wood b. Mild steel and stainless steel c. nickel and monel 98.

ENGINEERING ECONOMY 1. investment . amortization d. An estimate of an assets' net market value at the end of its estimated life. depreciation d. indirect cost d. break even point b. depreciation d. compound interest b. obsolescence 4. The type of interest that is periodically added to the amount of loan so that subsequent interest is based on the cumulative amount. face value 6. break even point c. balance sheet 5. The length of time. obsolescence 9. present worth method d. depreciated cost b. law of demand and supply b. a. a. a. interest rate d. law of diminishing returns c. simple interest c. book value 10. usually in years for the cumulative net annual profit to equal the investment is called: a. production b. liabilities and net worth a. cash flow 11. scrap value c. payback period 3. supplies 2. An estimate of an assets' net market value at the end if its estimated life. The worth of property which is equal to the original cost less depreciation. book value d. a. a. depreciation c. A lessening of the value of an asset due to a decrease in the quantity available as a coal. balance method d. salvage value c. sinking fund 7. interest d. investment c. interest b. book value c. depreciation c. price earning ratio d. depletion b. The price at which a given product will be supplied and purchased is the price that will result in the supply and the demand being equal. The following cost item which in common both the fixed and operating cost of an enterprise is: a. earning value b. cash flow 8. The reduction in value and marketability due to competition from newest products / model a. taxes d. break even point b. return of investment c. Output or sales at which income is insufficient to equal operating cost a. cash flow c. fixed cost c. Form of summary of assets. receivable turnover b. oil and timber in forests. a.

The quantity of a certain commodity that is bought at a certain price at a given place and time. capital expenditure b. corporation 20. borrowed capital 15. a. sole proprietorship b. investment 17. enterprise c. appraisal b. The quantity of a certain commodity that is offered for sale at a certain price at a given place and time a. loss d. supply b. a. a. A condition where only few individuals produce a certain product that action of one will lead to almost the same action by the other. Funds supplied by others on which a fixed rate of interest must be paid and the debt be repaid at a specific place and time a. discount d. investment 16. written contract d. equity capital 13. deficit . The reduction in the money value of a capital asset is called a. perfect competition 18. supply b. capital expenditure d. sole proprietorship b. cash flow c. capital loss c. capital gain c. semi monopoly d. working capital d. partnership d. equity capital b. partnership d. discount b. partnership d. A distinct legal entity which can practically transact any business transaction which a real person could do. corporation 19. Funds supplied and used by owners of an enterprise in the expectation that profit will be earned.12. bond c. enterprise c. working capital d. investment c. An association of two or more persons for a purpose of engaging in a profitable business a. enterprise c. profit b. demand c. oligopoly c. a. sole proprietorship b. A certificate of indebtedness of a corporation usually for a period of net loss that ten years and guaranteed by a mortgage on certain assets of the corporation or its subsidiaries. discount d. capital stock 22. a. monopoly b. Is the simplest form of business organization a. present 14. An increase in the value of capital asset is called a. demand c. corporation 21.

T-bills c. amortization c. The amount of a company's profit that the board of directors of the corporation decides to distribute to ordinary shareholders a. return c. The difference between sales revenue and the cost of goods sold a. hard currency c. appraisal c. preferred stock c. both a and b 30. The process of determining the value of certain property for specific reasons a. bond b. dividend b. Represent ownership and enjoys certain preferences than ordinary stock a. money market b. authorized capital stock b. discount b. a document that shows proof of legal ownership of a financial security a. gross profit c. time deposit b. The price that can be obtained from the sale of property or second hand a. The process determining the value of certain properties for definite reasons a. depletion d. certificate of deposit 25. treasury bill d. It is a negotiable claim issued by a bank in lieu of a term deposit a. valuation b. net income b. amortization b. It is the difference between present worth and the worth of the paper at some time in the future a. book value 33. bonds b. Defined as the certificate of indebtedness of a corporation usually for a period not less than 10 years and guaranteed by a mortgage on certain assets of a corporation a. stock d. salvage value d. bond c. fair value d. market value 34. capital gain d. common stock d. salvage value c. bank note c. investment 32. estimate d.23. book value b. depreciation . b. A currency traded in a foreign exchange market for which the demand is consistently high in relation to its supply a. rate of return d. gross national product 24. share stock d. all of these 26. certificate of deposit 27. coupon d. par value 28. investment d. The value which is usually determined by the disinterested third party in order to establish a price that is fair to both seller and buyer. appraisal c. fair value c. market value a. incorporator s stock 31. check 29.

corporation d. lien bond c. debenture bond b. These are costs which remain relatively constant regardless of any change in operation or policy which is made. SYD method d. a. It occurs when a commodity or service is supplied by a number of vendors and there is nothing to prevent additional vendors entering the market a. write off period b. a. ordinary annuity b. law of supply and demand 45. a. extension d. effective interest 43. a. The actual interest earned by a given principal is known as: a. economic life b. partnership c. increment cost c. capital cost . present worth pattern d. mortgage bond 36. write off period c. salvage life 42. annuity due d. perpetuity 37. rate of return b. outlet 44. Straight line method c. deferred annuity c. perfect competition c. franchise c. nominal interest c. An annuity where the payment period extends forever or in which the periodic payment continue indefinitely. all of the above 40.35. A bond whereby the security behind it are the equipments of the issuing corporation a. It is the span of life of an equipment during which it produces the product it is designed to produce at a profit a. physical life c. simple interest d. b. free market b. perpetual life 38. physical life d. In making economy studies. annual cost pattern c. branch a. The length of time at which the original cost of capital used to purchase a unit have already been recovered. fixed cost b. sole proprietorship b. variable cost d. It is a distinct legal entity separate from the individual who own it and which can engage in practically any business transaction which a real person can do. open market d. differential cost 41. economic life d. It is a depreciation method whereby the decrease in value of the unit is constant each year a. Matheson formula b. a. The exclusive right of a company to provide a specific product / services in a given region of the country. collateral bond d. a minimum required profit on the invested capital is included as a cost. Sinking fund method 39. compound interest b.

amortization 51. Gross. pro-forma 52. An index of short term paying ability is called a. labor cost d. progressive annuity d. producer goods b. Used to produce consumer goods a. profit. Kind of obligation which has no condition attached a. declining balance 47. investment 48. receivable turnover c. memorandum d. gratuitous c. supply c. Cost of things that are neither labor nor materials a. current ratio b. perpetuity . A market whereby there is only one buyer of an item for which there are no goods substitute a. barter c. A type of annuity where the payments are made at the start of each period. monopsony c. price earnings 50. deferred annuity d. acid test ratio d. A legally binding agreement on promise to exchange goods or services a. consumer goods d. depreciation c. market value 57. fair value b. Depreciation method where the value of an asset decreases at a decreasing rate. cash flow 54. private d. analytic b. sinking fund c. delayed annuity c. ordinary annuity b. book value d. ROI (rate of return) d. simple annuity 55. oligopsony 56. contract b. deferred annuity b. gross margin c.46. The amount of a property in which a willing buyer will pay to a willing seller for the property when neither one is under the compulsion to buy or sell a. a. goodwill value c. expenses c. It is a series of equal payments occurring at equal interval of time where the first payment is made several periods after the beginning of the payment a. pure 49. profit margin b. interest b. SYD method b. annuity due c. sales less cost of goods sold as a percentage of sale is called a. beginning from the first period a. profit margin ratio 53. The series of equal payments at equal intervals of time a. construction cost b. oligopoly d. straight line method d. annuity d. monopoly b.

franchise value 63. sinking fund factor b. interest rate c. capacity factor d. fixed cost 67. competition b. increment d. It occurs when a unique product or service is available only from a single supplier and entry of all other possible suppliers presented. goodwill value d. yield 60. department store d. The difference between the book value and the actual lower resale value is a. a. present worth factor c. demand factor 62. present worth factor b. resale value c. A method of computing depreciation in which the annual charge is a fixed percentage of the depreciated book value at the beginning of the year to which the depreciation applies a. corporation d. cash flows 65. SYD method d. a. shop c. parlor . time value of money d. declining balance method 59. A place where buyer and seller come together a. inventory d. A change in cost for a small change in volume of production. market value b. book value c. Products that are directly used by people to satisfy their wants. profitability 69. consumer goods c. physical life 64. insular life d. The intangible item of value from the exclusive right of the company to provide a specific product or service in a stated region of the country a. An amount which has been spent and for some reasons cannot be recovered. Double taxation is a disadvantage of which business organization? a. salvage value b. partnership c. sinking fund method c. straight line b. sunk cost b. sunk cost d. enterprise 61. sole proprietorship b. a. The cumulative effect of elapsed time on the money value of an event based on the earning power of equivalent invested funds capital should or will earn a. The length of time during which it is capable of performing the function for which it was designed and manufactured. business life c. The function of interest rate and time that determines the cumulative amount of a sinking fund resulting from specific periodic deposits a.58. first cost c. fixed cost b. economic life b. a. monopoly c. differential cost 66. supply b. producer goods d. sunk cost c. market b. fixed cost 68. a. first cost d.

The price of which a willing buyer will pay to a willing seller for a commodity a. An interest earning fund in which equal deposits are made at equal intervals of time a. the original purchase price and freight and transportation charges b. sinking fund c. use factor 71. molecules in the ground electronic state d. load factor d. scrap value 72. book value d. capital b. resale value b. A term describing wealth which is placed in a business and could include cash equipment. installation expenses c. market value c. rate of return c. The first cost of any property includes a. pressure broadening of hydrogen or deuterium emission lines c. initial taxes and permits' fee d.70. radiation emitted by excited atoms in the flame will not interfere with the absorbance measurement 3. book value c. proportion b. Ratio of annual net profit and the capital invested a. investment 74. interest d. scrap value b. resale value d. annuity b. a recording potentiometer can be used instead of a voltmeter for the readout b. raw materials and finished products a. excited polyatomic molecules c. market value 73. investment c. hot solids b. The hydrogen or deuterium discharge tube can be used as a source of continuous ultraviolet radiation for spectrophotometers because of a. all of the above ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 1. the narrow band pass of modern grating of monochromators 2. assets 75. Line spectra are emitted by a. collateral d. the characteristics of chopper-modulated radiation b. a cooler can be used without decreasing the population of ground-state atoms d. the great sensitivity of photomultiplier tube d. a less sensitive detector can be used instead of the usual photomultiplier tube c. The price of property when sold for a junk a. excited atoms and monatomic ions . Chopping the source beam in conjunction with the use of a tuned ac amplifier in an atomic absorption spectrophotometer accomplishes the following a.

requires two monochromators c. At the temperature of a typical flame. Fe itself. Which of the following best explains why atomic absorption is sometimes more sensitive than flame emission spectroscopy? a. the addition contains a large enough quantity of some substance to swamp out sample variations 3+ and Cu2+ form complexes with EDTA. b. the addition does not dilute the sample appreciably and does not itself introduce appreciable quantities or interfering substances b. The ferric complex is colorless . An absorption line in a flame is always much sharper than an emission line because of the Doppler effect. as is Fe3+ 7. the addition dilutes the sample enough that the concentrations of interfering substances are lowered to negligible values c. c. The photometric titration curve below was obtained when a solution containing both Fe3+ and Cu2+ was titrated with EDTA using a spectrophotometer set at a wavelength of 745 nm in the visible region of the spectrum. eliminates the need for a continuous source b. while EDTA is colorless. Recording spectrophotometers sometimes operate with feedback loops that vary the power of the reference beam until it matches the power of the beam through the sample. with the result that nonlinear response to radiant power would not be deleterious 5. the population of ground-state atoms is much greater than the population of excited atoms. Detectors employed in absorption work are inherently more sensitive than those used to measure emission. 6. d. makes the detector a null device.4. eliminates the need for nonabsorbing solvents d. This mode of operation a. A A B ml of EDTA solution . The method of standard addition compensates for matrix effects provided a. the addition contains none of the substance being determined d. at the concentration involved here: the copper complex is a deep blue color (deeper than the color of Cu2+ itself). Hollow cathode discharge tubes have a much greater radiant power output than do ordinary flames .

a substance for which the distribution of the coefficient. changing the carrier-gas flow-rate a. solute partitioning between stationary and mobile phases is very rapid and the C term in the Van Deemter equation is relatively small c. gases are generally less soluble in liquids at higher temperatures d. A is the iron end point. K. B is the iron end point The distance from A to B on the milliliter axis represents the quantity of iron The quantity of iron could not be calculated from a graph like this unless the quantity of copper in the solution was known ahead of time In chromatography. detector sensitivity is a function of temperature. of its much higher thermal conductivity An important feature of open-tubular GLC column is a. remove impurities from the carrier gas Helium. 13. 11. van der Waals interactions between solutes and stationary phase are stronger at higher temperatures c. helium elutes the sample components more rapidly b. they permit the use of a wider variety of carrier gases d. helium is less expensive than nitrogen c. . is sometimes used as the carrier gas in GLC because a. they can accept much larger samples than can packed column because of their great length b. especially with a thermal conductivity cell Which of the following would have practically no effect upon the retention volume of a solute in GLC? a. immobilize the stationary liquid phase b. rather than nitrogen. the volume within the column occupied by the packing materials b. 10. b. being lighter than nitrogen. solute diffusion coefficients in the liquid phase decrease with increasing temperature b. they can be operated at temperatures closer to the boiling point of the stationary liquid phase than can packed columns and thus handle less volatile examples Raising the column temperature in GLC decreases solute retention times primarily because a. 12. 9. the volume within the pores of the packing material d. adsorb sample components that are insufficiently soluble in the stationary liquid phase c. nitrogen has stable isotopes which separate and cause anomalous column behavior d. provide a "backup" stationary phase in the event that the liquid is lost by evaporation d. d. the total volume of the column c. is zero may be used to estimate a.8. the volume within the column available to the mobile phase The purpose of the solid support material in a GLC column is to a. c.

The adsorption isotherm is usually nonlinear 20. the volume within the column occupied by the packing c. the more strongly it will be adsorbed from a solution b. the number of theoretical plates in the column 15. excessive eddy diffusion d. the nature of the stationary liquid phase d. Which of the following would be the fastest way to decide which adsorbent and what solvent system to use for a larger-scale chromatographic separation of an organic reaction product from materials formed in side reactions? . with everything else the same. changing the chemical nature of the stationary liquid 14. only by replacement with a cation b. S. not influence tR for a solute d. unusually narrow elution bands b. other factors being equal c. only if replaced by another organic molecule on a one-for-one exchange basis d. increasing the stationary liquid loading of the column packing from 5 to 10% by weight c. the stronger the adsorption of the solute d. the baseline width of the elution band d. decreased detector sensitivity 16. a. asymmetric elution band c. the square root of the length of the column c. decrease the nonequilibrium term in the van Deemer equation 17. the area of the elution band c. Increasing the quantity of stationary liquid phase applied to the column packing will.b. The separation factor. the height of the elution band b. A high molecular weight favors adsorption. the total volume of the column 19. the length of the column b. In chromatography. in chromatography depends upon a. by flushing out the water 18. the volume within the pores of the packing material d. decrease tR for a solute c. increase tR for a solute b. The more polar a compound. only by replacement with an anion c. Which of the following statements is false in normal phase absorption? a. a substance for which the distribution coefficient. A neutral molecule such as ethanol or sugar which has found its way into the pores of a typical anion-exchange resin can be eliminated a. the retention volume 21. In GLC. The more polar the solvent. increasing the column temperature d. is zero may be used to estimate a. the volume within the column available to the moving phase b. interaction of solutes with the solid support will often cause a. K. The best measure of the quantity of a solute in LC is a.

b. d. tungsten lamps and Nernst glowers b. In flame spectroscopy. excited atoms and monatomic ions 24. incandescent solids 25. hydrogen-nitrous oxide c. translational . Paper chromatography Affinity chromatography TLC Adsorption chromatography with gradient elution 22. acetylene-oxygen d. Band spectra are emitted by a. Line spectra are emitted by a. a column containing a strong-base anion exchanger in the hydroxyl form c.a. hydrogen-oxygen b. a mixed-bed column containing a strong-acid cation exchanger in the sodium form and a strong-base anion exchanger in the chloride form d. excited atoms and monatomic ions d. amplifier c. A chemical engineer is conducting research on the development of analytical methods based upon chemiluminescence. acetylene-nitrous oxide 27. To deionize tap water by ion exchange for laboratory use. an the instrument has separate switches for its various circuits. the highest temperature fuel oxidant combination available as yet is a. c. power to the motor drive of the scanning monochromator on the emission side of the instrument 26. excited molecules c. detector power supply b. which switch will be left in the "off" position? a. the best approach employs a. a column containing a strong-acid cation exchange in the hydrogen form b. molecules in the ground electronic state d. incandescent solids b. If the change in a molecule caused by absorption of light energy involves change in the average separation of the nuclei of two or more atoms. If a conventional spectrofluorometer is used for the measurements. electronic b. vibrational c. then the change is a. source power supply d. a mixed-bed column containing a strong-acid cation exchanger in the hydrogen form and a strong-base anion exchanger in the hydroxyl form 23. excited molecules in the vapor phase c.

Copper reduction methods d. glass filter c. barrier layer photocell d. Bouger-Beer Law 33. Ultra-violet spectrophotometry . none of these 32. all of these 35. Lane and Eynon methods 31. The nephelometric method of analysis is based upon a. except: a. rotational 28. materials used in the sample cells d. sample holders d. detectors 30. instrumental b. Beer Lambert's Law 29. Polarimetry c. source of radiant energy and the kind of detectors b. Which of the following involves emission of radiation by excited atoms: a. Beer's Law c. Bouger law's d. Which of the following may not be used in the determination of sugars? a.d. This law states that the amount of light absorbed or transmitted by a solution is an experimental function of the concentration of absorbing substance present and the sample path length a. Which is not the recommended device for a filter photometry? a. Bouger's Law b. all of these 34. Fajar's law c. sources of radiant energy b. formation of complexions with varying number of ligonds d. IR spectrophotometers have the same basic components as UV spectrophotometers. intermolecular reactions c. Lambert's Law d. hydrogen arc lamp b. materials used in the optical system c. TLC chromatography b. Beer's law b. In which of the following basic components could the devices be used interchangeable in both: a. optical system c. IR spectro-photometers have practically the same basic components as visible and UV spectro-photometers. Deviation's from Beer's Law may be due to a.

Flame photometry is simpler to use than emission spectroscopy 38. a. flame ionization detector d. does not follow Beer's Law d. a. Flame photometry is more senstive than emission spectroscopy b. All of these e. volatility of compound analyzed PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 1. Atomic absorption spectrophotometry (AAS) differs from visible absorption spectrophotometry because AAS a. intensity of the incident light c. which of the following statements will be true? a. does not need a monochromator c. concentration of the substance d. Gases are highly compressible b. Infra-red spectrophotometry c. has no light source b. thickness of the sample cell 37. argon c. methane 2. wavelength of the incident light b. thermal conductivity detector b. These are relatively large distances between molecules c. electron capture detector 40. oxygen b. refractive index detector c. nitrogen e. Flame photometry can analyze more metals than emission spectroscopy c. column temperature c. destroys the sample when a reading is made 39. Gas chromatography does not use this detector a. The main component of air is ____________. The absorption of a solution of a particular substance does not depend on the : a. Atomic absorption spectrometry d. A gas expands spontaneously to fill its container . ____________ is characteristic of gases. Of the following. If we compare flame spectrophotometry and emission spectroscopy. Gases form homogenous mixtures regardless of the non-reacting gas components d. the retention time is not dependent on a. In gas chromatography. carrier gas velocity b. volume of compound analyzed d. Flame photometry is less sensitive to the matrix than emission spectroscopy d.b. Nephelopmetry 36. carbon dioxide d.

a. a. Robert Boyle e. Of the following. can only contain molecules b. PV = constant b. Gaseous mixtures ________________. Which one of the following is NOT true about the unit Pascal (pa)? a. a. a gas may consist of both elements and compounds d. Lord Kelvin c. 1 Pa = 1 N/m2 b. The Pa is the Si unit for force 7. V = constant P d. One significant difference between gases and liquids is that ______________________. CH4 5. must contain both isolated atoms and molecules 6. The Pa is the SI unit for pressure c. PV = constant d. 1 atm = 101. Which of the following is most likely not a gas at room temperature? a. HCl c. a gas is made up of molecules b. are all heterogeneous c. 1 Pa = 100 torr e. Molecular compounds of low molecular weights tend to be gases at room temperature. n = constant P 9. ______________ is a valid statement of Charles¶ law. V = constant T e. Cl2 b.325 kPa d. H2 e. P = constant V c. V = constant x P . LiCl d. a. can only contain isolated atoms d. Of the following. a. ____________ is a correct statement of Boyle¶s law. The first person to investigate the relationship between the pressure of a gas ad its volume was ________________. Amadeo Avogadro b. P = constant T b. Jacques Charles d. V = constant T c. are all homogenous e.3. V = constant x n e. gases are always mixtures e. a gas assumes the volume of its container c. Joseph Louis Gay-Lussac 8. all of these answers are correct 4.

a. in the context of gases. 1. one mole of it occupies exactly 1 liter at standard temperature and pressure c. its behavior is described by the ideal-gas equation e. V2 = T2 ( V1) T1 e. one mole of it in a one-liter container exerts a pressure exactly 1 atm at room temperature 15. For which of the following changes is not clear whether the volume of a particular sample of an ideal gas will increase or decrease? a. only _________ is impossible for an ideal gas. increase the temperature and increase the pressure b. PV = constant d. 298 K and 1 torr d. -273rK e. V = constant T c. 0rC b. Of the following. 0. 273 K and 1 pascal . V = constant x n e. V1 = T1 V2 T2 d. 14. 298 K and 1 atm b. a. V1 = T1 = 0 V2 T2 13.36 c. 62. A gas is considered ³ideal´ if ___________. The volume of an ideal gas is zero at _________. -363rK 12. Which one of the following is a valid statement of Avogadro¶s law? a. it can be shown to occupy zero volume at 0rC d. V = constant x P 11. a. 22. a. 273 K and 1 atm c. -273rC d. keep temperature constant and decrease the pressure e. V1 = V2 T1 T2 b. it is not compressible b.4 e. V1T1 = V2T2 c.10. increase the temperature and decrease the pressure c. decrease the temperature and increase the pressure 16. refers to ____________________. -45rF c.00 d.08206 b. a. The molar volume of a gas at STP is _____L. Standard temperature and pressure (STP).7 14. increase the temperature and keep the pressure constant d. P = constant T b.

M = RT Gv Of the following. the molecules move slower e. HBr e. temperature. M = gRT PV c. d = gV RT e. Avogadro¶s law b. M = gV RT e. gas volume is inversely proportional to gas pressure. have appreciable molecular volume c. _____________ correctly relates pressure. a. ______________ correctly relates pressure. e.´ Is known as: a. have no attraction for one another b. volume. a. HCl An ideal gas differs from a real gas in that the molecules of an ideal gas _________________. Boyle¶s law c. 20. have a molecular weight of zero d. 19. Charle¶s law d. amount (mol). d = PTM gRV d. amount (mol). molecular mass (M).17. ³For a fixed mass of gas at constant temperature. 273 K and 1 torr Of the following. have no kinetic energy e. none of these answers Subtracting the vapor pressure of water from the total pressure of a gas collected over water is an example: . Kelvin¶s law If gas volume is doubled but the temperature remains constant: a. volume. density (d) and mass (g). molecular mass (M). d = PM RT b. the pressure stays the same b. a. CH4 c. M = PT GRV d. a. density (d) and mass (g). Graham¶s law e. NH3 b. 18. the molecules move faster c. temperature. ____________ will have the greatest rate of effusion at a given temperature. d = RT PM Of the following gases. Ar d. 21. M = dRT PV b. d = gRT PM c. 22. has an average molecular mass The statement. 23. the kinetic energy increases d.

Such a phenomenon is an example of: a. ideal gas law c. gases always behave ideally 29. SF6 b. Kr 30. Assuming ideal gas behavior. low temperature and high pressure c. van der Waals Theory e. polarizability c. Graham¶s law d. collisions between gas particles and container walls are perfectly elastic e. ideality c. NH3 c. The fact that a balloon filled with helium will leak more slowly than one filled with hydrogen is explained by citing: a. Of the following gases. persons at the other end of the room might soon perceive an odor due to gaseous emissions from the cigar. high temperature and low pressure d. triple point e. The energy of molecules of a gas: a. H2 e. effusion d. Dalton¶s law e. is the same for all molecules at constant temperature d. CH4 b. is dependent on concentration b. Avogadro¶s Hypothesis d. the one with the greatest density at STP is: a. monometry b. Which of the following assumptions is not used to explain the ideal gas law? a. increases with an increase in pressure 25. individual gas particles are perfectly compressible to nuclear size 26. be made to float on the surface of some water illustrates a property of liquid known as: a. N2 e. surface tension d. is distributed over a wide range at constant temperature c. CO2 d. Avogadro¶s hypothesis b. If someone were to light a cigar at one end of a closed room. which of the following gases would have the lowest density at standard temperature and pressure? a. increases with a decrease in temperature e. with proper care. The property of liquid that measures its resistance to flow is called: . inter-particle forces are negligible in gases c. collisions between gas particles are perfectly elastic d. ideal gas law 28. Graham¶s law 24. The phenomenon in which a steel needle can. He 31. diffusion e. van der Waals Theory b. Dalton¶s law c. viscosity 32. CF2Cl2 c. high temperature and high pressure e. compressibility b. Ne d.a. gas particles themselves occupy a negligible percent of total gas volume b. barometry 27. low temperature and low pressure b. Gases tend to behave ideally at a.

The temperature and pressure at which a liquid and its vapor are identical . boiling point b. the forces between the molecules and the surface are greater than the forces between the molecules of the liquid e. resistivity d. Which of the following does NOT describe the critical point of a liquid? a. wetability 33. and III d. I b. II and IV e. The molecules have no motion d. none of these answers 34. The molecules are mobile and relatively close together 35. The temperature and pressure at which a liquid s meniscus disappears b. The temperature ate which the vapor pressure of a liquid equals the external pressure is called the : a. triple point b. II and III c.a. the liquid has a lesser density than the surface b. polarizability c. absolute point 37. the forces between the liquid molecules are weak c. The point where the vapor pressure curve intersects the fusion temperature c. viscosity e. Liquid and vapor phases of a substance become indistinguishable at the: a. the following conditions could exist: (I) There is no transfer of molecules between liquid and vapor (II) The vapor pressure has a unique value (III) The opposing processes. A liquid will wet a surface if: a. sublimation point e. The molecules contract to fit the size of the container c. II. critical point e. capillarity b. The molecules in a patterned (oriented) arrangement e. The highest temperature at which a liquid can exist d. (liquid to vapor) and (vapor to liquid). critical point c. none of these combination 38. the liquid has a low vapor pressure d. Which of the following statements concerning molecules in the liquid state is true? a. melting point d. proceed at equal rates (IV) The concentration of vapor is dependent on time Which of the above choices are applicable? a. Cohesive forces are not important b. normal point c. When a liquid is in dynamic equilibrium with its vapor at a given temperature. permanent point d. thermal point 36. I.

Which of the following does NOT decrease rate of vaporization? b. high molecular energy. the pressure is lower e. A liquid is in equilibrium with its vapor. Molecules cannot go from the liquid phase to the gas phase because the amount of liquid in the container is constant e. none of these 41. none of these answers 45. atmospheric pressure b. no vapor will be left 42. high kinetic energy. large surface area e. the normal boiling point d. the temperature of the liquid equals: a. small surface area. The amount of gas in the container must exactly equal the amount of liquid d. If some of the vapor is allowed to escape. that is. rate of evaporation d. Under which of the following conditions will vaporization best occur? a. closing container lid c. The highest temperature at which it is possible to obtain a liquid form its vapor by increasing pressure 39. which of the following has occurred once equilibrium is reestablished? a. none of these 40. When a liquid is in equilibrium with its vapor in a closed container: a. large surface area c. low molecular mass 43. increasing forces between molecules a. strong molecular forces. The rate at which molecules from the liquid phase enter the gas phase exactly equals the rate at which molecules from the gas phase pass into the liquid phase b. 100rC b. The vapor will gradually change back to the liquid state.e. A container holds a small amount of liquid and its vapor in equilibrium If the volume of the container is decreased. high kinetic energy b. the temperature is higher c. low kinetic energy. small surface area d. low kinetic energy. Which of the following factors does NOT affect the normal boiling point of a liquid? a. A change in temperature will not change the pressure in the container c. increasing mass of molecule d. decreasing temperature e. the temperature is lower b. the vaporization point e. large surface area. what is the immediate result? . When the vapor pressure of a liquid equals atmospheric pressure. high mass. rate of condensation e. boiling point c. weak forces between molecules. strength of forces between molecules c. decreasing surface area 44. the pressure is higher d.

Which of the following has the largest number of lattice points per unit cell? a. The body centered cubic lattice d. Crystals generally have a specific shape for a specific substance d. The corners of unit cells are located at lattice points d. All of the following are true about lattice points in a crystal structure EXCEPT a.a. A crystal tends to shatter along defined planes c. none of these 46. The atoms or molecules of a crystal are arranged in a regularly repeating pattern b. The first lattice point can be placed at any location b. Avogadro s number and the density of the metal . The distances between adjacent atoms or molecules vary greatly d. gas at a temperature below that of its critical point e. The phenomenon of supercooling refers to the existence of a metastable: a. liquid at a temperature below that of its freezing point d. The face centered cubic lattice c. vaporization rate increases c. Atoms are always located on lattice points 51. liquid at a temperature below that of its sublimation point c. The face-centered cubic lattice is identical to the cubic closest packed lattice b. Some defects are present in the crystals 49. condensation rate decreases b. All these lattices have the same number of lattice points per unit cell 50. the liquid at a temperature below that of its critical point b. All of the following are logical consequences of the observed macroscopic properties of crystals EXCEPT a. The primitive (simple) cubic lattice b. All of the following statements are true EXCEPT a. All lattice points have identical environments c. The forces holding the atoms in a metal crystal are the same for essentially every atom except at the surface c. condensation rate increases d. vaporization rate decreases e. The cubic closest packed and hexagonal closest packed structures have identical fractions of space which are occupied by atoms d. All of the following are true about crystals EXCEPT a. Crystal usually have a high degree of symmetry 48. two-phase liquid/solid mixture at the freezing point 47. The body-centered cubic lattice is identical to the hexagonal closest packed lattice c. Which of the following represents the minimal amount of date necessary to determine the atomic mass of a metal? a. The density of a metal sample is independent of the size of the sample considered 52. A crystal softens and melts over a wide range of temperature b.

They are held together by electrostatic attractions and the structure includes no electrostatic repulsions d. The atoms in the structure are touching 54. All of the following are possible crystal defects EXCEPT . There are both electrostatic attractions and repulsions within the structure but the total of the attractions is greater 58.b. All of the following are consequences of the theory of the structure of metals EXCEPT a. Avogadro s number. There are strong covalent bonds between the ions b. The atoms are soft spheres that are deformed in the structure b. greater than. The metal atoms are close together b. Which of the following is the reason that metals conduct electricity? a. Electrons and protons in the structure can move freely 57. Which of the following is the reason why salt stay bonded in the solid state? a. the length of the unit cell edge. The atoms are of different sizes and the value calculated for the radius is an average d. the density of the metal. the type of lattice and the atomic radius of the metal 53. The number of valence electrons can be less than. The number of valence electrons is equal to the number of nearest neighbors d. Metals are ductile d. The number of valence electrons is less than the number nearest neighbors b. The atoms are almost perfect cubes c. the density of the metal and the length of the unit cell edge c. There are no empty spaces in metal structures c. Which of the following is assumed when calculating atomic radii of metals form crystallographic data? a. The structure consists of salt molecules tat bind tightly to other salt molecules c. What is the usual relationship between the number of valence electrons and the number of nearest neighbors of a metal atom in a solid metal? a. The number of valence electrons is greater than the number of nearest neighbors c. the length of the unit cell edge and the type of lattice d. Metals conduct electricity b. Metals break easily when they are bent 56. or equal to the number of nearest neighbors 55. Avogadro s number. Avogadro s number. Electrons in the structure can move freely d. Metals are malleable c. the density of the metal.

a. An atom or ion out of its regular position and occupying a normally empty hole b. A crystal in which he only defect is one pair of ions of the same charge which are missing c. An electron occupying a site that is normally occupied by a 1 anion d. A crystal containing some ion sites empty and some ions not bearing the expected charge 59. Which of the following is the most important explanation for the conductivity of metals? a. they are almost all solids b. their coordination numbers are high c. Their numbers of valence electrons are high d. Their densities are high 60. Which of the following pairs is isoelectronic? a. AIS and P b. GeAs and Se c. GeAs and GaSe d. Al and SiP

61. Which of the following is always the same for allotropes of the same element? a. The atomic mass b. the molar mass c. the structure d. the chemical and physical properties 62. The semiconductor crystalline Si has a low electrical conductivity in the dark because a. crystalline Si is a molecular solid b. the band gap energy is much greater than 3RT at 23 C c. the chemical bonding in the crystal is strong in all three dimensions d. Si has fewer valence electrons that elements that form metallic solids 63. A laser pointer of a doped semiconductor junction (i.e., a region of A1 doped semiconductor bonded to a region of P doped semiconductor) with a flowing current due to an applied voltage from a battery. Which of the following statements is TRUE? a. The color of the light is determined by the semiconductor band gap b. The device works better warm rather than cold because the number of thermally generated electrons is higher c. Light is emitted at the interface when a hole from the A1 region combines with an electron from the P region d. Both (a) and (c) 64. In order to dope crystalline Si with extra electrons, which element should be incorporated into the lattice? a. P b. A1 c. C d. O 65. All of the following statements about NaCl crystalline lattice are true, EXCEPT a. Every Cl is surrounded by 4 Na at equal bond lengths, and vice versa b. The structure along the x,y and z axes of the unit cell is all the same

c. If the length of one side of the unit cell and the atomic weights of Na and Cl are known, then the density can be calculated d. The unit cell is cubic even though the Na and Cl ions have different ionin radii 66. All of the following statements about the different forms of solid C are true, EXCEPT a. Diamond is transparent and shows no color because its band gap is quite large b. Graphite slides easily because the C atoms are strongly bonded in only two dimensions c. In diamond the structure around each C atom is due to C sp3 hybridization d. Diamond is hard yet brittle because the band gap is large 67. Solids with long-range microscopic order in their structures are called a. amorphous b. crystalline c. glasses d. metals e. none of these

68. A specimen is subjected to x-ray diffraction. The resulting diffraction pattern contains many sharply defined spots. The specimen is a. gaseous b. crystalline c. amorphous d. plastic e. liquid 69. A specimen is subjected to x-ray diffraction. The resulting diffraction pattern contains three diffuse rings close to primary x-ray beam. The specimen is a. gaseous b. crystalline c. amorphous d. polycrystalline e. colloidal 70. The colors in the gemstone opal result from a. the diffraction of visible light by colloidal crystals in the stone b. absorption by transition metal complexes c. contamination by large organic molecules which absorb light in the visible region d. radioactivity e. none of these 71. Which of the following symmetry elements can be found in an equilateral triangle? a. a 2-fold rotation b. a 3-fold rotation c. as mirror line or plane d. all of these e. none of these 72. About half of all the crystals studied so far belong to the ______ crystal system a. hexagonal b. orthorhombic c. cubic d. triclinic e. monoclinic 73. The crystal system with the minimum symmetry requirement of one 4-fold rotation is a. orthorhombic b. cubic c. tetragonal d. triclinic e. trigonal

74. Crystalline substances are ________. Amorphous substances are ________. a. isotropic, isotropic b. anisotropic, anisotropic c. isotropic, anisotropic d. anisotropic, isotropic 75. The three-dimensional array made up of all points within a crystal that have the same environment in the same orientation is called the a. unit cell b. primitive cell c. crystal system d. crystal lattice e. symmetry pattern 76. The basic repeating structural unit of a crystal lattice is the a. unit cell b. atom c. molecule d. atomic cluster e. symmetry pattern 77. The number of lattice points in a primitive unit cell is a. 1 b. 2 c. 4 d. 8 e. this depends on the crystal system

78. The conditions --- a b c, alpha= beta =gamma = 90r --- describe the _________ unit cell. a. tetragonal b. orthorhombic c. monoclinic d. hexagonal e. trigonal 79. The conditions --- a b c, alpha = gamma = 90r, ß 90r--- describe the _______ unit cell a. tetragonal b. orthorhombic c. monoclinic d. hexagonal e. trigonal 80. The number of lattice points in the unit cell for the body-centered cubic lattice is a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4 e. 8 81. For a face-centered cubic unit cell, each corner contributes _____ lattice points to the unit cell a. 1/8 b. ¼ c. ½ d. 1 e. none of these 82. In a face-centered cubic lattice, each lattice, each lattice point located in a face of the unit cell is shared equally with ___ other unit cell a. 1 b. 3 c. 5 d. 7 e. none of these 83. A metal crystallizes in a body-centered cubic lattice. Which of the following correctly relates the atomic radius r of the metal to the length of an edge a of the unit cell? a. r = a b. r = a 2 c. r = a 3 2 4 4 d. This cannot be determined without additional information e. none of these 84. The forces holding the molecules together in the lattice of a molecular solid are

ionic bonds c. 2 b. each ion is surrounded by ________ equidistant ions of opposite charge a. orthorhombic c. 2 c. dense e. cubic d. Na2S c. The coordination number of each cesium atom in CsCl is a. primitive b. are insulators d. have low melting points c. Nb d. primitive cubic 88. NH4I e. face-centered cubic b. 1 b. Molecular crystals typically a. close-packed c. tetragonal c. neutral metal atoms b. it could be more than one of these 93. monoclinic c. 6 d. 1 b. are soft b. atomic clusters 94. body-centered cubic e. monoclinic 87. Ga e. 8 e. covalent bonds d. all of these e. 2 c. tetragonal e. A certain solid is a good insulator. In the rock salt structure. a. none of these 86. The substance readily conducts electricity when molten. ZrSe d. In a metallic solid. molecular b. MgO 90. 8 e. 8 e. none of these 89. a. A structure that forms naturally when identical rigid spheres are placed as close together as possible is called a ____ arrangement. with cations occupying positions exactly between pairs of anions a. positively charged core ions d. hexagonal b. 12 . 1 e. ionic d. Which of the following cannot possibly crystallize in the rock salt structure? a. a. ½ d.a. 2 91. covalent c. How many chloride ions are contained in a unit cell of CsCl? a. 12 92. ¼ c. primitive cubic b. Rh c. trigonal d. none of these 85. The rock salt structure can be viewed as a _______ lattice of anions. In the hexagonal close-packed structure. metallic e. nematic 96. is brittle. A crystal structure which yields close packing for uniform rigid spheres is a. 4 d. Pt b. 4 d. molecules c. and has a high melting point. body-centered cubic d. electrons e. each atom has a coordination number of a. W 95. Most ionic solids crystallize in the ______ system a. 1/8 b. all of these e. VN b. face-centered d. van der Waals forces b. none of these 97. _______ are located at the lattice points. The metal with the highest melting point is a. 4 c. This substance is most likely _____ in nature. all of these e.

4 d. the temperature dependence of the rate . The rate constant of a reaction depends upon a. In diamond. white tin c. Bi c. 8 99. Frenkel defect c. As b. N d. formation of an F-center c. graphite d. long chains of sulfur atoms c. temperature d. 3 c. The most stable form of sulfur at room temperature is a. all of these e. extent of reaction c. gray tin 103. Molecularity of the reaction d. red phosphorous d. berthollide 104. chloride ions to lose electrons to the crystalline lattice b. Which of the following forms a layered structure? b. the lattice is disrupted before the molecules begin to tumble c. site defect e. red phosphorous e. each carbon is covalently bonded to ________ other carbon atoms a. P e. S4 tetrahedral d. In a plastic crystal. Schottky defect b. Which of the following forms a solid with the diamond structure? a. the molecules tumble before the lattice s disrupted b. S2 molecules with double bonds e. none of these 106. none of these 105. all of these e.98. sulfur b. a. Which element in group V does not form a solid with each atom bonded to three others? a. The mechanism of a reaction can sometimes be reduced from a. Concentration of reactants b. Irradiation of NaCl with ultraviolet light can cause a. 6 e. Nature of reactants c. The crystal defect in which an atom or ion is displaced from its regular position in the lattice to an interstitial site is called a(n) a. Temperature 108. S8 rings 100. formation of a nonstoichiometric crystal d. the molecules are rod-like d. white tin c. initial concentration of reactants b. Sb 101. sulfur a. gaseous atoms b. F-center d. Which of the following factors does not influence the rate of a reaction? a. time of reaction 107. all of these 102. 2 b. sodium e.

Doubling of the concentration of B increases the rate of the reaction by a factor of a. raising the temperature b. 8 d. depends on the initial concentrations of the reactants b. depends on the concentration of one of the products at equilibrium c. is not characteristic of the reaction Answer the following questions 111-113 with the help of the hypothetical reaction and its rate law 3A(g) + B(g) +2C(g) p D(g) + 2E(g) Rate of formation of D = k[A] [B]2 111. Doubling of the concentration of A increases the rate of reaction by a factor of a. the net equation d. lowering the temperature c. does not depend on the initial concentrations d. What effect does an increase in temperature of 10rC have on the rate of the reaction? a. 2 b. the rate law c. adding a catalyst 110. 4 d.5 c. 3 c. 2 b. increasing the concentration of A c. increasing the concentration of C d. Halved b. 9 112. It lowers the activation energy for the reaction . 4 d. It enables the reacting particles with the necessary activation energy c. If the volume of the container is suddenly reduced to one-half its original volume the rate will increase by a factor of a. may be increased by a. 4 c. The activation energy of a reaction may be lowered by a. 9 113. It increases the number of particles with the necessary activation of energy b. removing the products of the reaction d. Doubled d. 2 b. The equilibrium constant in a reversible chemical reaction at given temperature a. 16 114. the specific rate constant. increasing the temperature 115. the activation energy 109.b. 3 c. Tripled 116. Which of the following is the best explanation for the effect of increase in temperature on the rate of the reaction? a. Multiplied by 1. decreasing the concentration of D b. The value of k.

first order c. Both chemical luminescence and photosensitization d.7 hours. Which one of the following rate laws has an overall order of 0.5 for the reactions involving substances X. IR and Visible region b. second order d. Who among the following gave the law of photochemical equivalence? a. If the rate of reaction is independent of the concentration of the reactant. Rate = k (Cx) (Cz)0/(Cy)2 . free radicals d. The reactions of high molecularity are rare because a. compounds having hydrogen b. Lambert 121. Z.5 c. Einstein c. ionic compounds 125. (ln2/5. many body collisions are not favoured energetically d. the reaction is of a. third order 120. ESR spectra mainly helps in study of a. none of the above statement is true 118.? a. IR and micro wave region d.d. The energy of electromagnetic radiation depends on a.5 (Cz)0. activation energy of many body collisions is very high b. Grotthus d.7) hr d. (1/5.7)hr-1 -1 -1 c. none of the above 122. (ln2/5. the half life for the decomposition of N2O5 is 5. None of the above 123. and is dependent of the initial pressure of N2O5 the specific rate constant is a. Raman spectra may be obtained in a. Chemical luminescence b. Visible region only c. Rate = k (Cx)1. its wave length d.5 (Cy) 1 (Cz)0 d.5 (Cy) 0. its amplitude b. its frequency c. Y. ln 2 b. many body collisions have low probability c. Photosensitization c.7)hr 119. At 25rC . Rate = k (Cx)0. zero order b. Rate = k(Cx) (Cy) (Cz) b. It enables the activated complex to be more easily converted to the products 117. Drapper b. compounds having carbons c. What term is used to define the phenomenon of emission of light in a chemical reaction? a. UV and visible region 124.

059V d. A possible advantage to using the half reaction method for balancing oxidation-reduction equation is a. catalyst 127. 0. Hydrogen ions are more readily reduced than a.059V c. is always made of copper b. oxygen gas is produced at the cathode 132. shows a negative oxidation number 130.91 x 1025 133. is readily oxidized d.00V b. oxygen gas is produced at the anode d. A good reducing agent a. one ampere per second b. Cu++ . pressure b.47 x 1021 d. oxidation numbers are not assigned c. 0. chlorine gas is produced at the anode b.f.00gm of Cu from Cu2+ at the cathode of an electrolytic cell is a.m. 1. is always made of zinc c. 6. 0. Ag+ b. A nail c. 6.126. will always react rapidly b. 96.02 x 1023 electronic charges 131.02 x 1023 electrons per second d. A Faraday of electricity is a. A stick b.0 x 10-1 M is a. A glass rod d. has a negative oxidation potential c. value for oxidation from H2 at 1.500 coulombs per second c. may be made of an inert metal d. electrons need not be balanced b. In a galvanic cell the cathode a. Chemical reaction rates in solution do not depend to any great extent upon a. always attracts negative ions in the solution 135. 9. atoms need not be balanced 134. When aqueous HCl is electrolyzed a. hydrogen gas is produced at the anode c. Which of the following might be used as an electrode? a. The number of electrons necessary to produce 1.0 atm to H+ at 1. 0. temperature c. The e.030V 129.89 x 1022 b.04 x 103 c. charges are not balanced d. 1. A soda straw 128. concentration d. 3.

6g c. a. the solution around the anode becoming brown 143. OHd. lead dioxide dissolves 142.+ 4 H+ + 3 Ag(s) p 3 Ag+ + NO(g) +2H2O d.00 x 10-2mole c. an electrolytic cell c. 6. c. 3.+ Br2 140. the volume of ozygen produced at STP at the anode is a. Cl2 144.16 ml As a lead storage battery is discharged water is used up lead is formed lead sulfate is consumed . Cl2(g) + 2 Br. If an aqueous solution of KI is electrolyzed (with platinum electrodes) one would expect to find a. Cl2 d.10 x 10-4 liter b. Zn++ 136. a Daniel cell d.00 x 10-1mole 141. If aqueous Cu SO4 is electrolyzed for one minute with a current of 2.16 x 10-4 liter 145. The following reaction does not occur spontaneously (all ions at 1m concentration. the amount of sulfuric acid decreases b. ions 137. 1. a product formed at the cathode is a.65 ampere is drawn from a Daniel cell for exactly 1 hour. b. 5.200 liter of 0. a galvanic cell b. d. a. 1. NO3. 1. 0.8g 139. 2Cr(s) + 3Cl2(g) p 2 Cr+3 + 6 Clb. an anode c.00 ampere. 23.00 x 10-3mole b. the solution around the cathode becoming alkaline d. 11. a cathode b.p 2 Cl. When an aqueous solution of NaCl is electrolyzed.100 M NaCl are electrolyzed until the OH.+ 2 H+ + Ag(s) p Ag+ + H2O + NO2(g) c. A current of 9.00 x 10-2mole c. H+ c. 1. NO3.concentration is 0. the lead electrode becomes coated with lead sulfate c. As the lead storage battery is charged. Na b. oxygen liberated at the anode c. If 0.0500M. 5. a dry cell 138. 0. When a cell of a lead storage battery is being charged.197g d. Not all galvanic cells contain a.180g b. The loss of mass of anode is a. potassium deposited at the cathode b. all gases at 1 atmosphere pressure) a.c.96ml c. a porous partition d. it is a. sulfuric acid is regenerated d. how many moles of Cl2 gas are produced? a.

Fe++.34) a. The amount of Ag (At. In a salt-bridge KCl is used because a. electrical conductivity series b.34 = -0.34 ± (-0. Fe++. the products of the reaction will be: a. ±0. Fe++ and Cu+ c. What will happen if the cathode is pulled out of solution? a. Ni+2 and Cr+3 respectively.. Fe and Cu b. The negative ions will continue to move towards the anode and the positive ions will stop moving c. which solution finally turns blue? a. sulfuric acid is consumed 146. 52) deposited will be: . Ni (At. Ag and Co++ 147. Electrophotometer 148. Pb (NO3)2 b. KCl is an electrolyte c.76) = +1. pH meter c. ±0. Polarimeter b.Wt. Cu and Co++ d. One Faraday of current was passed through the electrolytic cells placed in series containing solutions of Ag+.d.42V d.34 ± (-0. electrochemical series d. chemical affinity series 149. 59) and Cr (At. Cd (NO3)2 151. Wt. The positive ions will start moving towards the anode and negative ions will stop moving b. Which of the following instruments makes use of the standard electrode potentials and the variation of electrode potential with concentration? a. When an electric current is passed through a cell containing an electrolyte. The series in which the electrode potentials of metals are arranged in an order is known as: a. If a large quantity of cobalt metal were dropped into a solution containing Ag+.have the same transference number d. Cu. Fe+2. AgNO3 d.76) = +0. positive ions move towards the cathode and negative ions towards the anode. KCl is present in calomel electrode 150. Wt.34) = -1. ±0.42 V b. Both negative and positive ions move towards the anode d. K+ and Cl.076 + 0. What is the standard cell potential for the cell Zn. Cu+2. Ag. None of these movements will take place 152. agar-agar forms a good jelly with it b. Zn (NO3)2 c. 108). Four colorless salt solutions are placed in separate test-tubes and a strip of copper is dipped in each. Ag. Electrophorous d.10V 153. electrode potential series c.76 ± (+0. Zn+2 (IM) ll Cu+2 (IM).10V c.76. -0. Cu (Er for Zn+2 l Zn = -. Er for Cu+2 l Cu = +0.

036V Fe++ + 2e p Fe Fe+++ + 3e p Fe The standard electrode potential (Er) for Fe+++ + e p Fe++ is a.771V 155.78V when both the half cells (a) and (b) are connected with SHE. C = F-P+2 158.5g 52. The correct sign for the electrode potentials will be: a. copper a. 108g 108g 108g 108g Nickel 29. sodium b.0g 108g 166g Given standard electrode potentials Er -0. +0.5g Chromium 17. lead c. +ve for half cell (I) b. When an iron wire is immersed in an acidic solution of CuSo4.404V d. +ve for half cell (ii) c. formation of a colorless salt of Cu++ 157.476V b.440V -0. d. b. The magnitude of the individual half cell potentials are given (i) CO2+ + 2e p Co 0. This is due to a.404V c.28V (ii) Hg2+ + 2e p 2Hg 0. F = C-P+2 d. gold b. formation of double complex between iron and copper sulfate d.5g 59g 108g 117. Magnesium cannot displace from solution the ions of a. ±0. ±ve for half cell (ii) 156. The mathematical statement of Gibb¶s phase rule is . c. oxidation of CuSO4 c. reduction of Cu++ b. the metallic electrode Co is found to be ±ve and Hg electrode is found to be +ve. the blue color of the solution is lost after some time.Silver a. +0. ±0. 154.

3 c. What is the degree of freedom of a system consisting of a gaseous mixture of carbon dioxide and nitrogen? a. 1 d. 2 a. The homogenous physically distinct and mechanically separable parts of the heterogeneous system in equilibrium are called a. 3 164. 1 d. 0 c. 0 161. 3 b. How many components are necessary to define the following equilibrium? CaCO3p Solid a. phases c. 0 c. 1 b. P = C+F+2 159. 1 d. degrees of freedom b. c. 1 d. 2 a. d. none of the above 160. peritectic temperature meritectic temperature transition temperature all of the above n CaO + CO2 solid gas b. 2 a. C = F-P+1 d. 0 c. b. The incongruent melting point is so called . 2 a. 3 b. The minimum number of phases existing in a system is 165.c. 3 b. 1 d. components d. How many phases are present in the water system? 162. How many phases will be there in the system made of water and methyl alcohol? 163. 0 c.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful